WO2019131905A1 - Rotating electrical machine - Google Patents

Abstract

This rotating electrical machine is equipped with an armature (50) and a field element (40) having a magnet portion (42). The magnet portion (42) is provided with a plurality of magnets (91, 92) that are arranged side by side with a prescribed distance therebetween in the circumferential direction. In the magnets (91, 92), the easy axis of magnetization is oriented such that said orientation becomes parallel to the d-axis on the d-axis side in comparison to the q-axis side, and the magnetic path of the magnet is formed along the easy axis of magnetization. The field element (40) is provided with a field element core (43) that is a soft magnetic body. The field element core (43) has protruding portions (1002) that protrude toward the armature side, the protruding portions (1002) are provided further toward the q-axis side than the d-axis side in the circumferential direction, and both circumferential-direction end faces (1002a, 1002b) of each protruding portion (1002) are in contact, respectively, with the circumferential-direction end faces (91a, 92a) of the magnets.

Description

Electric rotating machine Cross-reference to related applications

The present application is filed on Dec. 28, 2017, the Japanese Application No. 2017-255074, filed Dec. 28, 2017 on the Japanese Application No. 2017-255077, and Dec. 28, 2017. Japanese application number 2017-255081, Japanese application number 2017-255076 filed on December 28, 2017, and Japanese application number 2017-255075 filed on December 28, 2017, 2017 Application No. 2017-255508 filed Dec. 28, 2012, Japan Application No. 2017-255071 filed Dec. 28, 2017, and Japan Application No. filed Dec. 28, 2017 2017-255073 and Japanese Application No. 2018-1407 filed July 26, 2018 No. 1, Japanese Application No. 2018-140739 filed on July 26, 2018, Japanese Application No. 2018-140737 filed on July 26, 2018, and Application on August 29, 2018 Japanese Application No. 2018-160893, Japanese Application No. 2018-160894 filed on August 29, 2018, and Japanese Application No. 2018-166445 filed on September 5, 2018, 2018 The contents of the disclosure are incorporated herein by reference based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2018-204496 filed on October 30, 2008.

The disclosure in this specification relates to a rotating electrical machine.

BACKGROUND ART As described in, for example, Patent Document 1, a rotary electric machine applied to home appliances, industrial machines, game machines, agricultural construction machines, and automobiles is conventionally known. Generally, a so-called slot, which is a winding accommodating portion partitioned by teeth, is formed in the stator core (that is, an iron core), and a conductor such as a copper wire or an aluminum wire is accommodated in the slot. The line is configured. On the other hand, in the rotor, it is general to arrange permanent magnets so as to have a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction.

JP 2011-250508 A

The magnetic field emitted by the stator winding passes through the permanent magnet. For this reason, the permanent magnet has a possibility of demagnetization (irreversible demagnetization) by an external magnetic field. In particular, when a permanent magnet is attached to the rotor core (iron core), the magnetic field generated by the stator winding causes the rotor core with high permeability to easily generate a magnetic force, which may cause demagnetization. Get higher.

The present disclosure has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its main object is to provide a rotating electrical machine having a magnet that is hard to demagnetize.

The disclosed aspects in this specification employ different technical means in order to achieve their respective goals. The objects, features and advantages disclosed in the present specification will become more apparent by reference to the following detailed description and the accompanying drawings.

The means 1A includes a field element having a magnet portion including a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction, and an armature having a multiphase armature winding, wherein the field element and the armature In a rotating electrical machine that uses any of
The magnet unit has a plurality of magnets arranged side by side at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction,
The magnet is oriented such that the direction of the easy magnetization axis is parallel to the d axis on the side of the d axis which is the center of the magnetic pole as compared with the side of the q axis which is the magnetic pole boundary. The road is formed,
The field element includes a field element core which is a soft magnetic body on the opposite side of the armature from the magnet unit,
The field element core has a convex portion protruding toward the armature in a radial direction from a gap between the magnets.
The convex portion is provided on the q axis side of the d axis in the circumferential direction, and the end surfaces on both sides in the circumferential direction in the convex portion respectively abut on the circumferential end surface of the magnet.

In the magnet, the direction of the magnetization easy axis is oriented parallel to the d axis on the d axis side as compared to the q axis side. That is, on the q-axis side of the magnet, a magnet magnetic path is formed so as to be closer to the circumferential direction as compared to the d-axis side. Therefore, by bringing the end faces on both sides in the circumferential direction in the convex portion into contact with the circumferential end faces of the magnet, the magnet magnetic paths of the magnets adjacent in the circumferential direction are easily connected via the convex portion The magnetic flux path tends to be longer. Therefore, demagnetization becomes difficult, and the length of the magnet path increases, so that the magnetic flux density in the d axis can be improved. In addition, since the magnetic flux easily passes through the projections, the field element core can be thinned.

In the means 2A, in the means 1A, the armature side circumferential surface of the magnet and the circumferential end surface form the inflow and outflow surfaces of magnetic flux, and the armature side circumferential surface and the circumferential direction end surface are Arc-shaped magnet magnetic paths are formed to connect them.

Therefore, by bringing the end surfaces on both sides in the circumferential direction in the convex portion into contact with the circumferential end surfaces of the magnet, it becomes easier to connect the magnet magnetic paths of adjacent magnets in the circumferential direction via the convex portion. By forming the magnet magnetic path so as to connect the armature side peripheral surface and the circumferential end surface, the magnet magnetic path can be easily lengthened.

The means 3A is, in the means 1A or 2A, provided that the circumferential end face of the magnet is orthogonal to the magnet magnetic path,
The end face of the convex portion in the circumferential direction is provided in accordance with the angle of the circumferential end face in contact.

The magnetic flux passes so as to be the shortest distance unless magnetic saturation occurs. For this reason, by providing the circumferential direction end face of the magnet so as to be orthogonal to the magnet magnetic path, the magnetic flux path of the adjacent magnet can be easily connected via the convex portion.

In any of the means 1A to 3A, the means 4A is provided with a recess that is recessed in the radial direction on the armature side circumferential surface of the magnet on the q axis side of the d axis.

The part on the armature side is easily demagnetized in the part on the q-axis side of the magnet in which the above-described magnet magnetic path is formed. Therefore, by providing recesses on the armature side circumferential surface on the q-axis side of the d-axis on the q-axis side, it is possible to reduce the portions that are likely to be demagnetized.

In the means 5A, the recess is provided in the means 4A so that the air gap from the magnet to the armature in the radial direction gradually increases toward the q-axis side.

As a result, the portion susceptible to demagnetization can be reduced, and the magnetic flux density distribution can be made close to a sine wave shape. That is, the eddy current loss on the armature side can be suppressed, and the cogging torque and torque ripple can be reduced.

In the means 6A, in any of the means 1A to 5A, the convex portion is formed such that its radial dimension is shorter than that of the magnet,
The magnet unit has an auxiliary magnet which is disposed between the adjacent magnets in the circumferential direction and which is disposed closer to the armature than the convex portion in the radial direction.
In the auxiliary magnet, a magnetization easy axis parallel to the circumferential direction in the q axis of the magnet is oriented, and a magnet magnetic path of the auxiliary magnet is provided along the magnetization easy axis.

In the auxiliary magnet, the easy magnetization axis parallel to the circumferential direction is oriented on the q axis of the magnet, and the magnet magnetic path of the auxiliary magnet is provided along the easy magnetization axis. For this reason, the magnet magnetic path of an auxiliary magnet can improve the magnetic flux density in d axis of a magnet. In addition, since the magnetization easy axis of the auxiliary magnet is parallel to the circumferential direction, it is difficult to demagnetize even if it is affected by the magnetic field from the armature. Therefore, even if the auxiliary magnet is arranged closer to the armature side than the convex portion on the q axis, demagnetization is difficult and the magnetic flux density on the d axis can be strengthened. Further, since the auxiliary magnet is disposed between the magnets and utilizing the space on the armature side of the convex portion, the auxiliary magnet can be suppressed from projecting to the armature side more than the magnet.

In the means 7A, in any of the means 1A to 6A, the armature winding has conducting wire portions arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at positions facing the field elements,
In the armature,
An inter-conductor member is provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction, and as the inter-conductor member, the circumferential width dimension of the inter-conductor member in one magnetic pole is Wt, and the saturation flux density of the inter-conductor member is Bs. A configuration using a magnetic material or nonmagnetic material having a relationship of Wt × Bs ≦ Wm × Br, where Wm is the width dimension of the magnet portion in one magnetic pole and Br is the residual magnetic flux density of the magnet portion. Or
Alternatively, the inter-conductor member is not provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction.

As a result, the influence of magnetic saturation in the armature can be reduced and torque can be improved.

Also, conventionally, as described in, for example, Patent Document 2 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-169338), a rotating electric machine applied to home appliances, industrial machines, game machines, agricultural construction machines, and automobiles. It has been known. Generally, a so-called slot, which is a winding accommodating portion partitioned by teeth, is formed in the stator core (that is, an iron core), and a conductor such as a copper wire or an aluminum wire is accommodated in the slot. The line is configured.

By the way, when the stator winding is wound in the slot, the coil end may protrude axially outward from the stator core. At the coil end, although it does not contribute so much to the rotational torque, the rotating magnetic field emitted by the magnet portion of the rotor may be directly applied. In this case, since the magnetic field intensity seen from the stator winding is a wave-like alternating magnetic field, eddy currents flow through the conductors constituting the stator winding. As a result, eddy current loss may occur, which may increase the temperature of the stator or increase the vibration of the stator. In particular, when the size of the magnet portion in the axial direction is larger than that of the stator core, the leakage flux tends to be large at the coil end and the influence of the rotating magnetic field becomes large, thereby increasing the eddy current loss.

The following means are made in view of the above-mentioned situation, and the main object is to provide a dynamo-electric machine which can reduce eddy current loss.

The means 1B is
A field element having a magnet portion including a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in a circumferential direction, and an armature having a multiphase armature winding, any one of the field element and the armature being In a rotating electrical machine that is considered as a rotor,
The thickness in the radial direction at both axial end portions of the magnet portion is axially more central than the end portions so that the cross section of the magnet portion in the axial direction of the rotor is convex toward the armature side It is thinner than the side part,
A thin-walled portion at the end of the magnet portion is provided at a position overlapping the coil end of the armature winding in the axial direction.

With this configuration, the distance (air gap) from the coil end to the thin portion becomes longer in the radial direction (direction orthogonal to the axial direction), and the magnet magnetic path toward the coil end in the thin portion is shortened. It is possible to weaken the magnetic flux (leakage magnetic flux) emitted to it. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the magnetic flux reaching the coil end from the magnet unit, and to suppress the eddy current loss in the coil end.

Further, by making the cross section of the magnet portion convex toward the armature side, at least a part of the magnetic flux generated from the thin portion gathers on the axial center side of the magnet portion. For this reason, compared with the case where a magnet part does not overlap with a coil end, or it does not make it convex, the magnetic flux emitted from the center side can be strengthened and a torque improvement can be expected.

The means 2B is, in the means 1B, an end face in the axial direction in the magnet section is an inclined surface which is inclined with respect to a direction orthogonal to the axial direction.

According to the above configuration, when the magnet portion is compressed and molded, it is easier to mold as compared with the case where a step is provided. In particular, it is effective in a sintered magnet.

In the means 1B or 2B, the means 3B is oriented such that the easy axis of magnetization in the thin-walled part in the magnet section is closer to be parallel to the axial direction than the easy axis in the axially central portion, A magnet magnetic path is formed along the easy magnetization axis.

In the magnet portion, when the magnetization easy axis in the thin portion is closer to the axial direction than the portion on the central side, the magnetic flux is collected from the thin portion to the central side, and improvement in torque can be expected. At the same time, it is possible to weaken the magnetic flux generated in the direction orthogonal to the axial direction from the thin-walled part to the side of the coil end, and it can be expected to reduce the eddy current loss at the coil end.

In the means 4B, in the means 3B, the magnet section makes the armature side circumferential surface and the end face in the axial direction the inflow and outflow surfaces of magnetic flux, and connects the armature side circumferential surface and the end face in the axial direction Thus, an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path is formed.

According to the above configuration, the magnetic flux is less likely to pass through the coil end disposed in the range of the end of the magnet portion in the axial direction, and the magnetic flux passes from the circumferential surface of the armature toward the armature It will be easier. Therefore, it is possible to expect reduction in eddy current loss at the coil end as well as torque improvement.

In the means 5B according to any one of the means 1B to 4B, the magnet unit includes a plurality of magnets arranged in the circumferential direction, and the thin portions are respectively provided on the plurality of magnets.
A holding member provided on at least one of the axial direction end portions of the magnet unit;
The holding member has an engagement portion that engages in the radial direction with the thin-walled portion in each of the magnets.

For this reason, with respect to each magnet, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation and the dropout in the radial and axial directions by the holding member. In addition, since the radial thickness is engaged with the thin portion having a small thickness, the provision of the holding member can suppress the field element from becoming thick in the radial direction.

In the means 6B according to any one of the means 1B to 5B, the magnet unit is a magnet having an intrinsic coercive force of 400 kA / m or more and a residual magnetic flux density of 1.0 T or more. It is configured using.

When a magnet as described above is employed, torque can be improved while suitably reducing eddy current loss at the coil end.

In the means 7B, in any one of the means 1B to 6B, the direction of the easy axis of magnetization of the magnet portion is parallel to the d axis on the side of the d axis which is the center of the magnetic pole compared to the side of the q axis which is the magnetic pole boundary. It is comprised using the magnet orientated so that it might become.

In the configuration using a magnet in which the direction of the magnetization easy axis is parallel to the d axis on the d axis side as compared to the q axis as the magnet of the magnet unit, the magnetic flux in the d axis is enhanced An improvement in torque can be expected. In addition, in each magnetic pole, the surface magnetic flux change (increase and decrease of magnetic flux) from the q axis to the d axis becomes gentle. Therefore, the rapid voltage change resulting from the switching imbalance is suppressed, and consequently, the eddy current loss and the vibration of the armature can be suppressed.

In the means 8B, in the means 7B, the magnet has a magnetization easy axis parallel to the d axis or a direction parallel to the d axis near the d axis, and a magnetization easy axis along the q axis at the q axis An arc-shaped magnet magnetic path is formed which is orthogonal to or nearly orthogonal to the q-axis.

According to the above configuration, the magnet magnetic flux in the d axis is strengthened, and the magnetic flux change in the vicinity of the q axis is suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to preferably realize a magnet in which the surface magnetic flux change from the q-axis to the d-axis is smooth in each magnetic pole.

In the means 9B, in the means 7B or 8B, the armature side circumferential surface of the circumferential surface of the magnet and the end face on the q axis side in the circumferential direction are the inflow and outflow surfaces of the magnetic flux; A magnet magnetic path is formed so as to connect the child side peripheral surface and the end face on the q axis side.

According to the above configuration, the magnet magnetic flux in the d axis is strengthened, and the magnetic flux change in the vicinity of the q axis is suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to preferably realize a magnet in which the surface magnetic flux change from the q-axis to the d-axis is smooth in each magnetic pole.

In the means 10B, in any of the means 1B to 9B, the armature winding has conducting wire portions arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
Each of the conducting wires constituting the conducting wire portion is a bundle of a plurality of strands, and is a strand assembly in which a resistance value between the bundled strands is larger than a resistance value of the strand itself.

This can further reduce the eddy current loss at the coil end.

Also, conventionally, as described in, for example, Patent Document 1, there is known a rotary electric machine applied to home appliances, industrial machines, game machines, agricultural construction machines, and automobiles. Generally, a so-called slot, which is a winding accommodating portion partitioned by teeth, is formed in the stator core (that is, an iron core), and a conductor such as a copper wire or an aluminum wire is accommodated in the slot. The line is configured. On the other hand, in the rotor, it is general to arrange permanent magnets so as to have a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction.

The magnetic field emitted by the stator winding passes through the permanent magnet. When the rotor rotates with respect to the stator, the magnetic field of the stator winding viewed from the permanent magnet is a wave-like alternating magnetic field, so eddy current flows in the permanent magnet. As a result, the temperature of the permanent magnet rises with the eddy current loss, the magnetic flux density becomes weak, and the torque may decrease.

The following means are made in view of the above-mentioned situation, and the main purpose is to provide a dynamo-electric machine which can reduce eddy current loss in a magnet part.

Means 1C is
The field element comprising: a field element comprising a magnet portion having a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction; and an armature comprising an armature winding of multiple phases. In a rotating electric machine having one of the armatures as a rotor,
The magnet unit has a plurality of permanent magnets arranged in line in at least one of a circumferential direction and an axial direction,
The field element includes a magnet insulating portion having at least an inter-magnet member disposed between the permanent magnets adjacent in the circumferential direction or the axial direction,
The inter-magnet member is made of an insulating material.

According to the above configuration, the magnet unit is configured of a plurality of permanent magnets, and an inter-magnet member configured of an insulating material is disposed between the permanent magnets adjacent in the circumferential direction or the axial direction. For this reason, it can suppress that an eddy current flows into an adjacent permanent magnet, and can suppress an eddy current loss.

In the means 2C, in the means 1C, a plurality of the permanent magnets are arranged side by side at least in the circumferential direction in the magnet unit,
The inter-magnet member disposed between the circumferentially adjacent permanent magnets engages with the end face of the permanent magnet in the circumferential direction.

With the above configuration, the inter-magnet member functions as a detent for the permanent magnet. For this reason, it can prevent that a permanent magnet moves to the circumferential direction and an adjacent permanent magnet contacts, and can perform insulation appropriately.

In the means 3C, in the means 1C or 2C, on the armature-side circumferential surface on the armature side among the circumferential surfaces of the magnet portion, a recess opened to the armature side is provided along the axial direction of the rotor It has been
The magnet insulating portion has an engaging portion in the recess that radially and circumferentially engages the permanent magnet.

According to the above configuration, the recess on the side surface of the armature open to the armature is provided, and the engaging portion is provided in the recess to engage with the permanent magnet in the radial direction and the circumferential direction. Therefore, the permanent magnet can be locked by the engaging portion. And a permanent magnet moves to a circumferential direction, it prevents that an adjacent permanent magnet contacts, and it can insulation appropriately. In addition, it is possible to prevent the permanent magnet from falling off to the armature side by restricting the movement of the permanent magnet to the armature side. In addition, by providing the engaging portion in the recess, the engaging portion protrudes to the armature side more than the permanent magnet as compared with the case where the engaging portion is provided between the armature side circumferential surface and the armature. Can be suppressed. Moreover, the amount of magnets can be reduced by providing a recessed part in a magnet part.

In the means 3C, the means 4C is provided on the side of the magnetic pole boundary q axis, rather than the side of the d axis which is the magnetic pole center.

It is not desirable to provide a recess on the armature side circumferential surface because the d-axis part of the permanent magnet is likely to affect the magnetic flux density to the armature as compared to the q-axis part. . More specifically, in the case where a recess is provided on the d-axis side on the armature side circumferential surface of the magnet portion, the space between the armature and the magnet portion becomes large. That is, the air gap may be large, and the magnetic flux density to the armature may be reduced. In addition, when the recess is provided on the d-axis side, the magnetic flux path to the armature may be reduced because the magnet magnetic path of the permanent magnet is shortened. Therefore, providing a recess on the side of the d axis of the permanent magnet is not preferable because it is a portion that easily affects the magnetic flux density. Therefore, the concave portion is provided on the q axis side.

In the case where the concave portion is provided on the q-axis side of the permanent magnet, the magnetic flux density to the armature winding tends to be reduced on the q-axis. However, in the q-axis, even if the magnetic flux density to the armature winding is lowered, the influence on the torque is small as compared with the case where the magnetic flux density is provided on the d-axis side. On the other hand, by providing the concave portion on the q axis side, it is possible to suppress the rapid magnetic flux change in the vicinity of the q axis. And, by suppressing the rapid magnetic flux change in the vicinity of the q-axis, it is possible to suppress the generation of the eddy current in the armature winding.

In the means 5C, in any one of the means 1C to 3C, the permanent magnet has the direction of the easy axis of magnetization parallel to the d-axis on the side of the d-axis at the magnetic pole center as compared with the q-axis side at the magnetic pole boundary. It is oriented to be

As a result, the magnet flux in the d axis is strengthened, and the change in flux near the q axis is suppressed. Therefore, while improving a torque, it becomes possible to reduce the eddy current loss in an armature winding.

With the above configuration, on the q-axis side of the permanent magnet, the portion on the armature side is likely to have a short magnet magnetic path compared with the portion on the opposite side in the radial direction, etc. Become. Therefore, when the concave portion is provided on the q-axis side, reduction in the magnetic flux density in the d-axis can be suppressed.

In the means 6C, in the means 5C, the permanent magnet has a magnetization easy axis parallel to the d axis or a direction close to parallel to the d axis in a portion near the d axis, and a magnetization easy axis is q axis in a portion near the q axis Is oriented so as to form an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path which is orthogonal to or nearly orthogonal to the q-axis.

According to the above configuration, the magnet magnetic flux in the d axis is strengthened, and the magnetic flux change in the vicinity of the q axis is suppressed. Further, in the case of the above configuration, in the q-axis of the permanent magnet, the portion on the armature side is a portion that is easily demagnetized. Therefore, when the concave portion is provided on the q-axis side, reduction in the magnetic flux density in the d-axis can be suppressed.

In the means 7C, in any of the means 1C to 6C, the magnet insulating portion has an opening which is open so that the armature side circumferential surface of the magnet portion is exposed to the armature.

The presence of an insulating member between the permanent magnet and the armature impedes the passage of magnetic flux. In addition, when an insulating member is present between the permanent magnet and the armature, the distance between the permanent magnet and the armature becomes long, which hinders the passage of magnetic flux. For this reason, the armature side peripheral surface was exposed with respect to the armature. As a result, even if the permanent magnets are insulated, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the magnetic flux density emitted from the permanent magnets to the armature.

In the means 8C, in any one of the means 1C to 7C, the outer surface on the armature side in the magnet insulating portion is located on the opposite side of the armature in the radial direction than the armature side circumferential surface in the magnet portion.

In general, the insulating member has a larger expansion coefficient than the permanent magnet. Therefore, in consideration of the expansion coefficient, the outer surface of the magnet insulating portion in the radial direction is made to be opposite to the armature side than the armature side circumferential surface of the magnet portion. Thereby, even if thermal expansion occurs, it is possible to suppress that the magnet insulating portion protrudes in the radial direction from the permanent magnet more than the permanent magnet, and it is possible to suppress that the rotation is hindered.

The means 9C is any of the means 1C to 8C:
The field element is provided with a field element core member which is a soft magnetic body on the side opposite to the armature side of the magnet unit,
The magnet insulating portion has an insulating layer covering a side surface opposite to the armature of the magnet portion in the radial direction,
The magnet insulating portion is fixed to the field element core member together with the magnet portion in a state in which the non-armature side circumferential surface of the magnet portion is covered with the insulating layer.

By insulating between the field element core member and the magnet portion, generation of an eddy current can be suppressed between the magnet portion and the core member. Therefore, the eddy current loss in the field element can be suppressed.

Also, in the case of an outer rotor type rotating electric machine having a field element as a rotor, the insulating layer can be made to function as a damper (buffer) by providing it between the field element core member and the permanent magnet. it can. As a result, even if centrifugal force is generated in the magnet portion during rotation, the insulating layer can prevent the contact of the field element core member with the permanent magnet. Therefore, insulation is suitably performed, and eddy current loss in the field element can be suppressed.

The means 10C is any one of the means 1C to 9C:
The magnet insulating portion has an annular end plate axially outside the magnet portion,
The end portions in the axial direction of the inter-magnet members adjacent in the circumferential direction are respectively fixed to the end plate.

Thereby, the strength of the inter-magnet member can be improved, and the detent of the permanent magnet can be suitably prevented.

In the means 11C, in any one of the means 1C to 10C, the permanent magnet has an intrinsic coercive force of 400 kA / m or more and a residual magnetic flux density of 1.0 T or more.

This can increase the torque.

The means 12C is any of the means 1C to 11C:
The armature winding has conducting wire portions arranged at predetermined intervals in a circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
In the armature,
An inter-conductor member is provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction, and as the inter-conductor member, the circumferential width dimension of the inter-conductor member in one magnetic pole is Wt, and the saturation flux density of the inter-conductor member is Bs. A configuration using a magnetic material or nonmagnetic material having a relationship of Wt × Bs ≦ Wm × Br, where Wm is the width dimension of the magnet portion in one magnetic pole and Br is the residual magnetic flux density of the magnet portion. Or
Alternatively, the inter-conductor member is not provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction.

Thereby, the torque limitation caused by the magnetic saturation can be eliminated.

The means 13C is any of the means 1C to 12C:
The armature winding has conducting wire portions arranged at predetermined intervals in a circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
Each of the conducting wires constituting the conducting wire portion is a bundle of a plurality of strands, and is a strand assembly in which a resistance value between the bundled strands is larger than a resistance value of the strand itself.

Thereby, the eddy current loss in a conducting wire part can be suppressed.

The means 14C is any of the means 1C to 13C:
The armature winding has conducting wire portions arranged at predetermined intervals in a circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
The thickness dimension in the radial direction of the conductor portion is smaller than the width dimension in the circumferential direction of one phase in one magnetic pole.

Thereby, the eddy current loss in a conducting wire part can be suppressed, improving a torque.

Also, conventionally, as described in, for example, Patent Document 1, there is known a rotary electric machine applied to home appliances, industrial machines, game machines, agricultural construction machines, and automobiles. Generally, a so-called slot, which is a winding accommodating portion partitioned by teeth, is formed in the stator core (that is, an iron core), and a conductor such as a copper wire or an aluminum wire is accommodated in the slot. The line is configured. On the other hand, in the rotor, it is general to arrange permanent magnets so as to have a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction.

The magnetic field emitted by the stator winding passes through the permanent magnet. When the rotor rotates with respect to the stator, the magnetic field of the stator winding viewed from the permanent magnet is a wave-like alternating magnetic field, so eddy current flows in the permanent magnet. As a result, the temperature of the permanent magnet rises with the eddy current loss, the magnetic flux density becomes weak, and the torque may decrease.

The following means are made in view of the above-mentioned situation, and the main object is to provide a rotating electrical machine with improved magnet cooling performance.

Means 1D is
A field element having a magnet portion including a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in a circumferential direction, and an armature having a multiphase armature winding, any one of the field element and the armature In a rotating electrical machine with a rotor
The magnet unit includes a plurality of magnets arranged in a circumferential direction,
The magnet is oriented such that the direction of the easy magnetization axis is parallel to the d axis on the side of the d axis which is the center of the magnetic pole as compared to the side of the q axis which is the magnetic pole boundary. The road is formed,
The plurality of magnets includes a magnet that is in contact with the adjacent magnet at least on one side in the circumferential direction, and a magnet that is separated from the next magnet on at least one side in the circumferential direction. , Is provided.

As shown in the above configuration, the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is oriented parallel to the d-axis on the side of the d-axis at the magnetic pole center as compared to the side of the q-axis at the magnetic pole boundary. The magnet in which the magnet magnetic path is formed is used for a magnet part. As a result, in order to obtain a magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave shape and to increase the magnetic flux density on the d axis, it is desirable to make the gap between adjacent magnets as small as possible when arranging the magnets in the circumferential direction. However, when the gap between the adjacent magnets is completely eliminated, a passage (flow passage) through which a fluid such as air flows in the axial direction is not formed, and the cooling performance of the magnet portion is degraded.

Therefore, in the plurality of magnets, a magnet that is in contact with the adjacent magnet at least on one side in the circumferential direction and a magnet that is separated from the next magnet on at least one side in the circumferential direction And, was made to be provided. Thus, the cooling performance of the magnet portion is improved by providing a gap between adjacent magnets while providing a magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave shape and increasing the magnetic flux density on the d axis. Can.

In the means 2D, in the means 1D, the number of gaps between the magnets is a prime number different from the number of magnetic poles of the magnet portion and the number of phases of the armature winding.

By setting the number of gaps between magnets to be a prime number different from the number of magnetic poles and the number of phases as in the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of resonance between the field element and the stator.

In the means 3D, in the means 1D or 2D, a plurality of clearances between the magnets are provided, and the clearances adjacent in the circumferential direction are arranged so as to be uneven.

The occurrence of resonance can be suppressed by making the intervals between adjacent gaps in the circumferential direction uneven as in the above configuration.

In means 4D, in any of means 1D to 3D,
The magnet part is provided with a passage penetrating in the axial direction,
When the passage is provided closer to the q-axis than the d-axis, the passage is provided closer to the armature than the opposite armature.
When the passage is provided on the d-axis side more than the q-axis side, the passage is provided on the opposite side of the armature side than the armature side.

In the magnet, in the part near the q-axis, the part on the armature side is likely to be short in the magnet magnetic path, which makes it easy to demagnetize. Similarly, in the portion near the d-axis, the portion on the side opposite to the armature tends to shorten the magnet magnetic path and is a portion that tends to be demagnetized. That is, even if this portion is deleted, the influence on the magnetic flux density generated from the d axis is small. Then, the passage which penetrates in the direction of an axis was provided in the portion concerned. Thus, it is possible to provide a passage that can be a flow passage through which the fluid passes while suppressing the decrease in magnetic flux density. For this reason, the cooling performance of a magnet part can be improved. At the same time, the amount of magnet can be reduced.

In means 5D,
A field element having a magnet portion including a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in a circumferential direction, and an armature having a multiphase armature winding, any one of the field element and the armature In a rotating electrical machine with a rotor
The magnet section is oriented such that the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is parallel to the d axis on the side of the d axis which is the center of the magnetic pole as compared to the side of the q axis which is the magnetic pole boundary. It has a magnet in which a magnetic path is formed,
The magnet part is provided with a passage penetrating in the axial direction,
When the passage is provided closer to the q-axis than the d-axis, the passage is provided closer to the armature than the opposite armature.
When the passage is provided on the d-axis side more than the q-axis side, the passage is provided on the opposite side of the armature side than the armature side.

In the magnet, in the part near the q-axis, the part on the armature side is likely to be short in the magnet magnetic path, which makes it easy to demagnetize. Similarly, in the portion near the d-axis, the portion on the side opposite to the armature tends to shorten the magnet magnetic path and is a portion that tends to be demagnetized. That is, even if this portion is deleted, the influence on the magnetic flux density generated from the d axis is small. Then, the passage which penetrates in the direction of an axis was provided in the portion concerned. Thus, it is possible to provide a passage that can be a flow passage through which the fluid passes while suppressing the decrease in magnetic flux density. For this reason, the cooling performance of a magnet part can be improved. At the same time, the amount of magnet can be reduced.

In means 6D, in any of means 1D to 5D,
The magnet unit includes a plurality of magnets arranged in a circumferential direction,
The magnet is insulated by an insulating film at least between magnets adjacent in the circumferential direction.

Thereby, it can suppress that an eddy current flows into an adjacent magnet, and can suppress an eddy current loss. That is, the heat generation of the magnet unit can be suppressed.

In means 7D, in any of means 1D to 6D,
The armature winding has conducting wire portions arranged at predetermined intervals in a circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
In the armature,
An inter-conductor member is provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction, and as the inter-conductor member, the circumferential width dimension of the inter-conductor member in one magnetic pole is Wt, and the saturation flux density of the inter-conductor member is Bs. A configuration using a magnetic material or nonmagnetic material having a relationship of Wt × Bs ≦ Wm × Br, where Wm is the width dimension of the magnet portion in one magnetic pole and Br is the residual magnetic flux density of the magnet portion. Or
Alternatively, the inter-conductor member is not provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction.

Thereby, the torque limitation caused by the magnetic saturation can be eliminated. In addition, when it comprises as mentioned above, in the accommodation space which accommodates a conducting-wire part, while the ratio which a conducting-wire part occupies tends to increase, a clearance gap decreases. That is, the flow passage cross-sectional area of the flow passage through which the fluid passes on the armature side becomes smaller, and the cooling performance tends to be lowered. For this reason, by providing a passage (flow path) or a gap in the magnet portion to improve the cooling performance, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the cooling performance on the armature side, and maintain or improve the cooling performance as the whole rotating electric machine. .

In means 8D, in any of means 1D to 7D,
The armature winding has conducting wire portions arranged at predetermined intervals in a circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
The thickness dimension in the radial direction of the conductor portion is smaller than the width dimension in the circumferential direction of one phase in one magnetic pole.

Thereby, the eddy current loss in a conducting wire part can be suppressed, improving a torque. In addition, when it comprises as mentioned above, in the accommodation space which accommodates a conducting-wire part, while the ratio which a conducting-wire part occupies tends to increase, a clearance gap decreases. That is, the flow passage cross-sectional area of the flow passage through which the fluid passes on the armature side becomes smaller, and the cooling performance tends to be lowered. For this reason, by providing a passage (flow path) in the magnet portion to improve the cooling performance, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the cooling performance on the armature side, and maintain or improve the cooling performance as the whole rotary electric machine.

In means 9D, in any of means 1D to 8D,
The armature winding has conducting wire portions arranged at predetermined intervals in a circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
Each of the conducting wires constituting the conducting wire portion is a bundle of a plurality of strands, and is a strand assembly in which a resistance value between the bundled strands is larger than a resistance value of the strand itself.

Thereby, a gap is generated between the magnets, and even if the magnetic flux density changes rapidly, it is possible to suppress the eddy current loss in the wire portion.

DESCRIPTION OF RELATED ART Conventionally, the rotary electric machine applied to home appliances, industrial machines, game machines, agricultural and construction machines, and automobiles is known. As a magnet adopted for such a rotating electrical machine, for example, there is a magnet as shown in Patent Document 3 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-74767). According to Patent Document 1, the surface magnetic flux density distribution of the magnet can be made close to a sine wave shape. For this reason, a rapid magnetic flux change can be suppressed and cogging torque, torque ripple, etc. can be suppressed.

By the way, in the rotating electrical machine, in order to improve the torque, a magnet with an increased residual magnetic flux density, coercive force or the like tends to be adopted. Along with that, a magnet having a surface magnetic flux density distribution closer to a sine wave than the magnet shown in Patent Document 1 is desired.

The following means are made in view of the above-mentioned subject, and the purpose is to provide a dynamo-electric machine which can make magnetic flux density distribution approach sine wave shape.

The means 1E includes a field element having a magnet portion including a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction, and an armature having a multiphase armature winding, wherein the field element and the armature In a rotating electrical machine that uses any of
The magnet unit has a plurality of magnets arranged in a circumferential direction, and an annular field element core member which is a soft magnetic body disposed on the opposite side of the armature in the radial direction from the magnet. ,
The magnet includes at least a first magnet provided with a magnet magnetic path so as to be parallel to the radial direction,
The first magnet is provided so that the air gap between the first magnet and the armature in the radial direction gradually widens from the d-axis at the magnetic pole center toward the q-axis side at the magnetic pole boundary. ,
The field element core member has a projecting portion that protrudes toward the armature in the radial direction from the gap between the magnets.
The protrusion is disposed between the d-axis and the q-axis, and is provided so as to protrude more toward the armature than the magnet.

The gap between the first magnet and the armature in the radial direction gradually widens from the d-axis at the magnetic pole center toward the q-axis at the magnetic pole boundary. For this reason, it can be set as a magnet part which has surface magnetic flux density distribution near a sine wave. Thereby, it is possible to moderate the change in magnetic flux and to suppress the eddy current loss in the armature. It is also possible to reduce cogging torque and torque ripple.

Further, the protruding portion of the field element core member is disposed in the gap between the magnets and provided so as to protrude to the armature side more than the magnet. For this reason, at the circumferential end of the first magnet, the magnetic flux generated from the circumferential surface of the armature of the first magnet easily passes through the projecting portion to cause a self short circuit, thereby reducing the magnetic flux density at the circumferential end. Can. This makes it possible to get closer to a sine wave.

Further, the protrusion is disposed between the d-axis and the q-axis, and provided so as to protrude to the armature side more than the magnet. For this reason, while the magnetic flux easily passes through the portion provided with the projecting portion, the magnetic flux hardly passes along the d-axis. That is, while the inductance is increased at the portion where the projecting portion is provided, the inductance is decreased at the d-axis and has a reverse saliency. For this reason, even if the magnetic flux is self-shorted and the magnet torque is reduced, reluctance torque (iron core torque) is generated, and the torque can be increased.

In the means 2E, in the means 1E, the magnet has a rectangular cross-sectional shape, and the magnets are arranged such that the lateral direction or the longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the radial direction.

Thereby, the magnet can be easily manufactured as compared with the arc-shaped magnet and the pole-anisotropic magnet.

In the means 3E, in the means 2E, the field element is disposed radially outward of the armature, and the field element is a rotor.

The magnet can be easily manufactured, and the gap between the first magnet and the armature in the radial direction can be gradually narrowed gradually from the q-axis side toward the d-axis side.

In the means 4E, in the means 1E, the field element is disposed radially inward of the armature, and the field element is a rotor.

When the field element is disposed radially inward, the first magnet has an arc-shaped outer peripheral surface (armature side peripheral surface) that is convex about the d-axis. For this reason, the shape of the outer circumferential surface of the magnet can be made close to a curved surface along the circumferential direction of the rotor, which facilitates design and arrangement.

The means 5E includes a field element having a magnet portion including a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction, and an armature having a multiphase armature winding, wherein the field element is the armature In a rotating electrical machine, which is disposed radially inward of the rotor and in which the field element is a rotor,
The magnet unit has a plurality of magnets arranged in a circumferential direction, and an annular field element core member which is a soft magnetic body disposed on the opposite side of the armature in the radial direction from the magnet. ,
The magnet includes at least a first magnet provided with a magnet magnetic path so as to be parallel to the radial direction,
The first magnet has a rectangular cross-sectional shape, and is disposed such that the lateral direction or the longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the radial direction,
The field element core member has a projecting portion that protrudes toward the armature in the radial direction from the gap between the magnets.
In the circumferential direction, the end face of the protrusion is provided to abut on the end face of the first magnet.

The protruding portion of the field element core member is disposed in the gap between the magnets, and in the circumferential direction, the end surface of the protruding portion abuts on the end surface of the first magnet. For this reason, near the end of the first magnet in the circumferential direction, the magnetic flux generated from the armature side circumferential surface (or the armature side circumferential surface) easily passes through the projecting portion and easily self-shorts. That is, in the circumferential direction, the magnetic flux density can be reduced as it approaches the end of the first magnet. Thereby, it can be set as a magnet part which has surface magnetic flux density distribution near a sine wave. Therefore, the eddy current loss in the armature can be suppressed by making the magnetic flux change gentle. It is also possible to reduce torque ripple.

In the means 6E, in any of the means 1E to 5E, the magnet includes, in addition to the first magnet, a second magnet provided with a magnet magnetic path parallel to the circumferential direction,
The plurality of first magnets are disposed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction, and the plurality of second magnets are disposed at positions between the adjacent first magnets in the circumferential direction.

With the above-described magnet arrangement, even if the magnetic flux is self-shorted by the projecting portion, the magnetic flux density in the d-axis can be increased and the torque can be increased.

The means 7E according to any one of the means 1E to 6E, the armature winding has conducting wire portions arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
In the armature, an inter-conductor member is provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction, and as the inter-conductor member, the circumferential width dimension of the inter-conductor member in one magnetic pole is Wt, and the saturation of the inter-conductor member A magnetic material having a relationship of Wt × Bs ≦ Wm × Br or a non-magnetic material in which the magnetic flux density is Bs, the circumferential width dimension of the magnet portion in one magnetic pole is Wm, and the residual magnetic flux density of the magnet portion is Br. A configuration using a magnetic material or a configuration in which an inter-conductor member is not provided between the respective conductor portions in the circumferential direction are provided.

Accordingly, it is possible to eliminate the inter-conductor member that distorts the flow of the magnetic flux generated by the armature winding or the magnet portion on the armature side. For this reason, it becomes easy to maintain surface magnetic flux density distribution of a magnet part in sine wave shape. Further, in the case where the projecting portion is provided, it is possible to appropriately pass the magnetic flux generated by the armature winding to the projecting portion to obtain the reluctance torque.

Also, conventionally, as an electric rotating machine, an IPM (Interior Permanent Magnet) type rotor in which a magnet accommodation hole is formed in a rotor core formed by laminating electromagnetic steel sheets and a magnet is inserted in the magnet accommodation hole has become widespread. . As a magnet employ | adopted as such a rotor, there exists a thing as shown to patent document 1, for example. According to Patent Document 4 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99071), a magnet having a surface magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave can be obtained, and eddy current loss is suppressed because of a gradual change in magnetic flux compared to a radial magnet. be able to. It also becomes possible to increase the magnetic flux density.

By the way, the magnet described in Patent Document 4 is a magnet containing an expensive rare earth material. For this reason, it is desirable to reduce the amount of magnets from the viewpoint of cost.

The following means are made in view of the above-mentioned subject, and the purpose is to provide the rotation electrical machinery which can reduce the amount of magnets, making magnetic flux density increase.

The means 1F includes a field element having a magnet portion including a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction, and an armature having a multiphase armature winding, wherein the field element and the armature In a rotating electrical machine that uses any of
In the magnet section, the easy magnetization axis is arc-shaped so that the direction of the easy magnetization axis is parallel to the d axis on the side of the d axis which is the center of the magnetic pole as compared to the side of the q axis which is the magnetic pole boundary. A magnet having an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path formed along its easy axis of magnetization;
The magnet has an intrinsic coercivity of 400 [kA / m] or more, and a residual magnetic flux density of 1.0 [T] or more,
The magnet is provided between adjacent d-axes in the circumferential direction, and in the radial direction from the armature to the counter armature side circumferential surface which is the counter armature side among the circumferential surfaces of the magnet The dimension is set so that the d-axis side is shorter than the q-axis side.

By providing the magnet portion having a surface magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave, torque can be enhanced, and eddy current loss can be suppressed because of a gradual change in magnetic flux compared to a radial magnet. It is also possible to reduce torque ripple. When the intrinsic coercivity of the magnet is 400 kA / m or more and the residual magnetic flux density is 1.0 T or more (ie, the magnetic flux density in the d axis is increased), a sine wave is obtained. In order to obtain a magnet portion having a near surface magnetic flux density distribution, it is desirable to use a magnet provided between d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction, in which a circular arc-shaped magnet magnetic path is formed.

When such a magnet is used, it is desirable to use a magnet having a predetermined thickness dimension in the radial direction in order to suppress magnetic flux leakage from the opposite armature side of the magnet section. However, when using a magnet that has an intrinsic coercive force of 400 [kA / m] or more and a residual magnetic flux density of 1.0 [T] or more, adopting a magnet containing an expensive rare earth material Preferably, there is a problem in cost.

By the way, in the part near the d-axis of the magnet, the part on the side opposite to the armature tends to be short in the magnet magnetic path and is a part that is easy to demagnetize. That is, the portion does not contribute to the improvement of the magnetic flux density in the d axis. Therefore, even if this easily demagnetizable portion is eliminated, the influence on the magnetic flux density generated from the d-axis is small (the magnetic flux density does not decrease), and the torque hardly decreases.

Therefore, in the means 1F, the magnet is configured such that the dimension from the armature to the non-armature side peripheral surface of the magnet in the radial direction is shorter on the d-axis side than on the q-axis side. As a result, in the portion near the d axis of the magnet, the portion on the side opposite to the armature can be reduced. That is, it is possible to reduce the amount of magnet without affecting the magnetic flux density by eliminating the part susceptible to demagnetization. For example, compared with the case where the thickness dimension in the radial direction is the same magnet, the portion susceptible to demagnetization is reduced, and the amount of magnet can be reduced while suppressing the decrease in magnetic flux density in the d axis.

Also, by providing a magnet between the d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction and providing a magnet magnetic path in an arc shape, the magnet magnetic path is made longer even if the thickness dimension in the radial direction of the magnet is reduced. Can. That is, compared to a radial magnet provided with a linear magnet magnetic path, the magnet magnetic path can be made longer, and the magnetic flux density in the d-axis can be improved while making the thickness dimension of the magnet thinner. it can.

In the means 2F, in the means 1F, the magnets are provided symmetrically about the q-axis, and in the part near the d-axis, the easy magnetization axis is parallel or nearly parallel to the d-axis, and q The magnetic flux path is oriented so that an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path whose magnetization easy axis is orthogonal to the q axis or close to orthogonal to the q axis is formed in the part near the axis,
The magnet magnetic path passes a first intersection point of a center point set on the q-axis and a d-axis and an armature-side circumferential surface on the armature side among the circumferential surfaces of the magnet. The magnetic flux path on the orientation arc is included.

The magnets are provided symmetrically about the q axis, and are oriented arcs having a center point set on the q axis as a center and passing through a first intersection of the d axis and the armature side circumferential surface of the magnet Are provided between adjacent d axes in the circumferential direction so that a magnetic path along the axis can be formed, so that the length of the magnet magnetic path can be made sufficiently long, and the magnetic flux density in the d axis is increased be able to.

In the means 3F, in the means 2F, the orientation arc is set such that a tangent at a first intersection on the orientation arc is parallel to the d axis.

The orientation arc is set so that the tangent at the first intersection on the orientation arc is parallel to the d axis, and the easy axis of magnetization is oriented along the orientation arc, and arc-like along the easy axis. When the magnet magnetic path is formed, the magnetic flux density is largest at the d axis. That is, since the magnet magnetic path is orthogonal to the armature side circumferential surface at the first intersection point, the magnetic flux density can be increased in the d axis. Since the torque is related to the magnetic flux density in the d axis, the torque can be improved by increasing the magnetic flux density in the d axis.

In the means 4F, in the means 2F or 3F, the field element is provided with a field element core member which is a soft magnetic body, on the opposite side of the armature from the magnet section,
In the radial direction, the field element core member and the magnet are stacked,
A part or all of the field element core member is disposed more on the armature side in the radial direction than the second intersection point of the q axis and the orientation arc.

In the radial direction, the field element core member and the magnet are stacked, and a part or all of the field element core member is formed on the armature side in the radial direction (that is, the magnet portion) than the second intersection point of q axis and orientation arc. Was placed on the side). That is, the thickness dimension of the magnet was reduced, and instead, the field element core member, which is a soft magnetic material, was disposed. Thus, even if the magnet is made thin, the magnetic flux passes through the inside of the field element core member which is a soft magnetic body, so that the magnetic flux leakage is suppressed. That is, in the d axis, the magnetic flux density is less likely to decrease. Thus, the amount of magnet can be reduced without reducing the magnetic flux density.

In the means 5F, when the saturation magnetic flux density of the field element core member is larger than the residual magnetic flux density of the magnet in the means 4F, the thickness dimension of the field element core member in the radial direction is the q axis And the dimension in the radial direction from the third intersection point to the second intersection point with the counter armature side peripheral surface on the counter armature side among the peripheral surfaces of the magnet.

When the saturation magnetic flux density of the field element core member is larger than the residual magnetic flux density of the magnet, the magnetic flux leakage can be appropriately suppressed even if it is replaced with a soft magnetic material whose thickness dimension is thinner than that of the magnet. For this reason, magnetic flux leakage can be appropriately suppressed while thinning. That is, the torque can be improved by increasing the magnetic flux density on the d-axis.

In means 4F or 4F, the residual magnetic flux density of the magnet section is Br, the saturation magnetic flux density of the field element core member is Bs, the distance from the central point to the first intersection point is Wh, and the field is the field When the thickness dimension in the radial direction of the daughter core member is Wsc, a magnet and a field element core member that satisfy the relationship of Br × Wh ≦ Bs × Wsc are used. Thereby, the magnetic flux leakage can be suppressed.

In the means 2F or 3F, the means 7F is provided on the side opposite to the armature in the radial direction of the second intersecting point of the q axis and the orientation arc.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of magnetic flux leakage from the peripheral surface on the side opposite to the armature, improve the magnetic flux density in the d axis, and improve the torque.

The means 8F is the means 7F
The field element includes a magnet holding unit that holds the magnet.
The magnet holding portion has an opposite armature side covering portion covering the opposite armature side circumferential surface of the magnet, and an armature side covering portion covering the armature side circumferential surface of the magnet,
The opposite armature side covering portion is thinner than the armature side covering portion.

As a result, the non-armature side coated portion is likely to be magnetically saturated, and magnetic flux leakage from the non-armature side circumferential surface can be suppressed.

In any of the means 1F to 8F, the means 9F is such that, in the magnet, the thickness dimension in the radial direction of the magnet on the q-axis is thicker than the thickness dimension of the magnet on the d-axis side It is provided.

As a result, the magnet includes the magnet magnetic paths on the plurality of concentric circular arcs having different lengths, and the surface magnetic flux density distribution of the magnet portion can be made to approach a sine wave.

In any of the means 1F to 9F, the means 10F is provided, on the armature-side circumferential surface of the circumferential surface of the magnet, with a recess opening on the armature side closer to the q-axis than the d-axis.

In the part near the q-axis of the magnet, the part on the armature side is a part where the magnet magnetic path tends to be short and demagnetization is likely to occur. More specifically, in the radial direction, in the vicinity of the q-axis, the portion closer to the armature than the orientation arc is a portion that is likely to be demagnetized, and there is little influence on the magnetic flux density generated from the d-axis. That is, even if this portion is eliminated, the influence on the magnetic flux density generated from the d axis is small. Therefore, by providing a recess in the portion, the amount of magnet can be reduced without reducing the magnetic flux density in the d axis.

In the means 11F, in any of the means 1F to 10F, the magnet is formed in a convex lens shape, and the curvature of the counter armature side circumferential surface of the magnet is compared with the armature side circumferential surface of the magnet large.

Thereby, it is possible to obtain a magnet having a magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave and a large magnetic flux density in the d axis while reducing the amount of magnet.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as an electric rotating machine, an IPM (Interior Permanent Magnet) type rotor in which a magnet accommodation hole is formed in a rotor core formed by laminating electromagnetic steel sheets and a magnet is inserted in the magnet accommodation hole has become widespread. In addition to the IPM-type rotor, a surface permanent magnet (SPM) -type rotor has also been proposed as a rotor of a rotating electric machine (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 5 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 70522)).

By the way, in the rotary electric machine which employ | adopted the rotor of SPM type | mold, it is necessary to fix appropriately so that a magnet may not fall out at the time of rotation of a rotor. It is conceivable to cover the stator side peripheral surface of the rotor (magnet) with a metal, a high strength resin, or the like as a measure to prevent the falling off. In this case, there is a possibility that the magnetic flux surface may be lowered due to the separation from the stator. Further, in the case of metal, magnetic flux leakage and eddy current loss may occur.

The following means are made in view of the above-mentioned situation, and the main object is to provide a dynamo-electric machine which can fix a magnet suitably, controlling magnetic flux fall.

The first G means for solving the above problems are a magnet unit including a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical magnet holding unit in which the magnet unit is fixed to the inner peripheral surface or the outer peripheral surface And an armature having a polyphase armature winding arranged to face the magnet portion in the radial direction, and any one of the field element and the armature In the rotating electric machine having the rotor as a rotor, the magnet unit includes a plurality of magnets arranged in a circumferential direction, and each of the magnets is a magnetic pole between d axes which are magnetic pole centers adjacent in the circumferential direction. It is formed in a symmetrical shape centered on the q-axis, which is the boundary, and on the d-axis side, the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is oriented parallel to the d-axis compared to the q-axis side. A magnet magnetic path is formed along an axis, and each of the magnets On the side circumferential surface, both end portions in the circumferential direction have inclined surfaces which are inclined to the armature side, and the magnet holding portion is disposed on the opposite side of the armature portion from the magnet portion in the radial direction Has a convex portion that protrudes toward the magnet portion in the direction, and the convex portion is provided on the d axis side with respect to the q axis, and is provided to be engageable circumferentially with the inclined surface .

By engaging the convex portion and the inclined surface in the circumferential direction, it is possible to preferably prevent circumferential rotation of each magnet, and it is possible to suppress detachment. Further, the convex portion is engaged with the inclined surface provided on the non-armature side peripheral surface of the magnet. For this reason, the air gap between the rotor and the stator can be made smaller as compared with the case where the stator side circumferential surface is covered, and the reduction of the magnetic flux density can be suppressed.

In addition, each magnet is formed in a symmetrical shape centered on the q axis which is a magnetic pole boundary between the d axes which are magnetic pole centers adjacent in the circumferential direction, and on the d axis side, the q axis side In this case, the direction of the magnetization easy axis is oriented parallel to the d axis, and a magnet magnetic path is formed along the magnetization easy axis. For this reason, a magnet magnetic path can be lengthened and magnetic flux density can be improved.

And, on the opposite armature side peripheral surface of each magnet, inclined surfaces which are inclined toward the armature and engage with the convex portions are provided at both end portions in the circumferential direction. By providing an inclined surface which is inclined toward the armature side, the thickness dimension in the radial direction is thinner than the central portion of each magnet, ie, the q axis side, at both ends of each magnet, ie, the d axis side. Become. However, on the non-armature side circumferential surface of each magnet provided with the magnet magnetic path as described above, the portion on the d axis side is a portion that is more susceptible to demagnetization than the portion on the q axis side. The removal of the part on the d-axis side has almost no influence on the magnetic flux density in the d-axis. Therefore, by providing the inclined surfaces at both ends of each magnet as described above, the portions that are likely to be demagnetized become thinner so as to eliminate the reduction in magnetic flux density. Also, the amount of magnet can be reduced.

A second G means is according to the first G means, wherein the magnet is a single-pole pair in which the polarity at one end and the polarity at the other end are different in the circumferential direction.

Thereby, the magnet magnetic path can be made longer, and the magnetic flux density in the d axis can be improved.

In a third G means, in the first G or second G means, a resin member is provided between the magnet holding portion and the magnet, and the magnet is provided with the magnet via the resin member. It is fixed to the holder.

By interposing the resin member, the magnet can be suitably adhered to the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the magnet holding portion, and the detachment can be suppressed. Further, the magnet holding portion and the magnet can be electrically insulated, and the generation of eddy current loss in the magnet portion can be suppressed.

A fourth G system according to any one of the first to third G systems is provided with an armature-side recess that opens in the radial direction on the armature side in the armature side peripheral surface of the magnet, and the armature The side recess is provided on the q axis side of the d axis.

On the armature side circumferential surface of each magnet provided with the magnet magnetic path as described above, the q-axis side portion is a portion that is more susceptible to demagnetization than the d-axis side portion, and the q-axis is Elimination of the side portion has almost no effect on the magnetic flux density in the d-axis. Therefore, on the armature side circumferential surface of the magnet, an armature side recess that opens toward the armature in the radial direction is provided on the q axis side of the d axis. Thus, the amount of magnet can be reduced without lowering the magnetic flux density in the d-axis by providing the recess in the portion where demagnetization is likely to occur.

A 5th means is the 4th means, wherein a restricting member for restricting the movement of the magnet to the armature side in the radial direction is accommodated in the armature-side recess.

Thereby, the movement of the magnet to the armature side in the radial direction can be restricted, and the detachment of the magnet can be suitably suppressed.

A sixth G means according to any one of the first G to the fifth G, in which the magnet is such that the easy magnetization axis is parallel to the d axis or close to the d axis at a portion near the d axis and near the q axis The magnetic flux path is oriented such that an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path is formed such that the easy magnetization axis is orthogonal to the q-axis or nearly orthogonal to the q-axis in the part of.

By forming such an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path in a magnet formed in a symmetrical shape centered on the q-axis, which is a magnetic pole boundary, between d-axes that are magnetic pole centers adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction The magnet magnetic path can be made longer. Therefore, the magnet density in the d axis can be improved.

A seventh means according to any one of the first to sixth means, wherein each of the magnets is arranged such that adjacent end portions in the circumferential direction have the same polarity.

Thereby, the magnet magnetic flux density distribution can be made close to a sine wave shape, and eddy current loss and torque ripple can be suppressed.

The 8G means is any of the 1G to 7G means, wherein the inclined surface is formed along a magnet magnetic path.

By forming the inclined surface along the magnet magnetic path, the length of the magnet magnetic path can be increased, and the amount of magnet can be reduced. Moreover, when it comprises with a sintered magnet, it becomes easy to manufacture.

A ninth means of the invention according to any one of the first to eighth means, wherein the magnet unit has an intrinsic coercive force of 400 kA / m or more and a residual magnetic flux density of 1.0 T or more. It is.

A tenth means according to any one of the first to ninth means, wherein the armature winding has conducting wire portions arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at a position facing the field element, In the armature, an inter-conductor member is provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction, and as the inter-conductor member, the circumferential width dimension of the inter-conductor member in one magnetic pole is Wt, and the saturation magnetic flux of the inter-conductor member A magnetic material or nonmagnetic material having a relationship of Wt × Bs ≦ Wm × Br, where density is Bs, width dimension of circumferential direction of the magnet portion in one magnetic pole is Wm, and residual magnetic flux density of the magnet portion is Br. It is a structure which uses a material, or it has a structure which has not provided the inter-conductor member between each said conductor part in the circumferential direction.

An eleventh G means according to any one of the first G to G 10 G, wherein the armature winding has conducting wire portions arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at positions facing the field element, The radial thickness dimension of the conductor portion is smaller than the circumferential width dimension of one phase in one magnetic pole.

A twelfth G means according to any one of the first G to G 11G, wherein the armature winding has conducting wire portions arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at a position facing the field element, Each of the conducting wires constituting the conducting wire portion is a bundle of a plurality of strands, and is a strand assembly in which the resistance value between the bundled strands is larger than the resistance value of the strand itself.

The above object and other objects, features and advantages of the present disclosure will become more apparent from the following detailed description with reference to the attached drawings. The drawing is
Fig. 1 is a longitudinal sectional perspective view of a rotating electric machine, Fig. 2 is a longitudinal sectional view of the rotating electric machine, 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along line III-III in FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing a part of FIG. 3 in an enlarged manner, Fig. 5 is an exploded view of the rotating electrical machine, FIG. 6 is an exploded view of the inverter unit, FIG. 7 is a torque diagram showing the relationship between the ampere turns of the stator winding and the torque density, FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of a rotor and a stator, FIG. 9 is an enlarged view of a part of FIG. 8; FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the stator; FIG. 11 is a longitudinal sectional view of a stator, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of a stator winding; FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing the configuration of a lead; FIG. 14 is a schematic view showing the structure of a wire; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the form of each wire in the n-th layer, FIG. 16 is a side view showing the conductors in the n-th layer and the n + 1-th layer; FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the relationship between the electrical angle and the magnetic flux density for the magnet of the embodiment, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the relationship between the electrical angle and the magnetic flux density for the magnet of the comparative example, FIG. 19 is an electric circuit diagram of a control system of a rotating electric machine, FIG. 20 is a functional block diagram showing current feedback control processing by the controller; FIG. 21 is a functional block diagram showing a torque feedback control process by the controller; FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view of the rotor and the stator in the second embodiment, FIG. 23 is an enlarged view of a part of FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram specifically showing the flow of magnetic flux in the magnet unit, 25 is a transverse sectional view of a rotor and a stator in the third embodiment, FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view of a stator in the first modification; FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of a stator in the first modification; FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view of a stator in the second modification; FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of a stator in the third modification; FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view of a stator in the fourth modification; FIG. 31 is a transverse sectional view of a rotor and a stator in the seventh modification; FIG. 32 is a functional block diagram showing a part of processing of the operation signal generation unit in the eighth modification; FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a procedure of carrier frequency change processing; FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a connection form of each lead forming the lead group in modification 9; FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a configuration in which four pairs of conducting wires are stacked and arranged in the ninth modification; FIG. 36 is a transverse sectional view of an inner rotor type rotor and a stator in the tenth modification; FIG. 37 is an enlarged view of a part of FIG. Fig. 38 is a longitudinal sectional view of an inner rotor type rotating electric machine, FIG. 39 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a schematic configuration of an inner rotor type rotating electric machine, FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the configuration of a rotary electric machine with an inner rotor structure in Modification 11; FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a configuration of a rotary electric machine having an inner rotor structure in Modification 11; FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the configuration of a rotary armature type rotary electric machine according to a modification 12; FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view showing the configuration of the lead in modification 14; FIG. 44 is a transverse cross sectional view of a rotor and a stator in the modification 15. FIG. 45 is a transverse sectional view of a rotor and a stator in the modification 16. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of a rotor and a stator in another example, FIG. 47 is a cross-sectional view of a rotor and a stator in another example, FIG. 48 is a transverse cross sectional view of a rotor and a stator in the modification 17. FIG. 49 is a transverse sectional view of a rotor and a stator in another example, FIG. 50 is a transverse cross-sectional view of a rotor and a stator in the modification 18. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the relationship between the relaxation torque, the magnet torque and the DM, FIG. 52 is a diagram showing teeth. FIG. 53 is a longitudinal sectional perspective view of the rotating electrical machine according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 54 is a longitudinal sectional view of a rotating electrical machine according to a fourth embodiment, FIG. 55 is a longitudinal sectional view showing the magnet and the retaining ring in the fourth embodiment, FIG. 56 is a longitudinal sectional view of a magnet according to a fourth embodiment, FIG. 57 is a plan view of the retaining ring in the fourth embodiment, FIG. 58 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a magnet and a retaining ring in another example, FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view of the rotor and the stator in the fifth embodiment, 60 is a diagram showing a part of FIG. 59 in an enlarged manner, 61 is a perspective view of the magnet sealing portion in the fifth embodiment, FIG. 62 is a perspective view showing a magnet unit and an inter-magnet member in the fifth embodiment, FIG. 63 is a plan view of the magnet sealing portion in the fifth embodiment, FIG. 64 is an end view of the magnet sealing portion in the fifth embodiment, FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view showing a magnet sealing portion in another example, FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view showing a magnet sealing portion in another example, FIG. 67 is a perspective view showing a magnet and an inter-magnet member in another example, FIG. 68 is a transverse sectional view of a rotor and a stator in the sixth embodiment, 69 is a diagram showing a part of FIG. 68 in an enlarged manner, FIG. 70 is a longitudinal sectional view of a rotating electrical machine according to a sixth embodiment, FIG. 71 is an exploded view of a rotary electric machine according to a sixth embodiment, FIG. 72 is a transverse sectional view of a rotor and a stator in the seventh embodiment, 73 is an enlarged view of a part of FIG. 72, FIG. 74 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a rotor and a stator in another example, 75 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a rotor and a stator in another example, 76 is a transverse cross sectional view of a rotor and a stator in the eighth embodiment, 77 is an enlarged view of a portion of FIG. 76; FIG. 78 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration of a rotor and a stator in another example, FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing another configuration of the rotor and the stator, FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view showing a configuration of a rotor and a stator in another example, FIG. 81 is a cross-sectional view of the rotor and the stator in the ninth embodiment, 82 is an enlarged view of a part of FIG. 81; FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view of a rotor and a stator in another example, FIG. 84 is a cross-sectional view of a magnet according to another example, FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view of a magnet in another example, FIG. 86 is a transverse sectional view of a rotor and a stator in another example, FIG. 87 is a view schematically showing a comparative example of a magnet unit in another example, FIG. 88 is a view schematically showing a cross section of a magnet unit in another example, FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view of a rotor and a stator in another example, FIG. 90 is a transverse sectional view of a rotor and a stator in the tenth embodiment, FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a part of FIG. 90 in an enlarged manner, FIG. 92 is a cross sectional view showing a mold of a magnet; FIG. 93 is a cross-sectional view of a rotor and a stator in another example, FIG. 94 is a longitudinal sectional view of a rotor and a stator in another example, FIG. 95 is a cross-sectional view of a rotor and a stator in another example.

Several embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings. In embodiments, functionally and / or structurally corresponding portions and / or associated portions may be provided with the same reference symbols, or reference symbols with different places of one hundred or more places. The description of the other embodiments can be referred to for the corresponding parts and / or parts to be associated.

The rotating electrical machine in the present embodiment is, for example, used as a vehicle power source. However, the rotary electric machine can be widely used for industrial use, for vehicles, for home appliances, for OA equipment, for game machines, and the like. In addition, in the following each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the mutually same or equal part in the figure, and the description is used about the part of the same code | symbol.

First Embodiment
The rotary electric machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a synchronous multiphase AC motor, and has an outer rotor structure (eversion structure). The outline | summary of the rotary electric machine 10 is shown in FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 1 is a longitudinal sectional perspective view of the rotating electrical machine 10, FIG. 2 is a longitudinal sectional view in the direction along the rotating shaft 11 of the rotating electrical machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a direction perpendicular to the rotating shaft 11. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the rotary electric machine 10 (a cross-sectional view taken along the line III-III in FIG. 2), FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing a part of FIG. It is. In FIG. 3, hatching indicating a cut surface is omitted except for the rotating shaft 11 for convenience of illustration. In the following description, the direction in which the rotation shaft 11 extends is taken as the axial direction, the direction radially extending from the center of the rotation shaft 11 is taken as the radial direction, and the direction extending circumferentially around the rotation shaft 11 is taken as the circumferential direction.

The rotary electric machine 10 roughly includes a bearing unit 20, a housing 30, a rotor 40, a stator 50, and an inverter unit 60. Each of these members is disposed coaxially with the rotation shaft 11, and is assembled in an axial direction in a predetermined order, whereby the rotary electric machine 10 is configured. The rotary electric machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to have a rotor 40 as a "field element" and a stator 50 as an "armature", and is embodied as a rotary electric field type rotary electric machine. It has become.

The bearing unit 20 has two bearings 21 and 22 which are disposed to be separated from each other in the axial direction, and a holding member 23 for holding the bearings 21 and 22. The bearings 21 and 22 are, for example, radial ball bearings, and each include an outer ring 25, an inner ring 26, and a plurality of balls 27 disposed between the outer ring 25 and the inner ring 26. The holding member 23 has a cylindrical shape, and the bearings 21 and 22 are assembled on the inner side in the radial direction. The rotary shaft 11 and the rotor 40 are rotatably supported on the inner side in the radial direction of the bearings 21 and 22. The bearings 21 and 22 constitute a set of bearings that rotatably support the rotating shaft 11.

In each of the bearings 21 and 22, the balls 27 are held by a retainer (not shown), and the pitch between the balls is maintained in this state. The bearings 21 and 22 have sealing members at the upper and lower portions in the axial direction of the retainer, and the inside thereof is filled with non-conductive grease (for example, non-conductive urea-based grease). Further, the position of the inner ring 26 is mechanically held by the spacer, and a constant pressure preload that is convex in the vertical direction from the inside is applied.

The housing 30 has a cylindrical peripheral wall 31. The peripheral wall 31 has a first end and a second end opposite in the axial direction. The peripheral wall 31 has an end face 32 at a first end and an opening 33 at a second end. The opening 33 is open at the entire second end. A circular hole 34 is formed in the center of the end face 32, and the bearing unit 20 is fixed by a fixing tool such as a screw or a rivet in a state of being inserted into the hole 34. Further, a hollow cylindrical rotor 40 and a hollow cylindrical stator 50 are accommodated in the housing 30, that is, in an internal space defined by the peripheral wall 31 and the end surface 32. In the present embodiment, the rotary electric machine 10 is of the outer rotor type, and the stator 50 is disposed inside the housing 30 in the radial direction of the cylindrical rotor 40. The rotor 40 is cantilevered on the rotary shaft 11 on the side of the end face 32 in the axial direction.

The rotor 40 has a magnet holder 41 formed in a hollow cylindrical shape, and an annular magnet unit 42 provided radially inward of the magnet holder 41. The magnet holder 41 has a substantially cup shape and has a function as a magnet holding member. The magnet holder 41 is a cylindrical portion 43 having a cylindrical shape, and an intermediate portion serving as a portion connecting the cylindrical portion 43 and the fixing portion 44, which has the same cylindrical shape and has an attachment 44 smaller in diameter than the cylindrical portion 43. And 45. The magnet unit 42 is attached to the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43.

The magnet holder 41 is made of cold rolled steel plate (SPCC) having sufficient mechanical strength, steel for forging, carbon fiber reinforced plastic (CFRP) or the like.

The rotating shaft 11 is inserted into the through hole 44 a of the fixed portion 44. The fixing portion 44 is fixed to the rotating shaft 11 disposed in the through hole 44 a. That is, the magnet holder 41 is fixed to the rotating shaft 11 by the fixing portion 44. The fixing portion 44 may be fixed to the rotating shaft 11 by spline connection using an unevenness, key connection, welding, caulking, or the like. Thus, the rotor 40 rotates integrally with the rotating shaft 11.

Further, the bearings 21 and 22 of the bearing unit 20 are assembled on the radial outside of the fixing portion 44. As described above, since the bearing unit 20 is fixed to the end surface 32 of the housing 30, the rotary shaft 11 and the rotor 40 are rotatably supported by the housing 30. Thereby, the rotor 40 is rotatable in the housing 30.

The rotor 40 is provided with a fixing portion 44 only at one of two axially opposite ends thereof, whereby the rotor 40 is supported in a cantilever manner on the rotation shaft 11. Here, the fixed portion 44 of the rotor 40 is rotatably supported by the bearings 21 and 22 of the bearing unit 20 at two different positions in the axial direction. That is, the rotor 40 is rotatably supported by two axially spaced bearings 21 and 22 at one of two axially opposite ends of the magnet holder 41. Therefore, stable rotation of the rotor 40 is realized even if the rotor 40 is supported by the rotary shaft 11 in a cantilever manner. In this case, the rotor 40 is supported by the bearings 21 and 22 at a position shifted to one side with respect to the axial center position of the rotor 40.

Further, in the bearing unit 20, the bearing 22 near the center of the rotor 40 (lower side in the figure) and the bearing 21 on the opposite side (upper side in the figure) The dimensions are different. For example, the bearing 22 near the center of the rotor 40 has a larger gap size than the bearing 21 on the opposite side. In this case, even if vibration due to swing of the rotor 40 or imbalance due to component tolerance acts on the bearing unit 20 on the side closer to the center of the rotor 40, the influence of the swing or vibration is well absorbed. Ru. Specifically, by increasing the play size (gap size) by preloading in the bearing 22 near the center of the rotor 40 (the lower side in the figure), the vibration generated in the cantilever structure is absorbed by the play portion. Ru. The preload may be either fixed position preload or constant pressure preload. In the case of fixed position preloading, the bearing 21 and the outer ring 25 of the bearing 22 are both joined to the holding member 23 using a method such as press fitting or adhesion. Further, the bearing 21 and the inner ring 26 of the bearing 22 are both joined to the rotary shaft 11 using a method such as press fitting or bonding. Here, by disposing the outer ring 25 of the bearing 21 at a position different from the inner ring 26 of the bearing 21 in the axial direction, it is possible to generate a preload. The preload can also be generated by arranging the outer ring 25 of the bearing 22 at a position different from the inner ring 26 of the bearing 22 in the axial direction.

When a constant pressure preload is employed, a preload spring, for example, a wave washer 24 or the like, is bearing so that a preload is generated from the region between the bearing 22 and the bearing 21 toward the outer ring 25 of the bearing 22 in the axial direction. It arrange | positions in the same area | region pinched | interposed into 22 and the bearing 21. FIG. Also in this case, the bearing 21 and the inner ring 26 of the bearing 22 are both joined to the rotating shaft 11 using a method such as press fitting or bonding. The bearing 21 or the outer ring 25 of the bearing 22 is disposed with respect to the holding member 23 via a predetermined clearance. With such a configuration, the spring force of the preload spring acts on the outer ring 25 of the bearing 22 in the direction away from the bearing 21. Then, when this force is transmitted through the rotary shaft 11, a force that presses the inner ring 26 of the bearing 21 in the direction of the bearing 22 acts. As a result, the axial positions of the outer ring 25 and the inner ring 26 deviate in both the bearings 21 and 22, and two bearings can be preloaded in the same manner as the fixed position preload described above.

When generating a constant pressure preload, it is not always necessary to apply a spring force to the outer ring 25 of the bearing 22 as shown in FIG. For example, a spring force may be applied to the outer ring 25 of the bearing 21. Further, the inner ring 26 of any one of the bearings 21 and 22 is disposed with a predetermined clearance with respect to the rotary shaft 11, and the outer rings 25 of the bearings 21 and 22 are press-fit or adhered to the holding member 23 The two bearings may be preloaded by joining them together.

Furthermore, in the case where the inner ring 26 of the bearing 21 exerts a force on the bearing 22 to be separated, it is better to exert the force on the bearing 21 so as to separate the bearing 21 as well. Conversely, in the case where the inner ring 26 of the bearing 21 exerts a force to approach the bearing 22, it is better to apply the force so that the inner ring 26 of the bearing 22 also approaches the bearing 21.

When the rotating electrical machine 10 is applied to a vehicle for the purpose of a vehicle power source or the like, the mechanism for generating the preload may be subjected to vibration having a component in the direction of generation of the preload, or an object for applying the preload. There is a possibility that the direction of gravity on an object may change. Therefore, when applying this rotary electric machine 10 to a vehicle, it is desirable to adopt a fixed position preload.

The middle portion 45 also has an annular inner shoulder 49a and an annular outer shoulder 49b. The outer shoulder 49 b is located outside the inner shoulder 49 a in the radial direction of the middle portion 45. The inner shoulder 49 a and the outer shoulder 49 b are spaced apart from each other in the axial direction of the middle portion 45. Thus, the cylindrical portion 43 and the fixing portion 44 partially overlap in the radial direction of the intermediate portion 45. That is, the cylindrical portion 43 protrudes axially outward with respect to the proximal end (the lower end in the drawing) of the fixed portion 44. In this configuration, it is possible to support the rotor 40 with respect to the rotating shaft 11 at a position near the center of gravity of the rotor 40, compared to the case where the intermediate portion 45 is provided in a flat plate shape without steps. Forty stable operations can be realized.

According to the configuration of the intermediate portion 45 described above, in the rotor 40, the bearing accommodation concave portion 46 which accommodates a part of the bearing unit 20 at a position surrounding the fixing portion 44 in the radial direction and inward of the intermediate portion 45. A coil accommodating recess for accommodating a coil end 54 of a stator winding 51 of the stator 50 described later at a position surrounding the bearing accommodating recess 46 in the radial direction and being on the outer side of the intermediate portion 45 47 are formed. And these each accommodation recessed part 46, 47 is arrange | positioned so that it may adjoin in the radial inside and outside. That is, a part of the bearing unit 20 and the coil end 54 of the stator winding 51 are disposed so as to overlap radially inward and outward. Thereby, in the rotary electric machine 10, shortening of the axial dimension is possible.

The intermediate portion 45 is provided so as to project radially outward from the rotary shaft 11 side. The intermediate portion 45 is provided with a contact avoiding portion which extends in the axial direction and prevents the contact of the stator winding 51 of the stator 50 with the coil end 54. The middle portion 45 corresponds to the overhang portion.

The coil end 54 can be bent radially inward or outward so that the axial dimension of the coil end 54 can be reduced, and the axial length of the stator 50 can be shortened. The bending direction of the coil end 54 may be in consideration of the assembly with the rotor 40. Assuming that the stator 50 is assembled radially inward of the rotor 40, the coil end 54 may be bent radially inward on the insertion tip side with respect to the rotor 40. Although the bending direction of the coil end on the opposite side of the coil end 54 may be arbitrary, an outwardly bent shape having a space is preferable in terms of manufacture.

Moreover, the magnet unit 42 as a magnet part is comprised by the some permanent magnet arrange | positioned so that polarity may change alternately along the circumferential direction in the radial direction inner side of the cylindrical part 43. As shown in FIG. Thus, the magnet unit 42 has a plurality of magnetic poles in the circumferential direction. However, the details of the magnet unit 42 will be described later.

The stator 50 is provided radially inward of the rotor 40. The stator 50 has a stator winding 51 wound in a substantially cylindrical shape (annular shape) and a stator core 52 as a base member disposed radially inward, and the stator winding A line 51 is disposed to face the annular magnet unit 42 across a predetermined air gap. The stator winding 51 is composed of a plurality of phase windings. Each of the phase windings is configured by connecting a plurality of conductive wires arranged in the circumferential direction to each other at a predetermined pitch. In the present embodiment, by using U-phase, V-phase and W-phase three-phase windings and X-phase, Y-phase and Z-phase three-phase windings and using two of these three-phase windings, The stator winding 51 is configured as a six-phase phase winding.

The stator core 52 is formed in an annular shape by a laminated steel plate in which electromagnetic steel sheets, which are soft magnetic materials, are laminated, and is assembled inside the stator winding 51 in the radial direction. The electromagnetic steel sheet is, for example, a silicon steel sheet obtained by adding about several percent (for example, 3%) of silicon to iron. The stator winding 51 corresponds to an armature winding, and the stator core 52 corresponds to an armature core.

The stator winding 51 is a portion overlapping the stator core 52 in the radial direction, and a coil side portion 53 that is radially outward of the stator core 52, and one end side of the stator core 52 in the axial direction and the other. The coil ends 54 and 55 respectively project on the end side. The coil side portion 53 respectively faces the stator core 52 and the magnet unit 42 of the rotor 40 in the radial direction. In a state where the stator 50 is disposed inside the rotor 40, the coil end 54, which becomes the side of the bearing unit 20 (the upper side in the figure), of the coil ends 54 and 55 on both axial sides is the magnet holder of the rotor 40 It is accommodated in the coil accommodation recessed part 47 formed of 41. However, the details of the stator 50 will be described later.

The inverter unit 60 has a unit base 61 fixed to the housing 30 by a fastener such as a bolt, and a plurality of electrical components 62 assembled to the unit base 61. The unit base 61 is made of, for example, a carbon fiber reinforced plastic (CFRP). The unit base 61 has an end plate 63 fixed to the edge of the opening 33 of the housing 30, and an axially extending casing 64 integrally provided on the end plate 63. The end plate 63 has a circular opening 65 at its central portion, and a casing 64 is formed so as to stand up from the peripheral edge of the opening 65.

The stator 50 is assembled to the outer peripheral surface of the casing 64. That is, the outer diameter dimension of the casing 64 is the same as the inner diameter dimension of the stator core 52 or slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the stator core 52. The stator core 52 is assembled to the outside of the casing 64, whereby the stator 50 and the unit base 61 are integrated. Further, when the unit base 61 is fixed to the housing 30, the stator 50 is integrated with the housing 30 in a state where the stator core 52 is assembled to the casing 64.

The stator core 52 may be assembled to the unit base 61 by bonding, shrink fitting, press fitting, or the like. Thus, positional deviation of the stator core 52 in the circumferential direction or axial direction with respect to the unit base 61 side is suppressed.

A radial inner side of the casing 64 is a housing space for housing the electric component 62, and the electric component 62 is disposed in the housing space so as to surround the rotary shaft 11. The casing 64 has a role as a housing space forming part. The electric component 62 is configured to include a semiconductor module 66 constituting an inverter circuit, a control board 67, and a capacitor module 68.

The unit base 61 is provided on the inner side in the radial direction of the stator 50 and corresponds to a stator holder (armature holder) for holding the stator 50. The housing 30 and the unit base 61 constitute a motor housing of the rotary electric machine 10. In this motor housing, the holding member 23 is fixed to the housing 30 on one side of the rotor 40 in the axial direction, and the housing 30 and the unit base 61 are connected to each other on the other side. For example, in an electric vehicle or the like, which is an electric vehicle, the rotating electrical machine 10 is mounted on a vehicle or the like by attaching a motor housing to the side of the vehicle or the like.

Here, the configuration of the inverter unit 60 will be further described using FIG. 6 which is an exploded view of the inverter unit 60 in addition to FIGS. 1 to 5 described above.

In the unit base 61, the casing 64 has a cylindrical portion 71 and an end face 72 provided on one of the opposite ends (the end on the bearing unit 20 side) opposed in the axial direction. Of the axially opposite end portions of the cylindrical portion 71, the side opposite to the end face 72 is entirely open through the opening 65 of the end plate 63. A circular hole 73 is formed at the center of the end face 72, and the rotary shaft 11 can be inserted through the hole 73. The hole 73 is provided with a sealing material 171 for closing a gap between the hole 73 and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating shaft 11. The sealing material 171 may be, for example, a sliding seal made of a resin material.

The cylindrical portion 71 of the casing 64 serves as a partition that divides between the rotor 40 and the stator 50 disposed radially outward and the electric component 62 disposed radially inward. The rotor 40, the stator 50, and the electric component 62 are respectively arranged side by side radially inward and outward with the portion 71 interposed therebetween.

Further, the electric component 62 is an electric component constituting an inverter circuit, and has a power running function of rotating the rotor 40 by supplying current to each phase winding of the stator winding 51 in a predetermined order; The generator has a power generation function of inputting a three-phase alternating current flowing in the stator winding 51 with the rotation of the motor, and outputting the same as generated power to the outside. The electrical component 62 may have only one of the power running function and the power generation function. The power generation function is, for example, a regeneration function that outputs the regenerative electric power to the outside when the rotating electrical machine 10 is used as a vehicle power source.

As a specific configuration of the electrical component 62, as shown in FIG. 4, a hollow cylindrical capacitor module 68 is provided around the rotation shaft 11, and a plurality of capacitor modules 68 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the capacitor module 68. The semiconductor modules 66 are arranged in the circumferential direction. The capacitor module 68 includes a plurality of smoothing capacitors 68 a connected in parallel with one another. Specifically, the capacitor 68a is a laminated film capacitor in which a plurality of film capacitors are stacked, and the cross section has a trapezoidal shape. The capacitor module 68 is configured by arranging twelve capacitors 68 a in a ring shape.

In the manufacturing process of the capacitor 68a, for example, a long film of a predetermined width formed by laminating a plurality of films is used, the film width direction is a trapezoidal height direction, and the upper and lower bases of the trapezoid alternate. The capacitor film is produced by cutting the long film into an isosceles trapezoidal shape. Then, by attaching an electrode or the like to the capacitor element, the capacitor 68a is manufactured.

The semiconductor module 66 includes semiconductor switching elements such as MOSFETs and IGBTs, for example, and is formed in a substantially plate shape. In the present embodiment, since the rotary electric machine 10 is provided with two sets of three-phase windings, and an inverter circuit is provided for each of the three-phase windings, a total of 12 semiconductor modules 66 are formed in a ring. The semiconductor module group 66 </ b> A is provided to the electrical component 62.

The semiconductor module 66 is disposed between the cylindrical portion 71 of the casing 64 and the capacitor module 68. The outer peripheral surface of the semiconductor module group 66A is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 71, and the inner peripheral surface of the semiconductor module group 66A is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the capacitor module 68. In this case, the heat generated in the semiconductor module 66 is transferred to the end plate 63 through the casing 64 and is released from the end plate 63.

The semiconductor module group 66A preferably has a spacer 69 between the semiconductor module 66 and the cylindrical portion 71 on the outer peripheral surface side, that is, in the radial direction. In this case, in the capacitor module 68, the cross-sectional shape of the cross section orthogonal to the axial direction is a regular dodecagon, while the cross-sectional shape of the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 71 is circular. Is a flat surface, and the outer peripheral surface is a curved surface. The spacers 69 may be integrally provided so as to be continuous in an annular shape on the radially outer side of the semiconductor module group 66A. The spacer 69 is a good heat conductor, and may be, for example, a metal such as aluminum or a heat dissipating gel sheet. In addition, it is also possible to make the cross-sectional shape of the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical part 71 into the same dodecagon as the capacitor module 68. In this case, it is preferable that the inner and outer peripheral surfaces of the spacer 69 be flat.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cooling water passage 74 for circulating the cooling water is formed in the cylindrical portion 71 of the casing 64, and the heat generated by the semiconductor module 66 is to the cooling water flowing through the cooling water passage 74. It is also released. That is, the casing 64 is provided with a water cooling mechanism. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the cooling water passage 74 is annularly formed so as to surround the electric component 62 (the semiconductor module 66 and the capacitor module 68). The semiconductor module 66 is disposed along the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 71, and the cooling water passage 74 is provided at a position overlapping the semiconductor module 66 in the radial direction and the inside.

Since the stator 50 is disposed outside the cylindrical portion 71 and the electric component 62 is disposed inside, the heat of the stator 50 is transmitted to the cylindrical portion 71 from the outside thereof, The heat of the electrical component 62 (for example, the heat of the semiconductor module 66) is transmitted from the inside. In this case, the stator 50 and the semiconductor module 66 can be cooled simultaneously, and the heat of the heat generating member of the rotary electric machine 10 can be efficiently released.

Furthermore, at least a portion of the semiconductor module 66 that constitutes a part or all of the inverter circuit that operates the rotating electrical machine by energizing the stator winding 51 is the radial outside of the cylindrical portion 71 of the casing 64 The stator core 52 is disposed in the area surrounded by the stator core 52. Desirably, the whole of one semiconductor module 66 is disposed in the area surrounded by the stator core 52. Furthermore, desirably, all of the semiconductor modules 66 are disposed in the area surrounded by the stator core 52.

Further, at least a part of the semiconductor module 66 is disposed in the area surrounded by the cooling water passage 74. Desirably, the whole of all the semiconductor modules 66 is disposed in the area surrounded by the yoke 141.

The electrical component 62 also includes an insulating sheet 75 provided on one end surface of the capacitor module 68 in the axial direction and a wiring module 76 provided on the other end surface. In this case, the capacitor module 68 has two end faces opposed in the axial direction, that is, a first end face and a second end face. A first end face close to the bearing unit 20 of the capacitor module 68 is opposed to the end face 72 of the casing 64, and is superimposed on the end face 72 with the insulating sheet 75 interposed therebetween. Further, the wiring module 76 is assembled to the second end face close to the opening 65 of the capacitor module 68.

The wiring module 76 has a circular plate-like main body 76a made of a synthetic resin material and a plurality of bus bars 76b and 76c embedded therein. The bus bars 76b and 76c allow the semiconductor module 66 and the capacitor to be formed. An electrical connection is made with the module 68. Specifically, the semiconductor module 66 has a connection pin 66a extending from the end face in the axial direction, and the connection pin 66a is connected to the bus bar 76b at the radial outside of the main body 76a. Further, the bus bar 76c extends to the side opposite to the capacitor module 68 at the radially outer side of the main body 76a, and is connected to the wiring member 79 at its tip (see FIG. 2).

According to the configuration in which the insulating sheet 75 is provided on the first end face of the capacitor module 68 facing in the axial direction as described above and the wiring module 76 is provided on the second end face of the capacitor module 68, the heat radiation path of the capacitor module 68 A path from the first end face and the second end face of the capacitor module 68 to the end face 72 and the cylindrical portion 71 is formed. That is, a path from the first end face to the end face 72 and a path from the second end face to the cylindrical portion 71 are formed. Thus, heat can be dissipated from the end surface portion of the capacitor module 68 other than the outer peripheral surface on which the semiconductor module 66 is provided. That is, not only the radiation in the radial direction but also the radiation in the axial direction is possible.

Further, since the capacitor module 68 has a hollow cylindrical shape and the rotary shaft 11 is disposed with a predetermined gap interposed in the inner peripheral portion, the heat of the capacitor module 68 can be released also from the hollow portion ing. In this case, the flow of air is generated by the rotation of the rotating shaft 11, so that the cooling effect is enhanced.

A disk-shaped control board 67 is attached to the wiring module 76. The control board 67 has a printed circuit board (PCB) on which a predetermined wiring pattern is formed, and on the board is mounted a control device 77 corresponding to a control unit including various ICs and a microcomputer. There is. The control board 67 is fixed to the wiring module 76 by a fixing tool such as a screw. The control board 67 has an insertion hole 67a at its central portion for inserting the rotating shaft 11.

The wiring module 76 has a first surface and a second surface facing each other in the axial direction, that is, facing each other in the thickness direction. The first side faces the capacitor module 68. The wiring module 76 is provided with a control board 67 on its second surface. The bus bars 76c of the wiring module 76 extend from one side of the both sides of the control board 67 to the other side. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the control board 67 be provided with a notch for avoiding interference with the bus bar 76c. For example, it is preferable that a part of the outer edge portion of the circular control board 67 be cut away.

As described above, according to the configuration in which the electric component 62 is accommodated in the space surrounded by the casing 64 and the housing 30, the rotor 40 and the stator 50 are provided in layers on the outside thereof, the inverter circuit is generated. The electromagnetic noise is preferably shielded. That is, in the inverter circuit, switching control in each semiconductor module 66 is performed using PWM control with a predetermined carrier frequency, and it is conceivable that electromagnetic noise may be generated due to the switching control. It can shield suitably by the housing 30, the rotor 40, the stator 50 grade | etc., Of 62 radial direction outer side.

Furthermore, at least a portion of the semiconductor module 66 is disposed in a region surrounded by the stator core 52 disposed radially outward of the cylindrical portion 71 of the casing 64, thereby the semiconductor module 66 and the stator winding Compared with the configuration in which the stator core 51 is disposed without the stator core 52, even if magnetic flux is generated from the semiconductor module 66, the stator winding 51 is less likely to be affected. Further, even if magnetic flux is generated from the stator winding 51, the semiconductor module 66 is unlikely to be affected. It is more effective to dispose the whole of the semiconductor module 66 in a region surrounded by the stator core 52 disposed radially outside of the cylindrical portion 71 of the casing 64. In addition, when at least a part of the semiconductor module 66 is surrounded by the cooling water passage 74, an effect can be obtained that heat generated from the stator winding 51 and the magnet unit 42 does not easily reach the semiconductor module 66.

In the cylindrical portion 71, in the vicinity of the end plate 63, a through hole 78 for inserting a wiring member 79 (see FIG. 2) for electrically connecting the stator 50 on the outside and the electric component 62 on the inside is formed. There is. As shown in FIG. 2, the wiring member 79 is connected to the end of the stator winding 51 and the bus bar 76 c of the wiring module 76 by pressure bonding, welding or the like. The wiring member 79 is, for example, a bus bar, and it is desirable that the joint surface is crushed flat. The through holes 78 may be provided at one or a plurality of places, and in the present embodiment, the through holes 78 are provided at two places. In the configuration in which through holes 78 are provided at two locations, it is possible to easily connect the winding terminals extending from two sets of three-phase windings with wiring member 79, which is preferable for performing multiphase connection. It has become.

As described above, in the housing 30, as shown in FIG. 4, the rotor 40 and the stator 50 are provided in order from the radial outer side, and the inverter unit 60 is provided in the radial direction inner side of the stator 50. Here, when the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the housing 30 is d, the rotor 40 and the stator 50 are disposed radially outside the distance of d × 0.705 from the rotation center of the rotor 40 There is. In this case, of the rotor 40 and the stator 50, the region radially inward from the inner circumferential surface of the radially inner stator 50 (that is, the inner circumferential surface of the stator core 52) is the first region X1 in the radial direction Assuming that the area from the inner circumferential surface of the stator 50 to the housing 30 is a second area X2, the area of the cross section of the first area X1 is larger than the area of the cross section of the second area X2. There is. Further, when the magnet unit 42 of the rotor 40 and the stator winding 51 of the rotor 40 overlap in the radial direction, the volume of the first region X1 is larger than the volume of the second region X2.

When the rotor 40 and the stator 50 are a magnetic circuit component assembly, in the housing 30, the first region X1 radially inward from the inner circumferential surface of the magnetic circuit component assembly in the radial direction is the magnetic circuit component assembly The volume is larger than the second region X2 from the inner circumferential surface of the housing 30 to the housing 30.

Next, the configurations of the rotor 40 and the stator 50 will be described in more detail.

Generally, as a configuration of a stator in a rotating electrical machine, it is known to provide a plurality of slots in a circumferential direction on a stator core made of laminated steel plates and having an annular shape, and winding a stator winding in the slots. There is. Specifically, the stator core has a plurality of teeth radially extending at predetermined intervals from the yoke, and a slot is formed between the teeth adjacent in the circumferential direction. In the slot, for example, a plurality of layers of conducting wires are accommodated in the radial direction, and the stator winding is configured by the conducting wires.

However, in the above-described stator structure, when the stator winding is energized, magnetic saturation occurs in the teeth of the stator core as the magnetomotive force of the stator winding increases, which causes rotation of the rotating electric machine. It is conceivable that the torque density is limited. That is, in the stator core, it is considered that magnetic saturation occurs when the rotating magnetic flux generated by energization of the stator winding is concentrated on the teeth.

Generally, as a configuration of an IPM (Interior Permanent Magnet) rotor in a rotating electrical machine, one in which permanent magnets are disposed on the d axis in a dq coordinate system and a rotor core is disposed on the q axis is known. In such a case, by exciting the stator winding in the vicinity of the d-axis, an excitation magnetic flux flows from the stator to the q-axis of the rotor according to Fleming's law. And, it is considered that a wide range of magnetic saturation occurs in the q-axis core portion of the rotor.

FIG. 7 is a torque diagram showing a relationship between an ampere turn [AT] indicating a magnetomotive force of a stator winding and a torque density [Nm / L]. The broken line shows the characteristics of a general IPM rotor type rotating electric machine. As shown in FIG. 7, in a general rotating electric machine, magnetic saturation occurs in two places of the teeth portion between the slots and the q-axis core portion by increasing the magnetomotive force in the stator, which causes The increase in torque is limited. Thus, in the general rotating electric machine, the ampere-turn design value is limited to A1.

So, in this embodiment, in order to eliminate the restriction | limiting resulting from magnetic saturation, in the rotary electric machine 10, the structure shown below shall be provided. That is, as a first device, in order to eliminate magnetic saturation occurring in the stator core teeth in the stator, a slotless structure is adopted in the stator 50 and magnetic saturation occurring in the q-axis core portion of the IPM rotor is eliminated. , SPM (Surface Permanent Magnet) rotor is adopted. According to the first device, it is possible to eliminate the two parts where the magnetic saturation occurs, but it is conceivable that the torque in the low current region is reduced (see the dashed line in FIG. 7). Therefore, as a second device, a pole anisotropic structure is adopted in which the magnet magnetic path is lengthened in the magnet unit 42 of the rotor 40 to increase the magnetic force in order to overcome the torque reduction by increasing the magnetic flux of the SPM rotor. ing.

Further, as a third device, a flat wire structure in which the radial thickness of the wire in the stator 50 is reduced at the coil side portion 53 of the stator winding 51 is employed to achieve the reduction of torque. Here, it is conceivable that a larger eddy current is generated in the stator winding 51 facing the magnet unit 42 due to the above-described pole anisotropic structure in which the magnetic force is enhanced. However, according to the third device, it is possible to suppress the generation of the eddy current in the radial direction in the stator winding 51 because of the flat thin lead wire structure in the radial direction. As described above, according to the first to third configurations, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 7, a magnet having a high magnetic force is employed to expect a significant improvement in torque characteristics, while a magnet having a high magnetic force is expected. The potential for large eddy current generation can also be ameliorated.

Further, as a fourth device, a magnet unit having a magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave is adopted by utilizing a pole anisotropic structure. According to this, it is possible to enhance the torque by increasing the sine wave matching rate by pulse control and the like described later, and also to reduce eddy current loss (copper loss due to eddy current: eddy current loss) Can also be further suppressed.

The sine wave matching factor will be described below. The sine wave matching rate can be obtained by comparing the measured waveform of the surface magnetic flux density distribution measured by tracing the surface of the magnet with a magnetic flux probe and the like and the sine wave having the same period and peak value. The ratio of the amplitude of the primary waveform, which is the fundamental wave of the rotary electric machine, to the amplitude of the measured waveform, that is, the amplitude obtained by adding another harmonic component to the fundamental wave corresponds to the sine wave matching ratio. As the sine wave matching rate increases, the waveform of the surface magnetic flux density distribution approaches a sine wave shape. Then, when a primary sine wave current is supplied from the inverter to a rotating electrical machine equipped with a magnet whose sine wave matching rate is improved, the waveform of the surface magnetic flux density distribution of the magnet is close to a sine wave shape. , Can generate a large torque. The surface magnetic flux density distribution may be estimated by a method other than measurement, for example, electromagnetic field analysis using Maxwell's equation.

Further, as a fifth device, the stator winding 51 has a strand conductor structure in which a plurality of strands are gathered and bundled. According to this, since the strands are connected in parallel, a large current can flow, and generation of eddy current generated in the lead which spreads in the circumferential direction of the stator 50 in the flat lead structure is the cross-sectional area of each strand Can be effectively suppressed beyond thinning in the radial direction by the third device. And by making it the structure which twisted the several strand, with respect to the magnetomotive force from a conductor, the eddy current with respect to the magnetic flux which generate | occur | produces with the law of a right-handed screw can be offset with respect to the current conduction direction.

As described above, when the fourth device and the fifth device are further added, the torque enhancement can be performed while suppressing the eddy current loss due to the high magnetic force while adopting the magnet with the high magnetic force, which is the second device. Can be

Below, the slotless structure of the stator 50 mentioned above, the flat conducting wire structure of the stator winding 51, and the pole anisotropic structure of the magnet unit 42 will be individually described. Here, first, the slotless structure of the stator 50 and the flat conductor structure of the stator winding 51 will be described. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the rotor 40 and the stator 50, and FIG. 9 is an enlarged view of a part of the rotor 40 and the stator 50 shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing a cross-section of the stator 50 along the line XX in FIG. 11, and FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view showing a vertical cross-section of the stator 50. As shown in FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the stator winding 51. As shown in FIG. In FIGS. 8 and 9, the magnetization directions of the magnets in the magnet unit 42 are indicated by arrows.

As shown in FIGS. 8 to 11, the stator core 52 has a cylindrical shape in which a plurality of electromagnetic steel sheets are stacked in the axial direction and has a predetermined thickness in the radial direction, and is on the rotor 40 side. The stator winding 51 is to be assembled radially outward. In the stator core 52, the outer peripheral surface on the side of the rotor 40 is a conductor installation portion (conductor area). The outer peripheral surface of the stator core 52 is in the form of a curved surface without unevenness, and on the outer peripheral surface, a plurality of wire groups 81 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. The stator core 52 functions as a back yoke that is part of a magnetic circuit for rotating the rotor 40. In this case, teeth (i.e., iron cores) made of a soft magnetic material are not provided between the two lead wire groups 81 adjacent in the circumferential direction (i.e., slotless structure). In the present embodiment, the resin material of the sealing member 57 enters the gaps 56 of the respective lead groups 81. That is, in the stator 50, an inter-lead member provided between the wire groups 81 in the circumferential direction is configured as a sealing member 57 which is a nonmagnetic material. In the state before sealing of the sealing member 57, the wire groups 81 are disposed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction on the radially outer side of the stator core 52 with a gap 56 which is an area between the wires. Thus, the stator 50 of the slotless structure is constructed. In other words, each lead wire group 81 is composed of two conductors 82 as will be described later, and only the nonmagnetic material is occupied between each two lead wire groups 81 adjacent in the circumferential direction of the stator 50. There is. The nonmagnetic material includes, in addition to the sealing member 57, a nonmagnetic gas such as air and a nonmagnetic liquid. In the following, the sealing member 57 is also referred to as a conductor-to-conductor member.

The configuration in which the teeth are provided between the wire groups 81 aligned in the circumferential direction means that the teeth have a predetermined thickness in the radial direction and a predetermined width in the circumferential direction. It can be said that a part of the magnetic circuit, that is, a magnet magnetic path is formed between 81 and 81. In this respect, the configuration in which the teeth are not provided between the conductive wire groups 81 can be said to be a configuration in which the above magnetic circuit is not formed.

As shown in FIG. 10, the stator winding (that is, armature winding) 51 has a predetermined thickness T2 (hereinafter, also referred to as a first dimension) and a width W2 (hereinafter, also referred to as a second dimension). It is formed. The thickness T2 is the shortest distance between the outer surface and the inner surface facing each other in the radial direction of the stator winding 51. The width W2 functions as one of the polyphases of the stator winding 51 (in the embodiment, three phases: U phase, V phase and W phase, or three phases of X phase, Y phase and Z phase). It is a circumferential length of a part of the stator winding 51 of the secondary winding 51. Specifically, in FIG. 10, in the case where two wire groups 81 adjacent in the circumferential direction function as one of the three phases, for example, as a U phase, the two wire groups 81 in the circumferential direction end to end The width is up to W2. The thickness T2 is smaller than the width W2.

In addition, it is preferable that thickness T2 is smaller than the sum total width dimension of two conducting wire groups 81 which exist in width W2. Further, if the cross-sectional shape of the stator winding 51 (more specifically, the conducting wire 82) is a true circular shape, an elliptical shape, or a polygonal shape, of the cross sections of the conducting wire 82 along the radial direction of the stator 50, The maximum radial length of the stator 50 in the cross section may be W12, and the maximum circumferential length of the stator 50 in the cross section may be W11.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the stator winding 51 is sealed by a sealing member 57 made of a synthetic resin material as a sealing material (mold material). That is, the stator winding 51 is molded by the molding material together with the stator core 52. In addition, resin can be regarded as Bs = 0 as a nonmagnetic material or equivalent of a nonmagnetic material.

As seen in the cross section of FIG. 10, the sealing member 57 is provided with a synthetic resin material filled between the wire groups 81, that is, in the gap 56, and between the wire groups 81 by the sealing member 57. In the configuration, an insulating member is interposed. That is, the sealing member 57 functions as an insulating member in the gap 56. Sealing member 57 includes all the wire groups 81 outside the stator core 52 in the radial direction, that is, in a range in which the radial thickness dimension is larger than the radial thickness dimension of each wire group 81. It is provided.

Further, when viewed in the vertical cross section of FIG. 11, the sealing member 57 is provided in a range including the turn portion 84 of the stator winding 51. A sealing member 57 is provided on the inner side in the radial direction of the stator winding 51 in a range including at least a part of the end face of the stator core 52 facing in the axial direction. In this case, the stator winding 51 is resin-sealed substantially in its entirety except the end of the phase winding of each phase, that is, the connection terminal with the inverter circuit.

In the configuration in which the sealing member 57 is provided in a range including the end face of the stator core 52, the laminated steel plate of the stator core 52 can be pressed axially inward by the sealing member 57. Thereby, the lamination state of each steel plate can be held using sealing member 57. In the present embodiment, although the inner peripheral surface of the stator core 52 is not resin-sealed, instead of this, the entire stator core 52 including the inner peripheral surface of the stator core 52 is resin-sealed It may be a configuration.

In the case where the rotating electrical machine 10 is used as a vehicle power source, the sealing member 57 is made of a high heat resistant fluororesin, epoxy resin, PPS resin, PEEK resin, LCP resin, silicon resin, PAI resin, PI resin, etc. It is preferable that it is comprised. Further, in view of the linear expansion coefficient from the viewpoint of suppressing cracking due to the expansion difference, it is preferable that the material is the same as the outer coating of the conductive wire of the stator winding 51. That is, a silicone resin whose linear expansion coefficient is generally twice or more that of other resins is desirably excluded. In electric products such as electric vehicles which do not have an engine utilizing combustion, PPO resin, phenol resin, and FRP resin having heat resistance of about 180 ° C. are also candidates. This is not the case in the field where the ambient temperature of the rotating electrical machine can be considered to be less than 100 ° C.

The torque of the rotating electrical machine 10 is proportional to the magnitude of the magnetic flux. Here, when the stator core has teeth, the maximum amount of magnetic flux at the stator is limited depending on the saturation magnetic flux density at the teeth, but the stator core does not have teeth. In that case, the maximum amount of flux at the stator is not limited. Therefore, the configuration is advantageous in increasing the current supplied to the stator winding 51 to increase the torque of the rotating electrical machine 10.

In the present embodiment, by using a structure (slotless structure) in which the teeth are eliminated in the stator 50, the inductance of the stator 50 is reduced. Specifically, in the stator of a general rotating electrical machine in which a lead is accommodated in each slot partitioned by a plurality of teeth, the inductance is, for example, around 1 mH, whereas in the stator 50 of the present embodiment, the inductance is It is reduced to about 5 to 60 μH. In the present embodiment, the mechanical time constant Tm can be reduced by reducing the inductance of the stator 50 while using the rotary electric machine 10 having the outer rotor structure. That is, the mechanical time constant Tm can be reduced while achieving high torque. Assuming that the inertia is J, the inductance is L, the torque constant is Kt, and the back electromotive force constant is Ke, the mechanical time constant Tm is calculated by the following equation.
Tm = (J × L) / (Kt × Ke)
In this case, it can be confirmed that the mechanical time constant Tm is reduced by the reduction of the inductance L.

Each group of conducting wires 81 on the radially outer side of the stator core 52 is configured by arranging a plurality of conducting wires 82 having a flat rectangular shape in cross section in the radial direction of the stator core 52. Each conducting wire 82 is arranged in a direction such that "radial dimension <circumferential dimension" in the cross section. Thereby, thickness reduction in the radial direction is achieved in each wire group 81. Moreover, while achieving thickness reduction of radial direction, a conductor area | region extends flatly to the area | region where teeth conventionally existed, and it has a flat conducting wire area | region structure. Thereby, the increase in the calorific value of the conducting wire which is concerned due to the reduction of the cross-sectional area due to the reduction in thickness is suppressed by flattening in the circumferential direction to increase the cross-sectional area of the conductor. Even if a plurality of conducting wires are arranged in the circumferential direction and connected in parallel, the same effect can be obtained although the cross-sectional area reduction of the conductive film occurs although the conductive coating is reduced. In the following, each of the conductor groups 81 and each of the conductors 82 are also referred to as conductive members (conductive members).

Since there is no slot, in the stator winding 51 in the present embodiment, the conductor area occupied by the stator winding 51 in one circumferential direction is designed to be larger than the conductor non-occupied area where the stator winding 51 does not exist. be able to. In the conventional automotive electric rotating machine, it is natural that the conductor area / conductor non-occupied area in one circumferential direction of the stator winding is 1 or less. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the conductor groups 81 are provided such that the conductor area is equal to the non-conducted area or the conductor area is larger than the non-occupied area. Here, as shown in FIG. 10, when the conducting wire area in which the conducting wire 82 (that is, the linear portion 83 described later) is disposed in the circumferential direction is WA, and the conducting wire area between adjacent conducting wires 82 is WB, The area WA is larger in the circumferential direction than the inter-conductor area WB.

As a configuration of the wire group 81 in the stator winding 51, the thickness dimension in the radial direction of the wire group 81 is smaller than the width dimension in the circumferential direction of one phase in one magnetic pole. That is, in the configuration in which the wire group 81 is composed of two layers of wire 82 in the radial direction and two wire groups 81 are provided in the circumferential direction per one phase in one magnetic pole, the thickness dimension of each wire 82 Tc, when the width dimension of each conducting wire 82 in the circumferential direction is Wc, it is configured to be “Tc × 2 <Wc × 2”. As another configuration, in a configuration in which conductor group 81 is composed of two layers of conductors 82, and one conductor group 81 is provided in the circumferential direction per one phase in one magnetic pole, the relationship of “Tc × 2 <Wc” It should be configured to be In short, in the stator winding 51, the conductor wire portions (conductor wire groups 81) arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction have a thickness dimension in the radial direction that is greater than a width dimension in the circumferential direction of one phase in one magnetic pole. It is small.

In other words, each of the lead wires 82 preferably has a thickness dimension Tc in the radial direction smaller than a width dimension Wc in the circumferential direction. Furthermore, the radial thickness dimension (2Tc) of the conducting wire group 81 consisting of the two layers of conducting wires 82 in the radial direction, that is, the radial thickness dimension (2Tc) of the conducting wire group 81 is greater than the width dimension Wc in the circumferential direction. It is good to be small.

The torque of the rotary electric machine 10 is approximately in inverse proportion to the radial thickness of the stator core 52 of the wire group 81. In this respect, by reducing the thickness of the wire group 81 outside the stator core 52 in the radial direction, the configuration is advantageous in achieving an increase in torque of the rotary electric machine 10. The reason is that the magnetic resistance can be reduced by reducing the distance from the magnet unit 42 of the rotor 40 to the stator core 52 (that is, the distance of the portion without iron). According to this, it is possible to increase the flux linkage of the stator core 52 by the permanent magnet, and to enhance the torque.

Further, by reducing the thickness of the wire group 81, even if the magnetic flux leaks from the wire group 81, it is easily collected by the stator core 52, and the magnetic flux leaks to the outside without being effectively used for improving the torque. Can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the magnetic force due to the magnetic flux leakage, and it is possible to increase the torque by increasing the flux linkage of the stator core 52 by the permanent magnet.

Conductor 82 is a coated conductor in which the surface of conductor body 82a is covered with insulating coating 82b, and between conductor 82 which mutually overlaps in the radial direction, and between conductor 82 and stator core 52 In each case, insulation is secured. The insulating coating 82b is formed of an insulating member that is stacked separately from the coating of the strand 86 if the strand 86 described later is a self-bonding coated line. In addition, each phase winding configured by the conducting wire 82 is such that the insulating property by the insulating coating 82 b is maintained except for the exposed portion for connection. The exposed portion is, for example, an input / output terminal portion or a neutral point portion in the case of star connection. In the conducting wire group 81, the conducting wires 82 adjacent to each other in the radial direction are fixed to each other using a resin fixing or a self-fusion coated wire. Thereby, dielectric breakdown, vibration, and sound due to rubbing between the conducting wires 82 are suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the conductor 82 a is configured as an assembly of a plurality of wires 86. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the conductor 82 a is formed in a twisted thread shape by twisting a plurality of strands 86. In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, the strands 86 are configured as a composite obtained by bundling thin fibrous conductive materials 87. For example, the strand 86 is a composite of CNT (carbon nanotube) fibers, and as the CNT fibers, fibers including boron-containing fine fibers in which at least a part of carbon is substituted by boron are used. As carbon-based fine fibers, vapor grown carbon fibers (VGCF) or the like can be used in addition to CNT fibers, but it is preferable to use CNT fibers. The surface of the wire 86 is covered with a polymer insulating layer such as enamel. Further, the surface of the strand 86 is preferably covered with a so-called enamel film made of a polyimide film or an amidimide film.

The conducting wire 82 constitutes an n-phase winding in the stator winding 51. The strands 86 of each of the leads 82 (i.e., the conductors 82a) are adjacent to each other in contact with each other. The conductor 82 has a portion where the winding conductor is formed by twisting a plurality of strands 86 at one or more places in the phase, and the resistance value between the strands 86 which are twisted is the strand 86 itself The wire assembly is larger than the resistance value of. In other words, if each two adjacent strands 86 have a first electrical resistivity in their adjacent direction, and each of the strands 86 has a second electrical resistivity in its length direction, the first electrical resistance The rate is a value larger than the second electrical resistivity. In addition, while the conducting wire 82 is formed of the several strand 86, it may become a strand aggregate | assembly which covers the several strand 86 by the insulation member with very high 1st electrical resistivity. Also, the conductor 82 a of the conducting wire 82 is constituted by a plurality of strands 86 twisted together.

In the conductor 82a described above, since the plurality of strands 86 are twisted together, generation of eddy current in each strand 86 can be suppressed, and eddy current in the conductor 82a can be reduced. In addition, since the strands 86 are twisted, in one strand 86, portions where the application directions of the magnetic field are reverse to each other are generated, and the back electromotive force is offset. Therefore, the eddy current can be reduced as well. In particular, by forming the strands 86 with the fibrous conductive material 87, it is possible to reduce the number of wires and to significantly increase the number of times of twisting, and it is possible to more preferably reduce the eddy current.

In addition, the insulation method of strands 86 here is not limited to the above-mentioned polymer insulating film, You may be the method of making an electric current hard to flow between strands 86 twisted using contact resistance. That is, if the resistance value between the twisted strands 86 is in a relation larger than the resistance value of the strands 86 themselves, the above effect can be obtained by the potential difference generated due to the difference in the resistance values. . For example, by using the manufacturing equipment for producing the wire 86 and the manufacturing equipment for producing the stator 50 (armature) of the rotary electric machine 10 as separate non-continuous equipment, the wire from the moving time and the work interval etc. 86 is preferable because it can oxidize and increase the contact resistance.

As described above, the conducting wire 82 has a flat rectangular shape in cross section, and is arranged in plural in the radial direction, for example, a plurality of wires covered with a self-fusion coated wire including a fusion layer and an insulating layer The strands of wire 86 are gathered in a twisted state, and their fusion layers are fused to maintain their shape. In addition, in a state in which the strands of the wire without the fusion layer and the strands of the self-fusion-coated wire are twisted, they may be compacted into a desired shape by a synthetic resin or the like. In the case where the thickness of the insulating film 82b in the conducting wire 82 is, for example, 80 μm to 100 μm and thicker than the film thickness (5 to 40 μm) of a commonly used conducting wire, insulation between the conducting wire 82 and the stator core 52 Even without interposing paper or the like, the insulation between the two can be secured.

In addition, it is desirable that the insulating coating 82 b be configured to have insulation performance higher than that of the strands 86 and to insulate between the phases. For example, when the thickness of the polymer insulating layer of the strand 86 is, for example, about 5 μm, the thickness of the insulating coating 82 b of the conducting wire 82 is about 80 μm to 100 μm so that the insulation between the phases can be suitably implemented. Is desirable.

Moreover, the structure which the wire 82 is bundled without the several strand 86 being twisted may be sufficient. That is, the conductor 82 has a configuration in which a plurality of strands 86 are twisted in the entire length, a configuration in which a plurality of strands 86 are twisted in part of the entire length, and a plurality of strands 86 are twisted in the entire length It may be any of the configurations bundled. In summary, in each of the conducting wires 82 constituting the conducting wire portion, a plurality of strands 86 are bundled, and a strand assembly in which the resistance value between the bundled strands is larger than the resistance of the strand 86 itself It has become.

Each conducting wire 82 is bent and formed so as to be arranged in a predetermined arrangement pattern in the circumferential direction of the stator winding 51, whereby a phase winding for each phase is formed as the stator winding 51. . As shown in FIG. 12, in the stator winding 51, the coil side portions 53 are formed by the linear portions 83 linearly extending in the axial direction of each of the conducting wires 82, and both side outside the coil side portions 53 in the axial direction A coil end 54, 55 is formed by the protruding turn portion 84. Each conducting wire 82 is configured as a series of wave-like conducting wires by alternately repeating the straight portions 83 and the turn portions 84. The straight portions 83 are disposed at positions facing the magnet unit 42 in the radial direction, and in-phase straight portions 83 arranged at predetermined intervals on the axially outer side of the magnet unit 42 are It is mutually connected by the turn part 84. As shown in FIG. The straight portion 83 corresponds to the "magnet facing portion".

In the present embodiment, the stator winding 51 is wound in an annular shape by distributed winding. In this case, in the coil side portion 53, linear portions 83 are arranged circumferentially at intervals corresponding to one pole pair of the magnet unit 42 for each phase, and in the coil ends 54 and 55, each linear portion 83 for each phase is They are connected to each other by turn portions 84 formed in a substantially V-shape. The directions of the currents of the straight portions 83 corresponding to one pole pair are opposite to each other. Further, the combination of the pair of straight portions 83 connected by the turn portion 84 is different between one coil end 54 and the other coil end 55, and the connection at the coil ends 54 and 55 is in the circumferential direction. By being repeated, the stator winding 51 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape.

More specifically, the stator winding 51 constitutes a winding for each phase using two pairs of conductors 82 for each phase, and one of the three-phase windings (U A phase, a V phase, a W phase) and the other three phase winding (X phase, Y phase, Z phase) are provided in two layers radially inside and outside. In this case, assuming that the number of phases of the stator winding 51 is S (6 in the case of the embodiment) and the number per phase of the conducting wire 82 is m, 2 × S × m = 2Sm conducting wires per pole pair 82 will be formed. In this embodiment, since the number of phases S is 6, the number m is 4, and the rotating electrical machine is an 8-pole pair (16 poles), the conductor 82 of 6 × 4 × 8 = 192 is the periphery of the stator core 52 It is arranged in the direction.

In the stator winding 51 shown in FIG. 12, in the coil side portion 53, the linear portions 83 are disposed so as to overlap in two layers adjacent in the radial direction, and in the coil ends 54 and 55, the linear portions overlapping in the radial direction From 83, the turn portions 84 extend in the circumferential direction in directions opposite to each other in the circumferential direction. That is, in each of the conductive wires 82 adjacent in the radial direction, the direction of the turn portion 84 is opposite to each other except for the end of the stator winding 51.

Here, the winding structure of the conducting wire 82 in the stator winding 51 will be specifically described. In the present embodiment, a plurality of conducting wires 82 formed by wave winding are provided so as to be superimposed on a plurality of layers (for example, two layers) adjacent in the radial direction. 15 (a) and 15 (b) are diagrams showing the form of each conducting wire 82 in the n-th layer, and FIG. 15 (a) is a view of the conducting wire 82 seen from the side of the stator winding 51. The shape is shown, and the shape of the conducting wire 82 seen from one axial direction side of the stator winding 51 is shown in FIG. In FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b), the positions at which the wire groups 81 are disposed are indicated as D1, D2, D3,. Moreover, for convenience of explanation, only three conducting wires 82 are shown, which are referred to as a first conducting wire 82_A, a second conducting wire 82_B, and a third conducting wire 82_C.

In each of the conducting wires 82 _A to 82 _C, the linear portions 83 are all arranged at the n-th layer position, ie, the same position in the radial direction, and the linear portions 83 separated by 6 positions (3 × m pair) in the circumferential direction It is mutually connected by the turn part 84. As shown in FIG. In other words, in each of the conducting wires 82 _A to 82 _C, the ends of the seven straight portions 83 adjacently arranged in the circumferential direction of the stator winding 51 on the same circle centering on the axial center of the rotor 40. Two are connected to each other by one turn 84. For example, in the first conducting wire 82_A, a pair of straight portions 83 are disposed at D1 and D7, respectively, and the pair of straight portions 83 are connected by an inverted V-shaped turn portion 84. Further, the other conducting wires 82 _B and 82 _C are arranged in the same n-th layer while shifting their circumferential positions one by one. In this case, since all the conductors 82 _A to 82 _C are disposed in the same layer, it is conceivable that the turn portions 84 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the turn portion 84 of each of the conducting wires 82_A to 82_C, an interference avoidance portion in which a part thereof is offset in the radial direction is formed.

Specifically, the turn portion 84 of each of the conducting wires 82_A to 82_C is one inclined portion 84a which is a portion extending in the circumferential direction on the same circle (first circle), and from the same circle from the inclined portion 84a The peak 84b is also shifted radially inward (upper side in FIG. 15B) and reaches another circle (second circle), the inclined portion 84c circumferentially extending on the second circle and the first circle And a return portion 84d returning to the second circle. The top portion 84 b, the sloped portion 84 c, and the return portion 84 d correspond to the interference avoiding portion. The inclined portion 84c may be configured to shift radially outward with respect to the inclined portion 84a.

That is, the turn portion 84 of each of the conducting wires 82_A to 82_C has one side inclined portion 84a and the other side inclined portion 84c on both sides of the top portion 84b which is the center position in the circumferential direction. Positions in the radial direction of the inclined portions 84a and 84c (positions in the front and rear direction in FIG. 15A and positions in the vertical direction in FIG. 15B) are different from each other. For example, after the turn portion 84 of the first conductive wire 82_A extends along the circumferential direction starting from the position D1 of the n layer and bent in the radial direction (for example, radially inward) at the top portion 84b which is the center position in the circumferential direction, By bending in the circumferential direction again, it extends along the circumferential direction again, and is bent in the radial direction (for example, the radially outer side) again at the return portion 84d to reach the D7 position of the n layer which is the end point position. There is.

According to the above configuration, in the conducting wires 82_A to 82_C, one inclined portion 84a is vertically arranged from the top in the order of the first conducting wire 82_A → the second conducting wire 82_B → the third conducting wire 82_C, and the conducting wire 82_A ~ at the top 84b The upper and lower portions of 82_C are interchanged, and the other inclined portions 84c are arranged vertically in the order of the third conductive wire 82_C, the second conductive wire 82_B, and the first conductive wire 82_A from the top. Therefore, the conductors 82_A to 82_C can be arranged in the circumferential direction without interfering with each other.

Here, in the configuration in which the plurality of conducting wires 82 are overlapped in the radial direction to form the conducting wire group 81, the turn portion 84 connected to the straight portion 83 inside the radial direction among the linear portions 83 of the plurality of layers; It is preferable that the turn portions 84 connected to the linear portions 83 be disposed more radially apart than the respective linear portions 83. In addition, in the case where the lead wires 82 of multiple layers are bent in the same radial direction at the end of the turn portion 84, that is, near the boundary with the straight portion 83, the insulation properties are due to interference between the lead wires 82 of adjacent layers. It is good to prevent the loss of

For example, in D7 to D9 of FIGS. 15A and 15B, the lead wires 82 overlapping in the radial direction are bent in the radial direction at the return portion 84d of the turn portion 84, respectively. In this case, as shown in FIG. 16, the radius of curvature of the bent portion may be made different between the n-th conductive wire 82 and the n + 1-th conductive wire 82. Specifically, the radius of curvature R1 of the radially inner (n-th layer) conducting wire 82 is made smaller than the radius of curvature R2 of the radially outer (n + 1-th) layer conducting wire 82.

Further, it is preferable to make the shift amount in the radial direction different between the n-th conductive wire 82 and the n + 1-th conductive wire 82. Specifically, the shift amount S1 of the radially inner (n-th layer) conducting wire 82 is made larger than the shift amount S2 of the radially outer (n + 1-th) conducting wire 82.

According to the above configuration, even when the radially overlapping wires 82 are bent in the same direction, mutual interference of the wires 82 can be suitably avoided. Thereby, good insulation can be obtained.

Next, the structure of the magnet unit 42 in the rotor 40 will be described. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the magnet unit 42 is a permanent magnet, and the residual magnetic flux density Br = 1.0 [T] and the intrinsic coercive force Hcj = 400 [kA / m] or more. The important point is that the permanent magnet used in the present embodiment is a sintered magnet obtained by sintering granular magnetic material and forming and solidifying it, and the intrinsic coercivity Hcj on the JH curve is 400 [kA / m] or more. And residual magnetic flux density Br is 1.0 [T] or more. When 5000 to 10000 [AT] is applied by interphase excitation, the magnetic length of one pole pair, that is, the N pole and the S pole, in other words, the path of the magnetic flux flowing between the N pole and the S pole passes through the magnet If a permanent magnet with a length of 25 [mm] is used, then Hcj = 10000 [A], indicating that demagnetization is not performed.

In other words, when the magnetic unit 42 has a saturation magnetic flux density Js of 1.2 T or more and a crystal grain size of 10 μm or less, and the orientation ratio is α, Js × α is 1 .0 [T] or more.

The magnet unit 42 will be supplemented below. The magnet unit 42 (magnet) is characterized in that 2.15 [T] J Js T 1.2 [T]. In other words, examples of the magnet used for the magnet unit 42 include NdFe11 TiN, Nd2 Fe14 B, Sm2 Fe17 N3, and an FeNi magnet having an L10 type crystal. It is to be noted that a configuration such as SmCo5, which is generally called Samachoba, FePt, Dy2Fe14B, or CoPt can not be used. Note that the same type of compounds, such as Dy2Fe14B and Nd2Fe14B, generally utilize the heavy rare earth dysprosium to lose some of the high Js properties of neodymium while the high coercivity of Dy has In some cases, even a magnet having the above may satisfy 2.15 [T] s Js 1.2 1.2 [T], and this case can also be adopted. In such a case, for example, it will be called ([Nd1-xDyx] 2Fe14B). Furthermore, two or more types of magnets of different compositions, for example, magnets composed of two or more types of materials such as FeNi plus Sm2Fe17N3, can be achieved, for example, Js = 1.6 [T] and Js This can also be achieved by a mixed magnet or the like in which the coercive force is increased by mixing a small amount of, for example, Dy2Fe14B of Js <1 [T] with a Nd2Fe14B magnet having a surplus, for example.

In addition, a rotating electrical machine that is operated at a temperature outside the human activity range, for example, 60 ° C or higher exceeding the desert temperature, for example, in a motor for motor vehicle application where the temperature in the vehicle approaches 80 ° C if summer In particular, it is desirable to include the components of FeNi and Sm2Fe17N3 having a small temperature dependence coefficient. This is a temperature-dependent coefficient in motor operation from a temperature condition near -40 ° C in Nordic which is within human activity range to 60 ° C or more exceeding the desert temperature mentioned above, or heat resistant temperature 180 ° C to 240 ° C of coil enamel film. This is because it is difficult to optimize the control with the same motor driver because the motor characteristics are largely different depending on If FeNi or Sm2Fe17N3 or the like having the L10 type crystal is used, the load on the motor driver can be suitably reduced because of the characteristics having a temperature dependence coefficient which is less than half that of Nd2Fe14B.

In addition, the magnet unit 42 is characterized in that the particle size in the fine powder state before orientation is 10 μm or less and the single magnetic domain particle size or more using the magnet composition. In the magnet, since the coercive force is increased by reducing the size of powder particles to the order of several hundred nm, in recent years, the powder as fine as possible has been used. However, if it is too fine, the BH product of the magnet may be reduced due to oxidation or the like, so a single magnetic domain particle diameter or more is preferable. It is known that if the particle size is up to the single magnetic domain particle size, the coercivity is increased by miniaturization. Incidentally, the size of the particle size described here is the size of the particle size in the fine powder state in the orientation step in the manufacturing process of the magnet.

Furthermore, each of the first magnet 91 and the second magnet 92 of the magnet unit 42 is a so-called sintered magnet formed by sintering magnetic powder at a high temperature. In this sintering, when the saturation magnetization Js of the magnet unit 42 is 1.2 T or more, the crystal grain size of the first magnet 91 and the second magnet 92 is 10 μm or less, and the orientation ratio is α, Js × α is It is performed to satisfy the condition of 1.0 T (Tesla) or more. Moreover, each of the 1st magnet 91 and the 2nd magnet 92 is sintered so that the following conditions may be satisfied. Then, orientation is performed in the orientation process in the manufacturing process, so that the orientation ratio is obtained unlike the definition of the magnetic force direction in the magnetization process of the isotropic magnet. The saturation magnetization Js of the magnet unit 42 of the present embodiment is as high as 1.2 T or more, and the orientation ratio α of the first magnet 91 and the second magnet 92 is high so that Jr ≧ Js × α ≧ 1.0 [T]. The orientation rate is set. Here, the orientation ratio α referred to here is, for example, six easy magnetization axes in each of the first magnet 91 or the second magnet 92, and the direction A10 in which five of them are the same direction is the other one. When one is in the direction B10 inclined 90 degrees with respect to the direction A10, α = 5/6, and the remaining one is in the direction B10 inclined with 45 degrees with respect to the direction A10, the remaining The component facing in one direction A10 of is cos 45 ° = 0.707, so that α = (5 + 0.707) / 6. Although the first magnet 91 and the second magnet 92 are formed by sintering in the present embodiment, the first magnet 91 and the second magnet 92 may be formed by another method if the above conditions are satisfied. . For example, a method of forming an MQ3 magnet or the like can be employed.

In this embodiment, since a permanent magnet in which the axis of easy magnetization is controlled by orientation is used, the magnetic circuit length inside the magnet is the magnetic circuit length of a linear orientation magnet which emits 1.0 T or more according to the prior art Compared with, it can be longer. That is, the magnetic circuit length per one pole pair can be achieved with a small amount of magnet, and the reversible demagnetization range is maintained even when exposed to severe high-temperature conditions as compared with the design using a conventional linearly oriented magnet. Can. In addition, the person who has disclosed the present application has found a configuration that can obtain characteristics close to that of a polar anisotropic magnet even when using a prior art magnet.

The magnetization easy axis refers to a crystal orientation that is easily magnetized in a magnet. The direction of the magnetization easy axis in the magnet is a direction in which the orientation ratio, which indicates the degree to which the direction of the magnetization easy axis is aligned, is 50% or more, or a direction in which the orientation of the magnet is averaged.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the magnet unit 42 has an annular shape, and is provided on the inner side of the magnet holder 41 (specifically, on the inner side in the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 43). The magnet unit 42 includes a first magnet 91 and a second magnet 92 which are polar anisotropic magnets and have different polarities. The first magnets 91 and the second magnets 92 are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. The first magnet 91 is a magnet that forms an N pole in a portion close to the stator winding 51, and the second magnet 92 is a magnet that forms an S pole in a portion close to the stator winding 51. The 1st magnet 91 and the 2nd magnet 92 are permanent magnets which consist of rare earth magnets, such as a neodymium magnet, for example.

In each of the magnets 91 and 92, as shown in FIG. 9, it is the magnetic pole boundary between the d-axis (direct-axis) which is the magnetic pole center and the N and S poles in the known dq coordinate system (in other words, the magnetic flux density The magnetization direction extends in a circular arc between the q-axis (quadrature of which is 0 Tesla) and the quadrature-axis. In each of the magnets 91 and 92, the magnetization direction is the radial direction of the annular magnet unit 42 on the d-axis side, and the magnetization direction of the annular magnet unit 42 is the circumferential direction on the q-axis side. This will be described in more detail below. Each of the magnets 91 and 92 has a first portion 250 and two second portions 260 located on both sides of the first portion 250 in the circumferential direction of the magnet unit 42, as shown in FIG. In other words, the first portion 250 is closer to the d-axis than the second portion 260, and the second portion 260 is closer to the q-axis than the first portion 250. The magnet unit 42 is configured such that the direction of the magnetization easy axis 300 of the first portion 250 is more parallel to the d axis than the direction of the magnetization easy axis 310 of the second portion 260. In other words, the magnet unit 42 is configured such that the angle θ11 that the magnetization easy axis 300 of the first portion 250 makes with the d axis is smaller than the angle θ12 that the magnetization easy axis 310 of the second part 260 makes with the q axis. There is.

More specifically, the angle θ11 is an angle formed by the d axis and the easy magnetization axis 300 when the direction from the stator 50 (armature) to the magnet unit 42 in the d axis is positive. The angle θ12 is an angle between the q axis and the easy magnetization axis 310 when the direction from the stator 50 (armature) to the magnet unit 42 in the q axis is positive. In the present embodiment, both the angle θ11 and the angle θ12 are 90 ° or less. Here, each of the magnetization easy axes 300 and 310 has the following definition. Assuming that one easy magnetization axis is in the direction A11 and the other easy magnetization axis is in the direction B11 in each portion of the magnets 91 and 92, the cosine of the angle θ formed by the directions A11 and B11 The absolute value (| cos θ |) is taken as the magnetization easy axis 300 or the magnetization easy axis 310.

That is, in each of the magnets 91 and 92, the direction of the magnetization easy axis is different between the d-axis side (portion near the d-axis) and the q-axis side (portion near the q-axis). The direction of the easy axis is close to the direction parallel to the d axis, and on the q axis side, the direction of the easy magnetization axis is close to the direction orthogonal to the q axis. An arc-shaped magnet magnetic path is formed in accordance with the direction of the magnetization easy axis. In each of the magnets 91 and 92, the magnetization easy axis may be parallel to the d axis on the d axis side, and the magnetization easy axis may be orthogonal to the q axis on the q axis side.

Further, in the magnets 91 and 92, of the circumferential surfaces of the magnets 91 and 92, the stator side outer surface that is on the stator 50 side (the lower side in FIG. 9) and the end surface on the q axis side in the circumferential direction A magnetic flux path is formed so as to connect the magnetic flux acting surfaces (the outer surface on the stator side and the end surface on the q axis side) of the magnetic flux acting surfaces which are the inflow and outflow surfaces.

In the magnet unit 42, the magnetic flux flows in an arc shape between adjacent N and S poles by the magnets 91 and 92, so the magnet magnetic path is longer than, for example, a radial anisotropic magnet. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 17, the magnetic flux density distribution is close to a sine wave. As a result, unlike the magnetic flux density distribution of the radial anisotropic magnet shown as a comparative example in FIG. 18, the magnetic flux can be concentrated on the center side of the magnetic pole, and the torque of the rotating electrical machine 10 can be increased. Moreover, in the magnet unit 42 of this embodiment, it can be confirmed that there is a difference in the magnetic flux density distribution as compared with the conventional Halbach-arrayed magnet. In FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, the horizontal axis shows the electrical angle, and the vertical axis shows the magnetic flux density. Further, in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, 90 ° on the horizontal axis indicates the d axis (that is, the center of the magnetic pole), and 0 ° and 180 ° on the horizontal axis indicate the q axis.

That is, according to each magnet 91, 92 of the said structure, the magnet magnetic flux in d axis | shaft is reinforced, and the magnetic flux change around q axis | shaft is suppressed. Thereby, magnets 91 and 92 in which the surface magnetic flux change from the q-axis to the d-axis in each magnetic pole is smooth can be suitably realized.

The sine wave matching rate of the magnetic flux density distribution may be, for example, 40% or more. In this way, the amount of magnetic flux in the central portion of the waveform can be reliably improved as compared to the case of using a radially oriented magnet or a parallel oriented magnet having a sine wave matching ratio of about 30%. Further, if the sine wave matching ratio is set to 60% or more, the amount of magnetic flux in the central portion of the waveform can be surely improved as compared with the magnetic flux concentration array such as the Halbach array.

In the radial anisotropic magnet shown in FIG. 18, the magnetic flux density changes sharply near the q-axis. As the change in magnetic flux density is steeper, the eddy current generated in the stator winding 51 is increased. In addition, the magnetic flux change on the stator winding 51 side is also sharp. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the magnetic flux density distribution has a magnetic flux waveform close to a sine wave. Therefore, in the vicinity of the q-axis, the change in magnetic flux density is smaller than the change in magnetic flux density of the radial anisotropic magnet. Thereby, the generation of the eddy current can be suppressed.

In the magnet unit 42, a magnetic flux is generated in the direction orthogonal to the magnetic flux acting surface 280 on the stator 50 side in the vicinity of the d axis of the magnets 91 and 92 (that is, the center of the magnetic pole). The farther away from the surface 280, the more it is arced away from the d-axis. Further, as the magnetic flux is perpendicular to the magnetic flux acting surface, the magnetic flux becomes stronger. In this point, in the rotating electrical machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the wire groups 81 are thinned in the radial direction as described above, the radial center position of the wire groups 81 approaches the magnetic flux acting surface of the magnet unit 42, A strong magnetic flux can be received from the rotor 40 at the stator 50.

In the stator 50, a cylindrical stator core 52 is provided radially inside the stator winding 51, that is, on the opposite side of the rotor 40 with the stator winding 51 interposed therebetween. Therefore, the magnetic flux extending from the magnetic flux acting surface of each of the magnets 91 and 92 is attracted to the stator core 52 and circulates while using the stator core 52 as a part of the magnetic path. In this case, the direction and path of the magnet flux can be optimized.

Hereinafter, an assembling procedure of the bearing unit 20, the housing 30, the rotor 40, the stator 50, and the inverter unit 60 shown in FIG. 5 will be described as a method of manufacturing the rotating electrical machine 10. The inverter unit 60 has a unit base 61 and an electric component 62 as shown in FIG. 6, and each operation process including the assembly process of the unit base 61 and the electric component 62 will be described. In the following description, the assembly consisting of the stator 50 and the inverter unit 60 is taken as a first unit, the assembly consisting of the bearing unit 20, the housing 30 and the rotor 40 as a second unit.

This manufacturing process
A first step of mounting the electrical component 62 radially inward of the unit base 61;
A second step of manufacturing the first unit by mounting the unit base 61 radially inward of the stator 50;
A third step of manufacturing the second unit by inserting the fixing portion 44 of the rotor 40 into the bearing unit 20 assembled to the housing 30;
A fourth step of mounting the first unit radially inward of the second unit;
A fifth step of fastening and fixing the housing 30 and the unit base 61;
have. The order of implementation of each of these steps is: first step → second step → third step → fourth step → fifth step.

According to the above manufacturing method, after assembling the bearing unit 20, the housing 30, the rotor 40, the stator 50 and the inverter unit 60 as a plurality of assemblies (sub-assemblies), the assemblies are assembled together, Ease of handling and complete inspection of each unit can be realized, making it possible to construct a rational assembly line. Therefore, it is possible to easily cope with multi-variety production.

In the first step, a good thermal conductor having good thermal conductivity is attached to at least one of the radially inner side of the unit base 61 and the radial direction outer side of the electric component 62 by coating, adhesion or the like. The electrical component 62 may be attached to the unit base 61. As a result, the heat generation of the semiconductor module 66 can be effectively transmitted to the unit base 61.

In the third step, the insertion operation of the rotor 40 may be performed while maintaining the coaxial between the housing 30 and the rotor 40. Specifically, for example, the position of the outer peripheral surface of the rotor 40 (the outer peripheral surface of the magnet holder 41) or the inner peripheral surface of the rotor 40 (the inner peripheral surface of the magnet unit 42) is determined based on the inner peripheral surface of the housing 30 Assembly of the housing 30 and the rotor 40 is performed using a jig and sliding either the housing 30 or the rotor 40 along the jig. As a result, it becomes possible to assemble heavy parts without applying a partial load to the bearing unit 20, and the reliability of the bearing unit 20 is improved.

In the fourth step, the two units may be assembled while maintaining the coaxiality between the first unit and the second unit. Specifically, using, for example, a jig for determining the position of the inner peripheral surface of unit base 61 with reference to the inner peripheral surface of fixing portion 44 of rotor 40, the first unit and the second unit These units are assembled while sliding one of them. As a result, the assembly can be performed while preventing mutual interference between the rotor 40 and the stator 50 in an extremely small gap, so that the assembly winding is caused by damage to the stator winding 51, chipping of the permanent magnet, or the like. It will be possible to eradicate defective products.

It is also possible to make the order of the above-mentioned each process 2nd process-3rd process-4th process-5th process-1st process. In this case, the delicate electrical component 62 is finally assembled, and the stress on the electrical component 62 in the assembling process can be minimized.

Next, the configuration of a control system that controls the rotating electrical machine 10 will be described. FIG. 19 is an electric circuit diagram of a control system of rotary electric machine 10, and FIG. 20 is a functional block diagram showing control processing by control device 110.

In FIG. 19, two sets of three-phase windings 51a and 51b are shown as the stator winding 51, and the three-phase winding 51a is composed of a U-phase winding, a V-phase winding and a W-phase winding, The phase winding 51b is composed of an X-phase winding, a Y-phase winding and a Z-phase winding. A first inverter 101 and a second inverter 102 corresponding to the power converter are provided for each of the three-phase windings 51a and 51b. The inverters 101 and 102 are configured by full bridge circuits having upper and lower arms equal in number to the number of phases of the phase windings, and the switches (semiconductor switching elements) provided on each arm turn on and off the stator winding 51. The conduction current is adjusted in each phase winding.

A DC power supply 103 and a smoothing capacitor 104 are connected in parallel to each of the inverters 101 and 102. The DC power supply 103 is configured of, for example, a battery pack in which a plurality of single cells are connected in series. The switches of the inverters 101 and 102 correspond to the semiconductor module 66 shown in FIG. 1 and the like, and the capacitor 104 corresponds to the capacitor module 68 shown in FIG. 1 and the like.

The control device 110 includes a microcomputer including a CPU and various memories, and performs energization control by turning on and off each switch in the inverters 101 and 102 based on various detection information in the rotating electric machine 10 and a request for powering drive and power generation. carry out. The control device 110 corresponds to the control device 77 shown in FIG. The detection information of the rotating electrical machine 10 includes, for example, a rotation angle (electrical angle information) of the rotor 40 detected by an angle detector such as a resolver, a power supply voltage (inverter input voltage) detected by a voltage sensor, and a current sensor The conduction current of each phase detected by is included. Control device 110 generates and outputs operation signals for operating the switches of inverters 101 and 102. The request for power generation is, for example, a request for regenerative drive when the rotating electrical machine 10 is used as a vehicle power source.

The first inverter 101 is provided with a series connection of an upper arm switch Sp and a lower arm switch Sn in three phases consisting of a U phase, a V phase and a W phase. The high potential side terminal of the upper arm switch Sp of each phase is connected to the positive terminal of the DC power supply 103, and the low potential side terminal of the lower arm switch Sn of each phase is connected to the negative terminal (ground) of the DC power supply 103 . One end of each of a U-phase winding, a V-phase winding, and a W-phase winding is connected to an intermediate connection point between the upper arm switch Sp and the lower arm switch Sn of each phase. These respective phase windings are star-connected (Y-connected), and the other ends of the respective phase windings are connected to each other at a neutral point.

The second inverter 102 has a configuration similar to that of the first inverter 101, and includes a series connection of an upper arm switch Sp and a lower arm switch Sn in three phases consisting of X phase, Y phase and Z phase. ing. The high potential side terminal of the upper arm switch Sp of each phase is connected to the positive terminal of the DC power supply 103, and the low potential side terminal of the lower arm switch Sn of each phase is connected to the negative terminal (ground) of the DC power supply 103 . One end of each of an X-phase winding, a Y-phase winding, and a Z-phase winding is connected to an intermediate connection point between the upper arm switch Sp and the lower arm switch Sn of each phase. These respective phase windings are star-connected (Y-connected), and the other ends of the respective phase windings are connected to each other at a neutral point.

FIG. 20 shows current feedback control processing for controlling each phase current of U, V and W phases, and current feedback control processing for controlling each phase current of X, Y and Z phases. Here, first, control processing on the U, V, and W phases will be described.

In FIG. 20, current command value setting unit 111 uses a torque-dq map, based on a powering torque command value or a power generation torque command value for rotating electric machine 10, or based on an electrical angular velocity ω obtained by time differentiation of electrical angle θ. , D-axis current command value and q-axis current command value are set. The current command value setting unit 111 is commonly provided on the U, V, W phase side and the X, Y, Z phase side. The power generation torque command value is, for example, a regenerative torque command value when the rotary electric machine 10 is used as a vehicle power source.

The dq conversion unit 112 is a two-dimensional orthogonal two-dimensional system in which a current detection value (three phase currents) by a current sensor provided for each phase is taken as a d-axis of a direction of an axis of a magnetic field or field direction. It is converted into d-axis current and q-axis current which are components of the rotational coordinate system.

The d-axis current feedback control unit 113 calculates a d-axis command voltage as an operation amount for feedback controlling the d-axis current to the d-axis current command value. Further, the q-axis current feedback control unit 114 calculates a q-axis command voltage as an operation amount for feedback controlling the q-axis current to the q-axis current command value. Each of these feedback control units 113 and 114 calculates a command voltage using a PI feedback method based on the deviation of the d-axis current and the q-axis current from the current command value.

The three-phase conversion unit 115 converts the d-axis and q-axis command voltages into U-phase, V-phase, and W-phase command voltages. Each of the units 111 to 115 described above is a feedback control unit that performs feedback control of the fundamental wave current according to the dq conversion theory, and the command voltages of the U phase, the V phase and the W phase are feedback control values.

Then, the operation signal generation unit 116 generates an operation signal of the first inverter 101 based on the three-phase command voltage using a known triangular wave carrier comparison method. Specifically, the operation signal generation unit 116 switches the upper and lower arms in each phase by PWM control based on a magnitude comparison between a signal obtained by standardizing the three-phase command voltages with the power supply voltage and a carrier signal such as a triangular wave signal. An operation signal (duty signal) is generated.

In addition, the same configuration is also applied to the X, Y, and Z phases, and the dq conversion unit 122 determines the field direction of the current detection value (three phase currents) by the current sensor provided for each phase. It is converted into a d-axis current and a q-axis current which are components of an orthogonal two-dimensional rotational coordinate system as the d-axis.

The d-axis current feedback control unit 123 calculates the d-axis command voltage, and the q-axis current feedback control unit 124 calculates the q-axis command voltage. The three-phase conversion unit 125 converts the d-axis and q-axis command voltages into X-phase, Y-phase, and Z-phase command voltages. Then, the operation signal generation unit 126 generates an operation signal of the second inverter 102 based on the three-phase command voltages. Specifically, the operation signal generation unit 126 switches the upper and lower arms in each phase by PWM control based on magnitude comparison between a signal obtained by standardizing the three-phase command voltage with the power supply voltage and a carrier signal such as a triangular wave signal. An operation signal (duty signal) is generated.

The driver 117 turns on / off the three-phase switches Sp and Sn in the inverters 101 and 102 based on the switch operation signals generated by the operation signal generation units 116 and 126.

Subsequently, torque feedback control processing will be described. This process is mainly used for the purpose of increasing the output of the rotary electric machine 10 and reducing the loss under operating conditions in which the output voltage of each of the inverters 101 and 102 is increased, such as a high rotation area and a high output area. Control device 110 selects and executes one of torque feedback control processing and current feedback control processing based on the operating conditions of rotating electrical machine 10.

FIG. 21 shows torque feedback control processing corresponding to the U, V, and W phases, and torque feedback control processing corresponding to the X, Y, and Z phases. In FIG. 21, the same components as in FIG. 20 are assigned the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof will be omitted. Here, first, control processing on the U, V, and W phases will be described.

The voltage amplitude calculation unit 127 is a command value of the magnitude of the voltage vector based on the powering torque command value or the power generation torque command value for the rotary electric machine 10 and the electric angular velocity ω obtained by time-differentiating the electric angle θ. Calculate voltage amplitude command.

The torque estimation unit 128 a calculates a torque estimated value corresponding to the U, V, and W phases based on the d-axis current and the q-axis current converted by the dq conversion unit 112. The torque estimation unit 128a may calculate the voltage amplitude command based on the map information in which the d-axis current, the q-axis current, and the voltage amplitude command are related.

Torque feedback control unit 129a calculates a voltage phase command that is a command value of the phase of the voltage vector, as an operation amount for feedback controlling the torque estimated value to the powering torque command value or the power generation torque command value. The torque feedback control unit 129a calculates a voltage phase command using a PI feedback method based on the power running torque command value or the deviation of the torque estimated value from the power generation torque command value.

The operation signal generation unit 130 a generates an operation signal of the first inverter 101 based on the voltage amplitude command, the voltage phase command, and the electrical angle θ. Specifically, the operation signal generation unit 130a calculates a three-phase command voltage based on the voltage amplitude command, the voltage phase command, and the electrical angle θ, and normalizes the calculated three-phase command voltage with the power supply voltage. The switch operation signal of the upper and lower arms in each phase is generated by PWM control based on the magnitude comparison between the signal and the carrier signal such as the triangular wave signal.

Incidentally, the operation signal generation unit 130a is based on pulse pattern information which is map information in which a voltage amplitude command, a voltage phase command, an electrical angle θ and a switch operation signal are related, a voltage amplitude command, a voltage phase command and an electrical angle θ. The switch operation signal may be generated.

In addition, the X-, Y-, and Z-phase sides have the same configuration, and the torque estimation unit 128 b determines the X, Y, and Z based on the d-axis current and the q-axis current converted by the dq conversion unit 122. An estimated torque value corresponding to the Z phase is calculated.

The torque feedback control unit 129 b calculates a voltage phase command as an operation amount for performing feedback control of the torque estimated value to the powering torque command value or the power generation torque command value. The torque feedback control unit 129 b calculates a voltage phase command using a PI feedback method based on the power running torque command value or the deviation of the torque estimated value from the power generation torque command value.

The operation signal generation unit 130 b generates an operation signal of the second inverter 102 based on the voltage amplitude command, the voltage phase command, and the electrical angle θ. Specifically, the operation signal generation unit 130b calculates a three-phase command voltage based on the voltage amplitude command, the voltage phase command, and the electrical angle θ, and normalizes the calculated three-phase command voltage with the power supply voltage. The switch operation signal of the upper and lower arms in each phase is generated by PWM control based on the magnitude comparison between the signal and the carrier signal such as the triangular wave signal. The driver 117 turns on / off the three-phase switches Sp and Sn in the inverters 101 and 102 based on the switch operation signals generated by the operation signal generation units 130a and 130b.

Incidentally, the operation signal generation unit 130b is based on pulse pattern information which is map information in which a voltage amplitude command, a voltage phase command, an electrical angle θ and a switch operation signal are related, a voltage amplitude command, a voltage phase command and an electrical angle θ. The switch operation signal may be generated.

By the way, in the rotary electric machine 10, there is concern that electrolytic corrosion of the bearings 21 and 22 may occur with the generation of the axial current. For example, when the energization of the stator winding 51 is switched by switching, a slight deviation of switching timing (switching imbalance) causes distortion of the magnetic flux, which causes the bearings 21, 22 to support the rotating shaft 11 There is concern that electrolytic corrosion will occur in The distortion of the magnetic flux occurs according to the inductance of the stator 50, and an axial electromotive voltage generated by the distortion of the magnetic flux causes a dielectric breakdown in the bearings 21 and 22 to cause electrolytic corrosion.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, the following three measures are taken as a measure against galvanic corrosion. The first galvanic corrosion countermeasure is a galvanic corrosion suppression countermeasure by reducing the inductance along with making the stator 50 coreless and making the magnet magnetic flux of the magnet unit 42 smooth. The second countermeasure against electrolytic corrosion is a countermeasure against the electrolytic corrosion due to the rotary shaft having a cantilever structure by the bearings 21 and 22. The third galvanic corrosion countermeasure is a galvanic corrosion suppression countermeasure by molding the annular stator winding 51 together with the stator core 52 with a molding material. The details of each of these measures are individually described below.

First, in the first countermeasure against electrolytic corrosion, in the stator 50, the gaps between the wire groups 81 in the circumferential direction are made teethless, and between the wire groups 81, a seal made of nonmagnetic material instead of teeth (iron core) A member 57 is provided (see FIG. 10). Thus, the inductance of the stator 50 can be reduced. By reducing the inductance in the stator 50, even if a shift in switching timing occurs when the stator winding 51 is energized, generation of magnetic flux distortion due to the shift in switching timing is suppressed. It is possible to suppress the electrolytic corrosion of The inductance of the d axis may be equal to or less than the inductance of the q axis.

Further, in the magnets 91 and 92, orientation is made such that the direction of the magnetization easy axis is parallel to the d axis on the d axis side as compared to the q axis side (see FIG. 9). As a result, the magnet magnetic flux in the d-axis is strengthened, and the surface magnetic flux change (increase or decrease of the magnetic flux) from the q-axis to the d-axis in each magnetic pole becomes smooth. Therefore, the rapid voltage change resulting from the switching imbalance is suppressed, and as a result, the configuration can contribute to the electrolytic corrosion suppression.

In the second countermeasure against electrolytic corrosion, in the rotary electric machine 10, the bearings 21 and 22 are arranged to be biased to one side in the axial direction with respect to the axial center of the rotor 40 (see FIG. 2). Thereby, the influence of the electrolytic corrosion can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the plurality of bearings are provided on both sides of the rotor in the axial direction. That is, in the configuration in which the rotor is supported on both sides by a plurality of bearings, a closed circuit passing through the rotor, the stator, and each bearing (that is, each bearing on both sides in the axial direction across the rotor) There is concern about the electrolytic corrosion of the bearing due to the axial current. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the rotor 40 is supported in a cantilever manner by the plurality of bearings 21 and 22, the above-mentioned closed circuit is not formed, and the electrolytic corrosion of the bearings is suppressed.

In addition, the rotary electric machine 10 has the following configuration in connection with a configuration for one-side arrangement of the bearings 21 and 22. In the magnet holder 41, a contact avoiding portion that extends in the axial direction to avoid contact with the stator 50 is provided in the radially extending intermediate portion 45 of the rotor 40 (see FIG. 2). In this case, when the closed circuit of the axial current is formed via the magnet holder 41, it is possible to increase the closed circuit length and increase the circuit resistance. Thereby, suppression of the electrolytic corrosion of the bearings 21 and 22 can be aimed at.

The holding member 23 of the bearing unit 20 is fixed to the housing 30 on one side of the rotor 40 in the axial direction, and the housing 30 and the unit base 61 (stator holder) are connected to each other on the other side. (See Figure 2). According to this configuration, it is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which the bearings 21 and 22 are disposed on one side in the axial direction in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 11 in a biased manner. Further, in the present configuration, the unit base 61 is connected to the rotating shaft 11 through the housing 30, so that the unit base 61 can be disposed at a position electrically separated from the rotating shaft 11. When an insulating member such as a resin is interposed between the unit base 61 and the housing 30, the unit base 61 and the rotating shaft 11 are electrically separated further. Thereby, the electrolytic corrosion of the bearings 21 and 22 can be suppressed appropriately.

In the rotating electrical machine 10 of the present embodiment, the axial voltage acting on the bearings 21 and 22 is reduced by the arrangement of the bearings 21 and 22 on one side or the like. Also, the potential difference between the rotor 40 and the stator 50 is reduced. Therefore, even if the conductive grease is not used in the bearings 21 and 22, the potential difference acting on the bearings 21 and 22 can be reduced. The conductive grease generally contains fine particles such as carbon, and therefore it is considered that noise is generated. In this respect, in the present embodiment, non-conductive grease is used in the bearings 21 and 22. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of noise in the bearings 21 and 22. For example, when applied to an electric vehicle such as an electric car, it is considered that measures against the sounding of the rotary electric machine 10 are required, but it is possible to preferably implement the measures against the sounding.

In the third countermeasure against electrolytic corrosion, the stator winding 51 and the stator core 52 are molded with a molding material to suppress positional deviation of the stator winding 51 in the stator 50 (see FIG. 11). ). In particular, in the rotating electrical machine 10 of the present embodiment, since there is no inter-lead member (teeth) between the conductor wire groups 81 in the circumferential direction of the stator winding 51, there is a concern that positional deviation in the stator winding 51 may occur. Although conceivable, by molding the stator winding 51 together with the stator core 52, the displacement of the conductor position of the stator winding 51 is suppressed. Therefore, distortion of magnetic flux due to positional deviation of the stator winding 51 and generation of electrolytic corrosion of the bearings 21 and 22 resulting therefrom can be suppressed.

In addition, since the unit base 61 as a housing member for fixing the stator core 52 is made of carbon fiber reinforced plastic (CFRP), discharge to the unit base 61 is suppressed as compared with, for example, aluminum. As a result, suitable electrolytic corrosion measures are possible.

In addition, as measures against electrolytic corrosion of the bearings 21 and 22, it is also possible to use a configuration in which at least one of the outer ring 25 and the inner ring 26 is made of a ceramic material or an insulating sleeve is provided outside the outer ring 25.

Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the pole anisotropic structure of the magnet unit 42 in the rotor 40 is changed, and will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the magnet unit 42 is configured using a magnet arrangement called a Halbach arrangement. That is, the magnet unit 42 has a first magnet 131 whose radial direction is the magnetization direction (direction of magnetization vector) and a second magnet 132 whose circumferential direction is the magnetization direction (direction of the magnetization vector), The first magnets 131 are disposed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction, and the second magnets 132 are disposed at positions between the adjacent first magnets 131 in the circumferential direction. The first magnet 131 and the second magnet 132 are permanent magnets made of, for example, a rare earth magnet such as a neodymium magnet.

The first magnets 131 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction such that poles on the side (radially inner side) facing the stator 50 are alternately N poles and S poles. Further, the second magnets 132 are arranged adjacent to the first magnets 131 so that the polarities alternate in the circumferential direction. The cylindrical portion 43 provided to surround the magnets 131 and 132 may be a soft magnetic core made of a soft magnetic material and functions as a back core. The relationship of the magnetization easy axis with respect to the d axis and the q axis in the dq coordinate system of the magnet unit 42 of the second embodiment is also the same as that of the first embodiment.

Further, a magnetic body 133 made of a soft magnetic material is disposed radially outside the first magnet 131, that is, on the side of the cylindrical portion 43 of the magnet holder 41. For example, the magnetic body 133 may be made of a magnetic steel sheet, a soft iron, or a dust core material. In this case, the circumferential length of the magnetic body 133 is the same as the circumferential length of the first magnet 131 (in particular, the circumferential length of the outer peripheral portion of the first magnet 131). Moreover, the thickness in the radial direction of the one-piece in the state in which the first magnet 131 and the magnetic body 133 are integrated is the same as the thickness in the radial direction of the second magnet 132. In other words, the thickness of the first magnet 131 in the radial direction is thinner than that of the second magnet 132 by the amount of the magnetic substance 133. The magnets 131 and 132 and the magnetic body 133 are fixed to each other by, for example, an adhesive. In the magnet unit 42, the radially outer side of the first magnet 131 is the opposite side to the stator 50, and the magnetic body 133 is the opposite side to the stator 50 of both sides of the first magnet 131 in the radial direction Provided on the stator side).

On the outer peripheral portion of the magnetic body 133, a key 134 is formed as a convex portion protruding radially outward, that is, the cylindrical portion 43 side of the magnet holder 41. Further, on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43, a key groove 135 is formed as a recess for accommodating the key 134 of the magnetic body 133. The protruding shape of the keys 134 and the groove shape of the key grooves 135 are the same, and the key grooves 135 equal in number to the keys 134 are formed corresponding to the keys 134 formed on each magnetic body 133. By the engagement of the key 134 and the key groove 135, positional deviation between the first magnet 131 and the second magnet 132 and the magnet holder 41 in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) is suppressed. The key 134 and the key groove 135 (protrusions and depressions) may be provided on either of the cylindrical portion 43 and the magnetic body 133 of the magnet holder 41, and contrary to the above, on the outer peripheral portion of the magnetic body 133 It is also possible to provide the key groove 135 and to provide the key 134 on the inner peripheral portion of the cylindrical portion 43 of the magnet holder 41.

Here, in the magnet unit 42, it is possible to increase the magnetic flux density in the first magnet 131 by arranging the first magnet 131 and the second magnet 132 alternately. Therefore, in the magnet unit 42, magnetic flux can be concentrated on one side, and the magnetic flux can be strengthened on the side closer to the stator 50.

In addition, by disposing the magnetic body 133 on the radially outer side of the first magnet 131, that is, on the side opposite to the stator, it is possible to suppress partial magnetic saturation on the radially outer side of the first magnet 131 and, consequently, due to the magnetic saturation. It is possible to suppress the demagnetization of the first magnet 131 that is generated. As a result, the magnetic force of the magnet unit 42 can be increased. The magnet unit 42 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which a portion where demagnetization easily occurs in the first magnet 131 is replaced with the magnetic body 133.

24 (a) and 24 (b) are diagrams specifically showing the flow of magnetic flux in the magnet unit 42, and FIG. 24 (a) is a conventional configuration in which the magnetic unit 133 is not included in the magnet unit 42. FIG. 24B shows the case where the configuration of the present embodiment in which the magnetic unit 133 is provided in the magnet unit 42 is used. In FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b), the cylindrical portion 43 of the magnet holder 41 and the magnet unit 42 are expanded linearly and shown, and the lower side of the drawing is the stator side and the upper side is the opposite stator. It is on the side.

In the configuration of FIG. 24A, the magnetic flux acting surface of the first magnet 131 and the side surface of the second magnet 132 are in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43, respectively. Further, the magnetic flux acting surface of the second magnet 132 is in contact with the side surface of the first magnet 131. In this case, a magnetic flux F1 entering the contact surface with the first magnet 131 through the outer path of the second magnet 132 and a magnetic flux F2 of the second magnet 132 substantially parallel to the cylindrical portion 43 A combined magnetic flux with the attracting magnetic flux is generated. Therefore, there is a concern that magnetic saturation partially occurs in the vicinity of the contact surface between the first magnet 131 and the second magnet 132 in the cylindrical portion 43.

On the other hand, in the configuration shown in FIG. 24B, the magnetic substance 133 is located between the magnetic flux acting surface of the first magnet 131 and the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 43 on the opposite side of the first magnet 131 to the stator 50. Since it is provided, the magnetic body 133 allows the passage of magnetic flux. Therefore, magnetic saturation in the cylindrical portion 43 can be suppressed, and resistance to demagnetization is improved.

Moreover, in the configuration of FIG. 24B, unlike in FIG. 24A, F2 that promotes magnetic saturation can be eliminated. Thus, the permeance of the entire magnetic circuit can be effectively improved. By this configuration, the magnetic circuit characteristics can be maintained even under severe high heat conditions.

Further, compared to the radial magnet in the conventional SPM rotor, the magnet magnetic path passing through the inside of the magnet is longer. Therefore, the magnet permeance is increased, the magnetic force can be increased, and the torque can be increased. Furthermore, the magnetic flux can be concentrated at the center of the d-axis to increase the sine wave matching rate. In particular, the torque can be more effectively enhanced by using a switching IC with a current waveform as a sine wave or a trapezoidal wave or by using a 120-degree conduction switching IC by PWM control.

In the case where the stator core 52 is formed of an electromagnetic steel sheet, the radial thickness of the stator core 52 is preferably larger than 1/2 or 1/2 of the radial thickness of the magnet unit 42. For example, the radial thickness of the stator core 52 may be 1/2 or more of the radial thickness of the first magnet 131 provided at the magnetic pole center of the magnet unit 42. Further, the radial thickness of the stator core 52 may be smaller than the radial thickness of the magnet unit 42. In this case, since the magnet magnetic flux is approximately 1 [T] and the saturation magnetic flux density of the stator core 52 is 2 [T], the radial thickness of the stator core 52 is equal to the radial thickness of the magnet unit 42. The magnetic flux leakage to the inner peripheral side of the stator core 52 can be prevented by setting it to 1/2 or more.

In the Halbach structure or pole-anisotropic magnet, the magnetic path has a pseudo arc shape, so that the magnetic flux can be increased in proportion to the thickness of the magnet that handles the magnetic flux in the circumferential direction. In such a configuration, it is considered that the magnetic flux flowing to the stator core 52 does not exceed the circumferential magnetic flux. That is, when an iron-based metal having a saturation magnetic flux density of 2 [T] with respect to the magnetic flux of 1 [T] of the magnet is used, magnetic saturation does not occur preferably if the thickness of the stator core 52 is half or more A small and lightweight rotary electric machine can be provided. Here, since the demagnetizing field from the stator 50 acts on the magnet flux, the magnet flux is generally 0.9 T or less. Therefore, if the stator core has half the thickness of the magnet, its magnetic permeability can be suitably kept high.

Third Embodiment
In the third embodiment, the configurations of the magnet unit 42 and the cylindrical portion 43 of the first embodiment are changed. Hereinafter, the configuration of the magnet unit 42 and the cylindrical portion 43 will be mainly described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 25, the magnet unit 42 in the third embodiment is composed of a plurality of magnets 91 and 92 arranged in the circumferential direction. In the third embodiment, the magnets 91 and 92 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. That is, a gap 1001 axially penetrating along the axial direction is formed between the magnets 91 and 92 adjacent in the circumferential direction.

Further, the gap 1001 between the magnets is provided so that the q axis is at the center. That is, the magnets 91 and 92 are formed in an arc shape in the circumferential direction around the d axis, and the width dimension in the circumferential direction of each of the magnets 91 and 92 is such that the q axis side end portion is adjacent It is designed to be separated from the magnets 91, 92.

In the third embodiment, the cylindrical portion 43 is made of a soft magnetic material and functions as a back yoke. That is, the cylindrical portion 43 corresponds to a field element core (rotor core, rotor core) provided on the side opposite to the stator (on the side opposite to the armature) than the magnet unit 42.

The cylindrical portion 43 has a convex portion 1002 projecting toward the stator in the radial direction from the gap 1001 between the magnets. The convex portion 1002 is provided on the q axis side of the d axis in the circumferential direction. The convex portion 1002 in the third embodiment is provided so as to be symmetrical in the circumferential direction about the q axis. Further, in the convex portion 1002, end surfaces 1002a and 1002b on both sides in the circumferential direction are provided to abut on the circumferential end surface 91a of the first magnet 91 and the circumferential end surface 92a of the second magnet 92, respectively. That is, in the circumferential direction, the convex portion 1002 is formed so that the width dimension L10 of the convex portion 1002 is the same as the width dimension of the gap 1001 between the magnets. In other words, the width dimension L11 in the circumferential direction of each of the magnets 91 and 92 is set in accordance with the gap dimension between the convex portions adjacent in the circumferential direction. In the third embodiment, in the radial direction, the dimension (thickness dimension) of the convex portion 1002 is the same as the thickness dimension of the magnets 91 and 92.

The circumferential end faces 91a and 92a of the magnets 91 and 92 and the circumferential end faces 1002a and 1002b of the convex portion 1002 are formed in a planar shape along the radial direction. Therefore, when the circumferential end surfaces 1002a and 1002b of the convex portion 1002 abut on the circumferential end surfaces 91a and 92a of the magnets 91 and 92, the convex portion 1002 and the magnets 91 and 92 closely contact without any gap. It will be.

In addition, the magnet magnetic paths (or easy axes of magnetization) of the magnets 91 and 92 are provided so as to have an angle (angle within the range of 0 to 45 degrees) close to parallel to the circumferential direction at the circumferential end There is. The circumferential end faces 91a and 92a of the magnets 91 and 92 are magnetic flux acting surfaces, and are formed to intersect the magnet magnetic path (or the axis of easy magnetization). Therefore, the magnetic flux from the magnets 91 and 92 flows in and out so that the magnetic fluxes from the magnets 91 and 92 intersect the circumferential end surfaces 1002a and 1002b of the convex portion 1002 that abuts on the circumferential end surfaces 91a and 92a of the magnets 91 and 92.

In the third embodiment, the circumferential end face 91a is such that the circumferential end faces 91a and 92a of the magnets 91 and 92 are orthogonal (or an angle close to orthogonal) to the magnet magnetic path (or the axis of easy magnetization). , 92a may be inclined surfaces that are inclined with respect to the radial direction. Alternatively, the easy magnetization axis is oriented so that the magnet magnetic path (or easy magnetization axis) of the magnets 91 and 92 is orthogonal (or an angle close to perpendicular) to the circumferential end faces 91a and 92a, A path may be formed. When the orthogonal angle is 90 degrees, an angle close to the orthogonal is, for example, an angle within a range of 60 to 120 degrees.

According to the third embodiment, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Each of the magnets 91 and 92 is oriented such that the direction of the magnetization easy axis is closer to parallel to the d-axis on the d-axis side than in the q-axis side. That is, on the q-axis side of the magnets 91 and 92, magnet magnetic paths are formed so as to be closer to the circumferential direction as compared to the d-axis side. In the third embodiment, the circumferential end faces 1002 a and 1002 b on both sides in the circumferential direction of the convex portion 1002 abut on the circumferential end faces 91 a and 92 a of the magnets 91 and 92, respectively. As a result, the magnet magnetic paths of the magnets 91 and 92 adjacent in the circumferential direction are easily connected via the convex portion 1002, and the magnet magnetic path is likely to be artificially made longer. Therefore, demagnetization becomes difficult, and the length of the magnet path increases, so that the magnetic flux density in the d axis can be improved. In addition, since the magnetic flux easily passes through the convex portion 1002, it is possible to make the cylindrical portion 43 functioning as a field element core thin.

Further, as described above, in the first magnet 91, the stator side outer surface 91c, which is the armature side peripheral surface, and the circumferential end surface 91a are the magnetic flux acting surfaces that are the inflow and outflow surfaces of the magnetic flux. An arc-shaped magnet magnetic path is formed to connect the magnetic flux acting surfaces. Similarly, in the second magnet 92, the stator side outer surface 92c and the circumferential end surface 92a are magnetic flux acting surfaces which are inflow and outflow surfaces of magnetic flux, and arc-shaped magnets are connected to connect these magnetic flux acting surfaces. A magnetic path is formed. Therefore, by bringing the circumferential end faces 1002a and 1002b of the convex portion 1002 into contact with the circumferential end faces 91a and 92a of the magnets 91 and 92, the magnet magnetic path can be easily lengthened through the convex portion 1002.

The circumferential end faces 91a and 92a of the magnets 91 and 92 are provided so as to intersect the magnet magnetic path, and the circumferential end faces 1002a and 1002b of the convex portion 1002 are the circumferential end faces of the magnets 91 and 92 which abut. It is provided according to the angle of 91a, 92a. In the present embodiment, circumferential end faces 91 a and 92 a of the magnets 91 and 92 and circumferential end faces 1002 a and 1002 b of the convex portion 1002 are provided along the radial direction. The magnetic flux passes through the convex portion 1002 so as to be the shortest distance as long as the convex portion 1002 which is a soft magnetic material is not magnetically saturated. Therefore, by providing the circumferential end faces 91a and 92a of the magnets 91 and 92 and the circumferential end faces 1002a and 1002b of the convex portion 1002 so as to intersect the magnet magnetic path, adjacent magnets via the convex portion 1002 can be obtained. The magnetic flux path of the

Further, by passing the magnetic flux to the convex portion 1002, the magnetic saturation can be achieved to increase the inductance. Therefore, by adjusting the width dimension of the convex portion 1002 in the circumferential direction, it is possible to prevent (or reduce) the reverse saliency.

The convex portion 1002 engages with each of the magnets 91 and 92 in the circumferential direction. Therefore, when the rotor 40 rotates, it can be suitably functioned as a detent for the magnets 91 and 92.

Below, the modification which changed a part of structure mentioned above is demonstrated.

(Modification 1)
In the above embodiment, the outer peripheral surface of the stator core 52 has a curved surface without unevenness, and the plurality of wire groups 81 are arranged side by side at predetermined intervals on the outer peripheral surface. For example, as shown in FIG. 26, the stator core 52 is an annular yoke 141 provided on the opposite side (lower side in the figure) of the stator winding 51 in the radial direction to the rotor 40; A protrusion 142 extends from the yoke 141 so as to project between the linear portions 83 adjacent in the circumferential direction. The protrusions 142 are provided on the radially outer side of the yoke 141, that is, on the side of the rotor 40 at predetermined intervals. The conductor groups 81 of the stator winding 51 are engaged with the projections 142 in the circumferential direction, and are arranged in the circumferential direction while using the projections 142 as positioning portions for the conductor groups 81. In addition, the projection part 142 corresponds to "a member between conducting wires".

The protrusion 142 has a thickness dimension in the radial direction from the yoke 141, in other words, as shown in FIG. 27, in the radial direction of the yoke 141, from the inner side surface 320 adjacent to the yoke 141 of the straight portion 83 The distance W to the apex is smaller than half (H1 in the figure) of the thickness dimension in the radial direction of the linear portion 83 adjacent to the yoke 141 in the radial direction among the plurality of linear portions 83 inside and outside the radial direction It is a structure. In other words, the dimension (thickness) T1 (the thickness) of the conductive wire group 81 (conductive member) in the radial direction of the stator winding 51 (the stator core 52), in other words, the stator core of the conductive wire group 81 The nonmagnetic member (sealing member 57) may occupy a range of three quarters of the surface 320 in contact with the surface 52 and the shortest distance between the surface 330 of the conductor group 81 facing the rotor 40). Due to such thickness limitation of the protrusion 142, the protrusion 142 does not function as teeth between the wire groups 81 (that is, the straight portions 83) adjacent in the circumferential direction, and magnetic paths are not formed by the teeth. . The protrusions 142 may not be all provided between the wire groups 81 aligned in the circumferential direction, and may be provided between at least one pair of wire groups 81 adjacent in the circumferential direction. For example, the protrusions 142 may be provided at equal intervals for each predetermined number between the wire groups 81 in the circumferential direction. The shape of the protrusion 142 may be any shape such as a rectangular shape or an arc shape.

Further, on the outer peripheral surface of the stator core 52, the linear portion 83 may be provided in a single layer. Therefore, in a broad sense, the thickness dimension in the radial direction from the yoke 141 in the protrusion 142 may be smaller than 1⁄2 of the thickness dimension in the radial direction of the straight portion 83.

Assuming that a virtual circle is centered on the axis of the rotary shaft 11 and passes through the radial center position of the straight portion 83 adjacent to the yoke 141 in the radial direction, the projection 142 is within the range of the virtual circle. It is preferable that the shape which protrudes from the yoke 141, in other words, the shape which does not protrude in the radial direction outer side (that is, the rotor 40 side) than the virtual circle.

According to the above configuration, the thickness of the protrusion 142 in the radial direction is limited, and the protrusion 142 does not function as teeth between the adjacent linear portions 83 in the circumferential direction. As compared with the case where is provided, adjacent linear parts 83 can be brought closer. Thereby, the cross-sectional area of the conductor 82a can be enlarged, and the heat generation which accompanies the energization of the stator winding 51 can be reduced. In such a configuration, the absence of the teeth makes it possible to eliminate the magnetic saturation, and it is possible to increase the current flow to the stator winding 51. In this case, an increase in the amount of heat generation can be suitably coped with as the current flows. Further, in the stator winding 51, since the turn portion 84 is shifted in the radial direction and has an interference avoiding portion for avoiding interference with other turn portions 84, the different turn portions 84 are separated in the radial direction. It can be arranged. Thereby, the heat dissipation can be improved also in the turn portion 84. As described above, the heat dissipation performance of the stator 50 can be optimized.

If the yoke 141 of the stator core 52 and the magnet units 42 of the rotor 40 (ie, the magnets 91 and 92) are separated by a predetermined distance or more, the thickness dimension of the projection 142 in the radial direction is as shown in FIG. Not tied to H1. Specifically, as long as the yoke 141 and the magnet unit 42 are separated by 2 mm or more, the thickness dimension of the protrusion 142 in the radial direction may be H1 or more in FIG. For example, when the radial thickness dimension of the linear portion 83 exceeds 2 mm, and the lead wire group 81 is constituted by the two layers of the lead 82 inside and outside the radial direction, the straight portion 83 not adjacent to the yoke 141, That is, the projecting portion 142 may be provided in a range from the yoke 141 to a half position of the second-layer conductive wire 82. In this case, if the radial thickness dimension of the projection 142 is “H1 × 3/2”, the effect can be obtained to some extent by enlarging the cross-sectional area of the conductor in the wire group 81.

The stator core 52 may be configured as shown in FIG. In addition, although the sealing member 57 is abbreviate | omitted in FIG. 27, the sealing member 57 may be provided. In FIG. 27, for convenience, the magnet unit 42 and the stator core 52 are shown linearly developed.

In the configuration of FIG. 27, the stator 50 has a projection 142 as an inter-conductor member between the circumferentially adjacent conductors 82 (i.e., the linear portions 83). The stator 50 magnetically functions with one of the magnetic poles (N or S pole) of the magnet unit 42 when the stator winding 51 is energized, and a circumferentially extending portion 350 of the stator 50 is formed. Have. Assuming that the length in the circumferential direction of the stator 50 of this portion 350 is Wn, the total width of the protrusions 142 present in the length range Wn (ie, the total dimension in the circumferential direction of the stator 50) Assuming that Wt is the saturation magnetic flux density of the projection 142, Bs is the width dimension of the magnet unit 42 in the circumferential direction, and Br is the residual magnetic flux density of the magnet unit 42, the projection 142 is
Wt × Bs ≦ Wm × Br (1)
It is comprised by the magnetic material which becomes.

The range Wn is set so as to include a plurality of conductor groups 81 adjacent in the circumferential direction, the plurality of conductor groups 81 having overlapping excitation timings. At that time, it is preferable to set the center of the gap 56 of the wire group 81 as a reference (boundary) when setting the range Wn. For example, in the case of the configuration illustrated in FIG. 27, up to the fourth conductor group 81 corresponds to the plurality of conductor groups 81 in order from the shortest in distance from the magnetic pole center of the N pole in the circumferential direction. Then, the range Wn is set to include the four lead wire groups 81. At this time, the end (start and end points) of the range Wn is the center of the gap 56.

In FIG. 27, since the protrusions 142 are respectively included in half at both ends of the range Wn, a total of four protrusions 142 are included in the range Wn. Therefore, assuming that the width of the protrusion 142 (that is, the dimension of the protrusion 142 in the circumferential direction of the stator 50, in other words, the distance between adjacent wire groups 81) is A, the total of the protrusions 142 included in the range Wn The width is Wt = 1 / 2A + A + A + A + 1 / 2A = 4A.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the three-phase winding of the stator winding 51 is a distributed winding, and in the stator winding 51, the number of the projecting portions 142 with respect to one pole of the magnet unit 42, ie, each The number of gaps 56 between the wire groups 81 is “number of phases × Q”. Here, Q is the number of the one-phase conducting wire 82 in contact with the stator core 52. In addition, when the conducting wire 82 is the conducting wire group 81 laminated | stacked on the radial direction of the rotor 40, it can be said that it is the number of the conducting wire 82 of the inner peripheral side of the conducting wire group 81 of 1 phase. In this case, when the three-phase winding of the stator winding 51 is energized in each phase in a predetermined order, the projections 142 for two phases are excited in one pole. Therefore, the total width dimension Wt in the circumferential direction of the protrusions 142 excited by the energization of the stator winding 51 in the range of one pole of the magnet unit 42 is the width in the circumferential direction of the protrusions 142 (that is, the gap 56). Assuming that the dimension is A, “the number of phases to be excited × Q × A = 2 × 2 × A”.

Then, after the total width dimension Wt is thus defined, in the stator core 52, the protrusion 142 is configured as a magnetic material that satisfies the relationship of the above (1). The total width dimension Wt is also a circumferential dimension of a portion where the relative permeability can be larger than 1 in one pole. Also, in consideration of the margin, the total width dimension Wt may be the width dimension in the circumferential direction of the protrusion 142 in one magnetic pole. Specifically, since the number of protrusions 142 with respect to one pole of the magnet unit 42 is “number of phases × Q”, the circumferential width dimension (total width dimension Wt) of the protrusions 142 in one magnetic pole is The number of phases x Q x A = 3 x 2 x A = 6 A "may be used.

The term "distributed winding" as used herein means one pole pair period (N pole and S pole) of the magnetic pole, and one pole pair of the stator winding 51. A single pole pair of the stator winding 51 mentioned here is composed of two straight portions 83 and a turn portion 84 electrically connected by the current flow in opposite directions. As long as the above conditions are satisfied, even Short Pitch Winding is regarded as equivalent to the distributed pitch of Full Pitch Winding.

Next, an example in the case of concentrated winding is shown. The concentrated winding referred to here is one in which the width of one pole pair of the magnetic pole is different from the width of one pole pair of the stator winding 51. As an example of concentrated winding, three lead groups 81 for one pole pair, three lead groups 81 for two pole pairs, nine lead groups 81 for four pole pairs There is a case where the wire group 81 has a relationship such as nine for one magnetic pole pair.

Here, when the stator winding 51 is concentrated, when the three-phase windings of the stator winding 51 are energized in a predetermined order, the stator winding 51 for two phases is excited. As a result, the projections 142 for two phases are excited. Therefore, the circumferential width dimension Wt of the protrusion 142 excited by the energization of the stator winding 51 in the range of one pole of the magnet unit 42 is “A × 2”. Then, after the width dimension Wt is defined in this way, the protrusion 142 is configured as a magnetic material that satisfies the relationship of the above (1). In the case of the concentrated winding described above, the sum of the widths of the protrusions 142 in the circumferential direction of the stator 50 is A in a region surrounded by the wire groups 81 of the same phase. Further, Wm in the concentrated winding corresponds to “the entire circumference of the surface of the magnet unit 42 facing the air gap” × “the number of phases” / “the number of dispersions of the wire groups 81”.

Incidentally, Bd = 1.0 strong [T] for magnets with a BH product of 20 [MGOe (kJ / m ^ 3)] such as neodymium magnets, samarium cobalt magnets, and ferrite magnets, Br = 2.0 strong for iron ]. Therefore, as the high output motor, in the stator core 52, the protrusion 142 may be a magnetic material that satisfies the relationship of Wt <1/2 × Wm.

Further, as described later, when the lead 82 includes the outer coating 182, the lead 82 may be disposed in the circumferential direction of the stator core 52 such that the outer coating 182 of the leads 82 is in contact with each other. In this case, Wt can be regarded as zero or the thickness of the outer layer coating 182 of both the leads 82 in contact.

In the configuration of FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, the inter-conductor member (protrusion portion 142) which is undesirably small with respect to the magnet magnetic flux on the rotor 40 side is provided. The rotor 40 is a surface magnet type rotor having a low inductance and a flat surface, and has no saliency in terms of magnetic resistance. In such a configuration, the inductance of the stator 50 can be reduced, and the generation of magnetic flux distortion due to the shift in the switching timing of the stator winding 51 is suppressed, which in turn suppresses the electrolytic corrosion of the bearings 21 and 22. .

(Modification 2)
It is also possible to adopt the following configuration as the stator 50 using the inter-conductor member satisfying the relationship of the above-mentioned formula (1). In FIG. 28, on the outer peripheral surface side (upper surface side in the drawing) of the stator core 52, a toothed portion 143 is provided as an inter-conductor member. The toothed portions 143 are provided at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction so as to protrude from the yoke 141, and have the same thickness dimension as the wire group 81 in the radial direction. The side surfaces of the teeth 143 are in contact with the leads 82 of the lead group 81. However, there may be a gap between the teeth 143 and the wires 82.

The toothed portion 143 is limited in width in the circumferential direction, and is provided with pole teeth (stator teeth) which are undesirably thin with respect to the amount of magnet. With such a configuration, the toothed portion 143 is surely saturated by the magnetic flux of the magnet at 1.8 T or more, and the inductance can be reduced by the reduction of the permeance.

Here, in the magnet unit 42, assuming that the surface area per pole of the magnetic flux acting surface on the stator side is Sm and the residual flux density of the magnet unit 42 is Br, the magnetic flux on the magnet unit side is, for example, “Sm × Br”. Become. Further, the surface area on the rotor side in each toothed portion 143 is St, the number per phase of the conducting wire 82 is m, and by energizing the stator winding 51, the toothed portions 143 for two phases in one pole are excited If so, the magnetic flux on the stator side is, for example, “St × m × 2 × Bs”. in this case,
St × m × 2 × Bs <Sm × Br (2)
The inductance is reduced by limiting the dimension of the toothed portion 143 so that the following relationship is established.

When the dimensions in the axial direction of the magnet unit 42 and that of the toothed portion 143 are the same, the circumferential width of one pole of the magnet unit 42 is Wm, and the width of the toothed portion 143 in the circumferential direction is Wst. Then, the equation (2) is replaced by the equation (3).
Wst × m × 2 × Bs <Wm × Br (3)
More specifically, assuming that, for example, Bs = 2T and Br = 1T, and m = 2, the above equation (3) has a relationship of “Wst <Wm / 8”. In this case, by setting the width dimension Wst of the toothed portion 143 smaller than 1/8 of the width dimension Wm of one pole of the magnet unit 42, the inductance is reduced. If the number m is 1, then the width dimension Wst of the toothed portion 143 may be smaller than 1⁄4 of the width dimension Wm of one pole of the magnet unit 42.

In the above equation (3), “Wst × m × 2” is the width dimension in the circumferential direction of the toothed portion 143 excited by energization of the stator winding 51 in the range of one pole of the magnet unit 42. Equivalent to.

In the configuration of FIG. 28, similarly to the configurations of FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 described above, the inter-conductor member (tooth portion 143) which is undesirably small with respect to the magnet magnetic flux on the rotor 40 side. In such a configuration, the inductance of the stator 50 can be reduced, and the generation of magnetic flux distortion due to the shift in the switching timing of the stator winding 51 is suppressed, which in turn suppresses the electrolytic corrosion of the bearings 21 and 22. .

(Modification 3)
In the above embodiment, the sealing member 57 covering the stator winding 51 is in a range including all the wire groups 81 at the radial outer side of the stator core 52, that is, the thickness dimension in the radial direction is the diameter of each wire group 81 Although provided in the range which becomes larger than the thickness dimension of the direction, this may be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 29, the sealing member 57 is provided so that a part of the conducting wire 82 protrudes. More specifically, the sealing member 57 is provided in a state in which a part of the conducting wire 82 which is the most radially outward in the conducting wire group 81 is exposed radially outward, that is, the stator 50 side. In this case, the radial thickness dimension of the sealing member 57 may be the same as or smaller than the radial thickness dimension of each wire group 81.

(Modification 4)
As shown in FIG. 30, in the stator 50, each wire group 81 may not be sealed by the sealing member 57. That is, the sealing member 57 covering the stator winding 51 is not used. In this case, no inter-conductor member is provided between the wire groups 81 aligned in the circumferential direction, and there is a gap. In short, the inter-conductor member is not provided between the conductor groups 81 aligned in the circumferential direction. Note that air may be regarded as a nonmagnetic substance or a nonmagnetic substance equivalent as Bs = 0, and the air may be disposed in this air gap.

(Modification 5)
When the inter-lead member in the stator 50 is made of a nonmagnetic material, it is possible to use a material other than resin as the nonmagnetic material. For example, a metallic nonmagnetic material may be used such as using SUS304 which is an austenitic stainless steel.

(Modification 6)
The stator 50 may not have the stator core 52. In this case, the stator 50 is configured by the stator winding 51 shown in FIG. In the stator 50 not having the stator core 52, the stator winding 51 may be sealed with a sealing material. Alternatively, instead of the stator core 52 made of a soft magnetic material, the stator 50 may be configured to include an annular winding holding portion made of a nonmagnetic material such as a synthetic resin.

(Modification 7)
In the first embodiment, although the plurality of magnets 91 and 92 arranged in the circumferential direction are used as the magnet unit 42 of the rotor 40, this is changed to an annular permanent magnet as the magnet unit 42. It is good also as composition using a magnet. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31, an annular magnet 95 is fixed on the inner side in the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 43 of the magnet holder 41. The annular magnet 95 is provided with a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction, and a magnet is integrally formed on both the d axis and the q axis. In the annular magnet 95, an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path is formed such that the direction of orientation in the d axis of each magnetic pole is radial and the direction of orientation in the q axis between the magnetic poles is circumferential.

In the ring magnet 95, the easy magnetization axis is parallel to the d axis or near parallel to the d axis in the part near the d axis, and in the part near the q axis, the easy magnetization axis is orthogonal to the q axis or q It suffices that the orientation is performed so as to form an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path having a direction close to orthogonal.

(Modification 8)
In this modification, a part of the control method of the control device 110 is changed. In this modification, differences from the configuration described in the first embodiment will be mainly described.

First, processing in the operation signal generation units 116 and 126 shown in FIG. 20 and the operation signal generation units 130a and 130b shown in FIG. 21 will be described using FIG. The processes in the operation signal generation units 116, 126, 130a, and 130b are basically the same. Therefore, in the following, the process of the operation signal generation unit 116 will be described as an example.

The operation signal generation unit 116 includes a carrier generation unit 116 a and U, V, W phase comparators 116 b U, 116 b V, and 116 b W. In the present embodiment, the carrier generation unit 116 a generates and outputs a triangular wave signal as the carrier signal SigC.

Carrier signal SigC generated by carrier generation unit 116a and U, V, W-phase command voltage calculated by three-phase conversion unit 115 are input to U, V, W-phase comparators 116bU, 116bV, 116bW. Ru. The U, V, and W phase command voltages are, for example, sinusoidal waveforms, and their phases are shifted by 120 ° in electrical angle.

U, V, W phase comparators 116bU, 116bV, 116bW are controlled by the PWM (pulse width modulation) control based on the magnitude comparison between the U, V, W phase command voltages and the carrier signal SigC. An operation signal of each switch Sp, Sn of the upper arm and the lower arm of the H, V, W phases is generated. Specifically, the operation signal generation unit 116 performs U, V, and W phases by PWM control based on magnitude comparison between a signal obtained by standardizing the U, V, and W phase command voltages with the power supply voltage, and a carrier signal. An operation signal of the switches Sp and Sn is generated. The driver 117 turns on / off the switches Sp and Sn of the U, V, and W phases in the first inverter 101 based on the operation signal generated by the operation signal generation unit 116.

The control device 110 performs processing of changing the carrier frequency fc of the carrier signal SigC, that is, the switching frequency of each switch Sp and Sn. The carrier frequency fc is set high in the low torque region or high rotation region of the rotary electric machine 10 and is set low in the high torque region of the rotary electric machine 10. This setting is made to suppress a decrease in controllability of the current flowing in each phase winding.

That is, as the stator 50 is made coreless, the inductance in the stator 50 can be reduced. Here, when the inductance decreases, the electrical time constant of the rotary electric machine 10 decreases. As a result, the ripples of the current flowing in each phase winding increase, the controllability of the current flowing in the winding decreases, and there is a concern that current control may diverge. The influence of the decrease in controllability may be significant when the current (e.g., the effective value of the current) flowing through the winding is included in the low current region as compared to when included in the high current region. In order to cope with this problem, in the present modification, control device 110 changes carrier frequency fc.

The process of changing the carrier frequency fc will be described with reference to FIG. This process is repeatedly performed by the control device 110, for example, in a predetermined control cycle, as the process of the operation signal generation unit 116.

In step S10, it is determined whether the current flowing through the winding 51a of each phase is included in the low current region. This process is a process for determining that the current torque of the rotary electric machine 10 is in the low torque region. As a method of determining whether or not included in the low current region, for example, the following first and second methods may be mentioned.

<First method>
Based on the d-axis current and the q-axis current converted by the dq conversion unit 112, a torque estimated value of the rotary electric machine 10 is calculated. Then, if it is determined that the calculated torque estimated value is less than the torque threshold, it is determined that the current flowing through the winding 51a is included in the low current region, and it is determined that the torque estimated value is equal to or greater than the torque threshold. , And determined to be included in the high current region. Here, the torque threshold may be set to, for example, one half of the starting torque (also referred to as restraining torque) of the rotary electric machine 10.

<Second method>
If it is determined that the rotation angle of the rotor 40 detected by the angle detector is equal to or greater than the speed threshold, it is determined that the current flowing through the winding 51a is included in the low current region, that is, the high rotation region. Here, the speed threshold may be set to, for example, a rotational speed when the maximum torque of the rotary electric machine 10 is the torque threshold.

When negative determination is carried out in step S10, it determines with it being a high electric current area | region, and progresses to step S11. In step S11, the carrier frequency fc is set to the first frequency fL.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S10, the process proceeds to step S12, and the carrier frequency fc is set to a second frequency fH higher than the first frequency fL.

According to this modification described above, the carrier frequency fc is set higher in the case where the current flowing in each phase winding is included in the low current region than in the case where the current is included in the high current region. Therefore, in the low current region, the switching frequency of the switches Sp and Sn can be increased, and an increase in current ripple can be suppressed. Thereby, the decrease in current controllability can be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the current flowing in each phase winding is included in the high current region, the carrier frequency fc is set lower than that in the low current region. In the high current region, since the amplitude of the current flowing through the winding is larger than that in the low current region, the increase in current ripple due to the decrease in inductance has little influence on the current controllability. Therefore, in the high current region, the carrier frequency fc can be set lower than in the low current region, and the switching loss of each of the inverters 101 and 102 can be reduced.

In this modification, implementation of the form shown below is possible.

In the case where the carrier frequency fc is set to the first frequency fL, the carrier frequency fc is gradually changed from the first frequency fL to the second frequency fH when an affirmative determination is made in step S10 of FIG. It is also good.

When the carrier frequency fc is set to the second frequency fH, the carrier frequency fc may be gradually changed from the second frequency fH to the first frequency fL when the negative determination is made in step S10. .

-Instead of PWM control, operation signal of the switch may be generated by space vector modulation (SVM) control. Even in this case, the change of the switching frequency described above can be applied.

(Modification 9)
In each of the above-described embodiments, two pairs of conductors in each phase constituting the conductor group 81 are connected in parallel as shown in FIG. FIG. 34 (a) is a diagram showing an electrical connection of first and second conductors 88a and 88b which are two pairs of conductors. Here, instead of the configuration shown in FIG. 34 (a), as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the first and second conducting wires 88a and 88b may be connected in series.

Also, three or more pairs of multi-layered conducting wires may be stacked in the radial direction. FIG. 35 shows a configuration in which four pairs of first to fourth conducting wires 88a to 88d are stacked. The first to fourth conducting wires 88a to 88d are arranged in the radial direction of the first, second, third, and fourth conducting wires 88a, 88b, 88c, 88d in this order from the side closer to the stator core 52. .

Here, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), the third and fourth conducting wires 88c and 88d are connected in parallel, and the first conducting wire 88a is connected to one end of the parallel connection body, and the second conducting wire is connected to the other end. 88b may be connected. The parallel connection can reduce the current density of the parallel connected leads, and can suppress the heat generation at the time of energization. Therefore, in the configuration in which the cylindrical stator winding is assembled to the housing (unit base 61) in which the cooling water passage 74 is formed, the first and second conducting wires 88a and 88b not connected in parallel abut on the unit base 61 The third and fourth conducting wires 88c and 88d disposed on the stator core 52 side and connected in parallel are disposed on the side opposite to the stator core. This makes it possible to equalize the cooling performance of each of the conductors 88a to 88d in the multilayer conductor structure.

The thickness dimension in the radial direction of the conductor group 81 including the first to fourth conductors 88a to 88d may be smaller than the width dimension in the circumferential direction of one phase in one magnetic pole.

(Modification 10)
The rotary electric machine 10 may have an inner rotor structure (inner structure). In this case, for example, in the housing 30, the stator 50 may be provided radially outside, and the rotor 40 may be provided radially inside. In addition, it is preferable that the inverter unit 60 be provided on one side or both sides of both axial ends of the stator 50 and the rotor 40. FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view of the rotor 40 and the stator 50, and FIG. 37 is an enlarged view of a part of the rotor 40 and the stator 50 shown in FIG.

36 and 37 premised on the inner rotor structure is that the rotor 40 and the stator 50 are reversed in the radial direction inside and out with respect to the configurations shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 based on the outer rotor structure. Except for the same configuration. Briefly described, the stator 50 has a stator winding 51 of flat wire structure and a stator core 52 without teeth. The stator winding 51 is assembled on the radially inner side of the stator core 52. The stator core 52 has one of the following configurations, as in the case of the outer rotor structure.
(A) In the stator 50, an inter-conductor member is provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction, and as the inter-conductor member, the circumferential width dimension of the conductor member in one magnetic pole is Wt, saturation of the conductor members Assuming that the magnetic flux density is Bs, the circumferential width dimension of the magnet unit in one magnetic pole is Wm, and the residual magnetic flux density of the magnet unit is Br, a magnetic material having a relationship of Wt × Bs ≦ Wm × Br is used.
(B) In the stator 50, an inter-conductor member is provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction, and a nonmagnetic material is used as the inter-conductor member.
(C) In the stator 50, no inter-conductor member is provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction.

The same applies to the magnets 91 and 92 of the magnet unit 42. That is, in the magnet unit 42, the magnets 91 and 92 are oriented such that the direction of the magnetization easy axis is parallel to the d axis on the d axis side, which is the magnetic pole center, as compared to the q axis side that is the magnetic pole boundary. It is configured using The details of the magnetization direction and the like in each of the magnets 91 and 92 are as described above. It is also possible to use an annular magnet 95 (see FIG. 31) in the magnet unit 42.

FIG. 38 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the rotary electric machine 10 in the case of the inner rotor type, which corresponds to FIG. 2 described above. The differences from the configuration of FIG. 2 will be briefly described. In FIG. 38, an annular stator 50 is fixed to the inside of the housing 30, and the rotor 40 is rotatably provided on the inside of the stator 50 with a predetermined air gap therebetween. Similarly to FIG. 2, each of the bearings 21 and 22 is disposed on one side in the axial direction with respect to the axial center of the rotor 40, whereby the rotor 40 is supported in a cantilever manner. There is. Further, an inverter unit 60 is provided inside the magnet holder 41 of the rotor 40.

FIG. 39 shows another configuration as the rotary electric machine 10 of the inner rotor structure. In FIG. 39, the rotary shaft 11 is rotatably supported by the bearings 21 and 22 in the housing 30, and the rotor 40 is fixed to the rotary shaft 11. As in the configuration shown in FIG. 2 and the like, the bearings 21 and 22 are disposed offset to one side in the axial direction with respect to the axial center of the rotor 40. The rotor 40 has a magnet holder 41 and a magnet unit 42.

In the rotating electrical machine 10 of FIG. 39, as a difference from the rotating electrical machine 10 of FIG. 38, the inverter unit 60 is not provided inside the rotor 40 in the radial direction. The magnet holder 41 is connected to the rotating shaft 11 at a position that is radially inward of the magnet unit 42. The stator 50 also has a stator winding 51 and a stator core 52 and is attached to the housing 30.

(Modification 11)
Another configuration will be described below as a rotating electric machine having an inner rotor structure. FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of rotary electric machine 200, and FIG. 41 is a side sectional view of rotary electric machine 200. Here, it is assumed that the vertical direction is shown based on the states of FIGS. 40 and 41.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the rotary electric machine 200 is rotatably disposed inside the stator core 201 and a stator 203 having an annular stator core 201 and a multiphase stator winding 202. And a rotor 204. The stator 203 corresponds to an armature, and the rotor 204 corresponds to a field element. The stator core 201 is configured by laminating a large number of silicon steel plates, and the stator winding 202 is attached to the stator core 201. Although illustration is omitted, the rotor 204 has a rotor core and a plurality of permanent magnets as a magnet unit. The rotor core is provided with a plurality of magnet insertion holes at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. In each of the magnet insertion holes, permanent magnets magnetized so as to alternately change the magnetization direction for each adjacent magnetic pole are attached. The permanent magnets of the magnet unit may have a Halbach arrangement as described in FIG. 23 or a similar configuration. Alternatively, the permanent magnet of the magnet unit is a pole whose orientation direction (magnetization direction) extends in a circular arc between the d axis which is the pole center and the q axis which is the pole boundary as described in FIG. 9 and FIG. It is preferable to have anisotropic characteristics.

Here, the stator 203 may have any one of the following configurations.
(A) In the stator 203, an inter-conductor member is provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction, and as the inter-conductor member, the circumferential width dimension of the conductor member in one magnetic pole is Wt, saturation of the conductor members Assuming that the magnetic flux density is Bs, the circumferential width dimension of the magnet unit in one magnetic pole is Wm, and the residual magnetic flux density of the magnet unit is Br, a magnetic material having a relationship of Wt × Bs ≦ Wm × Br is used.
(B) In the stator 203, an inter-conductor member is provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction, and a nonmagnetic material is used as the inter-conductor member.
(C) In the stator 203, an inter-conductor member is not provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction.

Further, in the rotor 204, the magnet unit is oriented such that the direction of the magnetization easy axis is parallel to the d axis on the d axis side, which is the pole center, as compared to the q axis side, which is the pole boundary. It is configured using a plurality of magnets.

An annular inverter case 211 is provided on one end side in the axial direction of the rotary electric machine 200. The inverter case 211 is arranged such that the lower surface of the case is in contact with the upper surface of the stator core 201. In the inverter case 211, a plurality of power modules 212 constituting an inverter circuit, a smoothing capacitor 213 for suppressing ripples of voltage and current generated by switching operation of the semiconductor switching element, and a control board 214 having a control unit , A current sensor 215 for detecting a phase current, and a resolver stator 216 which is a rotational speed sensor of the rotor 204. The power module 212 has an IGBT or a diode which is a semiconductor switching element.

At the periphery of the inverter case 211, a power connector 217 connected to a DC circuit of a battery mounted on a vehicle, and a signal connector 218 used for delivery of various signals between the rotating electric machine 200 side and the vehicle side control device Is provided. The inverter case 211 is covered by a top cover 219. The direct current power from the on-vehicle battery is inputted through the power connector 217, converted into alternating current by switching of the power module 212, and sent to the stator winding 202 of each phase.

A bearing unit 221 rotatably holding the rotation shaft of the rotor 204 and an annular rear case 222 accommodating the bearing unit 221 are provided on the opposite side of the axial direction of the stator core 201 on the opposite side of the inverter case 211. It is provided. The bearing unit 221 has, for example, a pair of bearings, and is disposed so as to be biased to one side in the axial direction with respect to the axial center of the rotor 204. However, a plurality of bearings in the bearing unit 221 may be dispersedly provided on both sides in the axial direction of the stator core 201, and the rotary shaft may be supported on both sides by the respective bearings. The rotating electrical machine 200 is mounted on the vehicle side by fixing the rear case 222 to a mounting portion such as a gear case or a transmission of the vehicle.

In the inverter case 211, a cooling channel 211a for flowing the refrigerant is formed. The cooling flow passage 211 a is formed by closing the space recessed in an annular shape from the lower surface of the inverter case 211 with the upper surface of the stator core 201. The cooling channel 211 a is formed to surround the coil end of the stator winding 202. A module case 212a of the power module 212 is inserted into the cooling flow passage 211a. A cooling channel 222 a is formed in the rear case 222 so as to surround the coil end of the stator winding 202. The cooling flow path 222 a is formed by closing a space, which is recessed annularly from the upper surface of the rear case 222, with the lower surface of the stator core 201.

(Modification 12)
So far, the configuration embodied in the rotating field type rotating electrical machine has been described, but it is also possible to change this and to embody the rotating armature type rotating electrical machine. FIG. 42 shows the configuration of a rotary armature type rotary electric machine 230. As shown in FIG.

In the rotary electric machine 230 of FIG. 42, bearings 232 are fixed to the housings 231a and 231b, respectively, and the rotary shaft 233 is rotatably supported by the bearings 232. The bearing 232 is, for example, an oil-impregnated bearing formed by including oil in a porous metal. A rotor 234 as an armature is fixed to the rotating shaft 233. The rotor 234 has a rotor core 235 and a polyphase rotor winding 236 fixed to the outer periphery thereof. In the rotor 234, the rotor core 235 has a slotless structure, and the rotor winding 236 has a flat wire structure. That is, the rotor winding 236 has a flat structure in which the region for each phase is longer in the circumferential direction than in the radial direction.

In addition, a stator 237 as a field element is provided radially outside the rotor 234. The stator 237 has a stator core 238 fixed to the housing 231 a and a magnet unit 239 fixed to the inner peripheral side of the stator core 238. The magnet unit 239 is configured to include a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction, and the pole boundary q on the d axis side, which is the center of the magnetic pole, as in the magnet unit 42 described above. It is configured to be oriented such that the direction of the magnetization easy axis is parallel to the d axis as compared to the side of the axis. The magnet unit 239 has a sintered neodymium magnet oriented, and has an intrinsic coercive force of 400 kA / m or more and a residual magnetic flux density of 1.0 T or more.

The rotating electrical machine 230 of this example is a coreless motor with a brush of 2 poles and 3 coils, the rotor winding 236 is divided into three, and the magnet unit 239 is 2 poles. The number of poles and the number of coils of the brushed motor vary depending on the application, such as 2: 3, 4:10, 4:21.

A commutator 241 is fixed to the rotation shaft 233, and a plurality of brushes 242 are disposed radially outside thereof. The commutator 241 is electrically connected to the rotor winding 236 via the lead wire 243 embedded in the rotating shaft 233. The inflow and outflow of DC current to and from the rotor winding 236 are performed through the commutator 241, the brush 242, and the lead wire 243. The commutator 241 is appropriately divided in the circumferential direction according to the number of phases of the rotor winding 236. The brush 242 may be connected as it is to a DC power supply such as a storage battery via an electrical wiring, or may be connected to a DC power supply via a terminal block or the like.

The rotating shaft 233 is provided with a resin washer 244 as a sealing material between the bearing 232 and the commutator 241. The resin washer 244 prevents the oil that has leaked out from the bearing 232, which is an oil-impregnated bearing, from flowing out to the commutator 241 side.

(Modification 13)
In the stator winding 51 of the rotary electric machine 10, each lead 82 may be configured to have a plurality of insulating coatings on the inside and the outside. For example, a plurality of conductive wires (wires) with an insulating coating may be bundled into one and covered with an outer layer coating to constitute the conductive wire 82. In this case, the insulation coating of the strands constitutes the inner insulation coating, and the outer coating constitutes the outer insulation coating. Furthermore, in particular, it is preferable that the insulation ability of the outer insulation film among the plurality of insulation films in the conducting wire 82 be higher than that of the inner insulation film. Specifically, the thickness of the outer insulating film is made thicker than the thickness of the inner insulating film. For example, the thickness of the outer insulating film is 100 μm, and the thickness of the inner insulating film is 40 μm. Alternatively, a material having a dielectric constant lower than that of the inner insulating film may be used as the outer insulating film. At least one of these may be applied. In addition, it is good for a wire to be comprised as an aggregate | assembly of several electroconductive materials.

As described above, by strengthening the insulation of the outermost layer of the conducting wire 82, it is suitable for use in a high voltage vehicle system. Further, even in a high altitude where the air pressure is low, etc., it is possible to properly drive the rotary electric machine 10.

(Modification 14)
In the conducting wire 82 having a plurality of insulating coatings on the inside and outside, at least one of the coefficient of linear expansion (coefficient of linear expansion) and the bonding strength may be different between the outer insulating coating and the inner insulating coating. The structure of the conducting wire 82 in this modification is shown in FIG.

In FIG. 43, the conducting wire 82 includes a plurality of (four in the drawing) strands 181, an outer layer coating 182 (outer insulating coating) made of resin, for example, surrounding the plurality of strands 181, and each element in the outer layer coating 182 And an intermediate layer 183 (intermediate insulating film) filled around the line 181. The strands of wire 181 have a conductive portion 181a made of a copper material and a conductive film 181b (inner insulating film) made of an insulating material. When viewed as a stator winding, the outer layer coating 182 insulates the phases. In addition, it is good for the strand 181 to be comprised as an aggregate | assembly of several electroconductive materials.

The intermediate layer 183 has a coefficient of linear expansion higher than that of the conductor film 181 b of the wire 181 and has a coefficient of linear expansion lower than that of the outer film 182. That is, in the conducting wire 82, the linear expansion coefficient is higher toward the outside. Generally, the outer layer film 182 has a linear expansion coefficient higher than that of the conductor film 181b, but the intermediate layer 183 functions as a cushioning material by providing an intermediate layer 183 having an intermediate linear expansion coefficient therebetween. It is possible to prevent simultaneous cracking on the outer layer side and the inner layer side.

In the conducting wire 82, the conductive portion 181a and the conductor coating 181b are adhered to each other in the strand 181, and the conductor coating 181b and the intermediate layer 183, and the intermediate layer 183 and the outer layer coating 182 are adhered to each other. Then, the bonding strength is weaker toward the outside of the conducting wire 82. That is, the adhesive strength of the conductive portion 181 a and the conductive film 181 b is weaker than the adhesive strength of the conductive film 181 b and the intermediate layer 183 and the adhesive strength of the intermediate layer 183 and the outer film 182. Further, comparing the adhesive strength of the conductor film 181 b and the intermediate layer 183 with the adhesive strength of the intermediate layer 183 and the outer layer film 182, it is preferable that the latter (outer side) is weaker or equal. In addition, the magnitude | size of the adhesive strength of each film can be grasped | ascertained by the tensile strength etc. which are required, for example, when peeling off the film of 2 layers. By setting the adhesive strength of the conducting wire 82 as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of cracking (co-cracking) on both the inner layer side and the outer layer side even if a temperature difference between the inside and the outside occurs due to heat generation or cooling. .

Here, the heat generation and temperature change of the rotary electric machine occur mainly as a copper loss generated from the conductive portion 181a of the wire 181 and an iron loss generated from the inside of the iron core. In the intermediate layer 183, there is no heat generation source. In this case, the simultaneous cracking can be prevented by the adhesive force that the intermediate layer 183 can serve as a cushion for both. Therefore, suitable use is possible also when used in fields with high withstand voltage or large temperature change, such as vehicle applications.

The following supplements. The wire 181 may be, for example, an enameled wire, and in such a case, has a resin film layer (conductor film 181b) such as PA, PI, PAI or the like. Further, it is desirable that the outer layer film 182 outside the strands of wire 181 be made of the same PA, PI, PAI or the like and be thick. Thereby, the destruction of the film due to the difference in linear expansion coefficient can be suppressed. The outer layer film 182 has a dielectric constant such as PPS, PEEK, fluorine, polycarbonate, silicon, epoxy, polyethylene naphthalate, LCP, etc., apart from those corresponding to the above-mentioned materials such as PA, PI, PAI, etc. by thickening. Using smaller ones than PI and PAI is also desirable to increase the conductor density of the rotating electrical machine. With these resins, even if they are thinner than the PI, PAI coatings equivalent to the conductor coating 181b, or have a thickness equivalent to that of the conductor coating 181b, their insulating ability can be increased, and thereby the occupancy of the conductive portion It is possible to raise In general, the above-mentioned resin has a better insulation than the insulation coating of enameled wire. Naturally, there are also cases where the dielectric constant is deteriorated by the molding condition or the mixture. Among them, PPS and PEEK are suitable as the outer layer coating of the second layer because their linear expansion coefficient is generally larger than that of the enamel coating but smaller than that of other resins.

In addition, the adhesion strength between the two types of coatings (intermediate insulating coating and outer insulating coating) on the outside of the wire 181 and the enamel coating of the wire 181 is the adhesion strength between the copper wire and the enamel coating on the wire 181 It is desirable to be weaker than This suppresses the phenomenon that the enamel coating and the two types of coatings are destroyed at one time.

In the case where a water-cooled structure, a liquid-cooled structure, and an air-cooled structure are added to the stator, basically, it is considered that thermal stress or impact stress is applied first from the outer layer film 182. However, even in the case where the insulating layer of the strand 181 and the two types of films are different from each other, the thermal stress and the impact stress can be reduced by providing a portion where the films are not adhered. That is, the insulation structure described above is achieved by providing a wire (enamel wire) and an air gap and arranging fluorine, polycarbonate, silicon, epoxy, polyethylene naphthalate, and LCP. In this case, it is desirable to bond the outer layer coating and the inner layer coating using an adhesive having a low dielectric constant and a low linear expansion coefficient, such as epoxy. In this way, it is possible to suppress not only the mechanical strength but also the breakage of the coating due to friction due to the vibration of the conductive part or the like, or the breakage of the outer layer coating due to the difference in linear expansion coefficient.

The outermost layer fixing, which is generally the final step around the stator winding, responsible for mechanical strength, fixing, etc., to the lead wire 82 of the above configuration, and the formability of epoxy, PPS, PEEK, LCP, etc. It is preferable to use a resin having properties close to that of the enamel coating, such as dielectric constant and linear expansion coefficient.

In general, resin potting by urethane or silicon is usually performed, but in the resin, the linear expansion coefficient is nearly doubled compared with other resins, and a thermal stress which can shear the resin is generated. Therefore, it is unsuitable for the use of 60V or more where strict insulation regulations are used internationally. In this respect, according to the final insulation process which is easily produced by injection molding or the like by epoxy, PPS, PEEK, LCP or the like, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned respective requirements.

(Modification 15)
In the third embodiment, the shape of the magnets 91 and 92 and the shape of the convex portion 1002 may be changed. For example, the circumferential end faces 91a and 92a of the magnets 91 and 92 may be inclined with respect to the radial direction. More preferably, the circumferential end faces 91a and 92a are diameter-divided so that the circumferential end faces 91a and 92a of the magnets 91 and 92 are orthogonal to (or an angle close to perpendicular to) the magnet magnetic path (or easy axis of magnetization). It may be inclined with respect to the direction. A specific description will be given based on FIG.

In FIG. 44, at the circumferential end of the magnets 91 and 92, the magnet magnetic path (or the axis of easy magnetization) is at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the radial direction. Therefore, circumferential end faces 91a and 92a of the magnets 91 and 92 are provided so as to be inclined at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the radial direction. The circumferential end surfaces 1002a and 1002b of the convex portion 1002 are provided to be inclined with respect to the radial direction at an angle corresponding to the inclination angle of the circumferential end surfaces 91a and 92a (45 degrees in FIG. 44). There is.

(Modification 16)
In the third embodiment, the shape of the magnets 91 and 92 and the shape of the convex portion 1002 may be changed. For example, on the stator-side outer surface of the magnets 91 and 92, a radially recessed portion may be provided. More preferably, a recess may be provided on the stator side outer surface on the q axis side more than the d axis side. This will be specifically described based on FIG.

As shown in FIG. 45, the stator side outer surfaces 91c and 92c at the q-axis end of the magnets 91 and 92 are provided with recesses 1003 that are recessed in the radial direction. The magnet magnetic paths of the magnets 91 and 92 tend to be shorter at the q-axis end than at the stator side than at the non-stator side. For this reason, in the magnets 91 and 92 oriented as described above, the part on the stator side at the q-axis side end is a part that is easily demagnetized. Therefore, by providing the recessed portion 1003 on the stator side outer surface at the q-axis end of the magnets 91 and 92, the portion susceptible to demagnetization is reduced, and demagnetization becomes difficult. Also, the amount of magnet can be reduced. Further, by providing the concave portion 1003, the air gap from the magnets 91 and 92 to the stator 50 in the radial direction becomes larger on the q axis side than on the d axis side. Therefore, the surface magnet density distribution of the magnets 91 and 92 can be made close to a sine wave shape.

Furthermore, in FIG. 45, a concave portion 1003 is formed by providing an inclined surface which is inclined at a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees) with respect to the radial direction so as to scrape the corners of the magnets 91 and 92 on the stator side. There is. By doing this, the air gap from the magnets 91 and 92 in the radial direction to the stator 50 gradually increases as it approaches the q axis. Thereby, the surface magnet density distribution of the magnets 91 and 92 can be closer to a sine wave shape.

Moreover, when providing the recessed part 1003, it is desirable to provide the recessed part 1003 which has the slope (or curved surface) along a magnet magnetic path (or easy axis of magnetization). The slope (or curved surface) along the magnet magnetic path (or easy axis of magnetization) is a plane parallel or nearly parallel to the magnet magnetic path (or easy axis of magnetization).

When the concave portion 1003 is provided, as shown in FIG. 45, it is desirable that the radial dimension of the convex portion 1002 be the same as the radial dimension of the circumferential end faces 91a and 92a of the magnets 91 and 92.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 46A, the recess 1003 may be formed by providing a step on the stator side at the q-axis side end of the magnets 91 and 92. Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the recess 1003 may be formed not by a flat surface but by a curved surface. When making it a curved surface, it is desirable to make it a curved surface along a magnet magnetic path.

Further, the modification 15 and the modification 16 may be combined. For example, as shown in FIG. 47, while the circumferential end faces 91a and 92a are inclined with respect to the radial direction, a recess 1003 may be provided at the circumferential end on the stator side outer surface.

(Modification 17)
In the third embodiment, the magnet unit 42 may be provided with an auxiliary magnet between the adjacent magnets 91 and 92 in the circumferential direction and further on the stator side in the radial direction than the convex portion 1002. The auxiliary magnet has an easy magnetization axis parallel to the circumferential direction compared to the easy magnetization axis on the d-axis side of the magnets 91 and 92, and a magnet magnetic path is provided along the easy magnetization axis. It is a magnet. This will be specifically described based on FIG.

As shown in FIG. 48, the convex portion 1002 is formed such that its radial dimension is shorter than that of the magnets 91 and 92. Further, an auxiliary magnet 1004 is provided between the adjacent magnets 91 and 92 in the circumferential direction and further on the stator side than the convex portion 1002 in the radial direction. The auxiliary magnet 1004 is a magnet in which the easy magnetization axis parallel to the circumferential direction is linearly oriented in the q-axis, and a linear magnet magnetic path is provided along the easy magnetization axis. The circumferential width dimension of the auxiliary magnet 1004 is the same as the dimension of the gap 1001 between the magnets, and the circumferential end of the auxiliary magnet 1004 abuts on the circumferential end of the magnets 91 and 92. Further, in the radial direction, the dimension obtained by adding the auxiliary magnet 1004 and the convex portion 1002 is the same as the dimension of the magnets 91 and 92. For this reason, the auxiliary magnet 1004 does not protrude further to the stator side than the magnets 91 and 92. Further, the auxiliary magnet 1004 is provided over the entire area of the magnets 91 and 92 in the axial direction.

The magnetic flux density in the d-axis of the magnets 91 and 92 can be improved by the magnetic flux of the auxiliary magnet 1004. In addition, since the magnet magnetic path of the auxiliary magnet 1004 is a linear magnet magnetic path parallel to the circumferential direction along the q-axis, it is difficult to demagnetize even under the influence of the magnetic field from the stator 50. Therefore, even if the auxiliary magnet 1004 is disposed closer to the stator than the convex portion 1002 in the q axis, demagnetization is difficult and the magnetic flux density in the d axis can be strengthened. In addition, the auxiliary magnet 1004 protrudes to the stator side more than the magnets 91 and 92 in order to arrange the auxiliary magnet 1004 using the space 1001 closer to the magnet than the convex portion 1002 and utilizing the space on the stator side. Can be suppressed.

The modification 17 may be combined with the modification 15 or the modification 16. For example, as shown in FIG. 49, the auxiliary magnet 1004 may be provided on the outer circumferential surface of the stator side surface with the recess 1003 provided while the circumferential end faces 91a and 92a are inclined with respect to the radial direction. Good. When the recess 1003 is provided, as shown in FIG. 49, it is desirable to design the shape of the circumferential end of the auxiliary magnet 1004 in accordance with the shape of the recess 1003. That is, it is desirable that the auxiliary magnet 1004 be shaped to fill the gap between the magnets.

(Modification 18)
The magnet unit 42 and the cylindrical portion 43 described in any one of the third embodiment and the modifications 15 to 17 may be adopted for the rotary electric machine having the inner rotor structure described in the modification 11 or the modification 12.

For example, as shown to Fig.50 (a), you may employ | adopt the magnet unit 42 and cylindrical part 43 which were shown by 3rd Embodiment to the rotary electric machine of an inner-rotor structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the magnet unit 42 and the cylindrical portion 43 shown in the modification 18 may be adopted in a rotary electric machine having an inner rotor structure.

Modifications other than the above are listed below.

The distance DM in the radial direction between the surface on the armature side in the radial direction of the magnet unit 42 and the axial center of the rotor may be 50 mm or more. Specifically, for example, in the radial direction between the radially inner surface of the magnet unit 42 (specifically, the first and second magnets 91 and 92) shown in FIG. 4 and the axial center of the rotor 40, for example The distance DM may be 50 mm or more.

As a rotary electric machine of a slotless structure, the small-scale thing whose output is used for models for dozens of watts to hundreds of watts is known. And, the person who discloses the present invention does not grasp the case where the slotless structure is generally adopted for an industrial large-sized electric rotating machine which exceeds 10 kW. The applicant of the present application examined the reason.

In recent years, the mainstream electric rotating machines are roughly classified into the following four types. The rotary electric machines are a brushed motor, a cage type induction motor, a permanent magnet synchronous motor and a reluctance motor.

An excitation current is supplied to the brushed motor via the brush. Therefore, in the case of a large-sized brushed motor, the size of the brush may be increased, and maintenance may be complicated. As a result, with the remarkable development of semiconductor technology, there is a history of being replaced by a brushless motor such as an induction motor. On the other hand, in the small motor world, coreless motors are also supplied to many people because of the advantages of low inertia and economy.

In the cage type induction motor, the magnetic field generated by the stator winding on the primary side is received by the iron core of the rotor on the secondary side, and the induction current is flowed intensively to the cage conductor to form a reaction magnetic field. The principle is to generate torque. For this reason, it is not always a good idea to eliminate the iron core on both the stator side and the rotor side from the viewpoint of the small size and high efficiency of the device.

The reluctance motor is a motor that takes advantage of the reluctance change of the iron core, and in principle it is not desirable to eliminate the iron core.

In permanent magnet type synchronous motors, IPMs (that is, embedded magnet type rotors) have been mainstream in recent years, and particularly in large machines, they are often IPMs unless there is special circumstances.

The IPM has a characteristic having both a magnet torque and a reluctance torque, and is operated while the ratio of the torque is adjusted appropriately by the inverter control. For this reason, the IPM is a small motor with excellent controllability.

According to the analysis of the present applicant, the torque of the rotor surface which generates the magnet torque and the reluctance torque is the radial distance DM between the surface on the armature side in the radial direction of the magnet unit and the shaft center of the rotor, When the radius of the stator core of a general inner rotor is drawn on the horizontal axis, it becomes as shown in FIG.

The magnet torque is determined by the magnetic field strength generated by the permanent magnet as shown in the following equation (eq1), while the reluctance torque is an inductance, in particular q, as shown in the following equation (eq2). The magnitude of the axial inductance determines its potential.

Magnet torque = k · Ψ · Iq ·············· (eq 1)
Reluctance torque = k · (Lq−Ld) · Iq · Id ······ (eq 2)
Here, DM was used to compare the magnetic field strength of the permanent magnet and the magnitude of the inductance of the winding. The magnetic field strength emitted by the permanent magnet, that is, the amount of magnetic flux Ψ, is proportional to the total area of the permanent magnet on the surface facing the stator. If it is a cylindrical rotor, it will become the surface area of a cylinder. Strictly speaking, since the north pole and the south pole are present, they are proportional to the occupied area of half of the cylindrical surface. The surface area of the cylinder is proportional to the radius of the cylinder and the length of the cylinder. That is, if the cylinder length is constant, it is proportional to the radius of the cylinder.

On the other hand, although the inductance Lq of the winding is dependent on the core shape, the sensitivity is low, and rather, it is proportional to the square of the number of turns of the stator winding, so the number of turns is highly dependent. When μ is the magnetic permeability of the magnetic circuit, N is the number of turns, S is the cross-sectional area of the magnetic circuit, and δ is the effective length of the magnetic circuit, the inductance L = μ · N ^ 2 × S / δ. Since the number of turns of the winding depends on the size of the winding space, in the case of a cylindrical motor, it depends on the winding space of the stator, that is, the slot area. As shown in FIG. 52, the slot area is proportional to the product a × b of the length dimension a in the circumferential direction and the length dimension b in the radial direction because the shape of the slot is substantially square.

The circumferential length dimension of the slot is proportional to the diameter of the cylinder, as it increases as the diameter of the cylinder increases. The radial dimension of the slot is proportional to the diameter of the cylinder. That is, the slot area is proportional to the square of the diameter of the cylinder. Also, as can be seen from the above equation (eq2), since the reluctance torque is proportional to the square of the stator current, the performance of the rotating electrical machine is determined by how large a current can flow, the performance being the slot area of the stator Dependent. From the above, if the length of the cylinder is constant, the reluctance torque is proportional to the square of the diameter of the cylinder. Based on this, FIG. 51 is a diagram in which the relationship between the magnet torque and reluctance torque and DM is plotted.

As shown in FIG. 51, the magnet torque increases linearly with DM, and the reluctance torque increases quadratically with DM. It can be seen that the magnet torque is dominant when DM is relatively small, and the reluctance torque is dominant as the stator core radius increases. The applicant of the present application has concluded that the intersection point of the magnet torque and the reluctance torque in FIG. 51 is approximately in the vicinity of the stator core radius = 50 mm under predetermined conditions. In other words, with motors of 10 kW class where the stator core radius sufficiently exceeds 50 mm, it is difficult to eliminate the iron core because it is the current mainstream to utilize reluctance torque, which is a problem in the field of large machines It is presumed to be one of the reasons why the slotless structure is not adopted.

In the case of a rotating electrical machine in which an iron core is used for the stator, magnetic saturation of the iron core is always a problem. In particular, in the radial gap type rotating electrical machine, the longitudinal cross-sectional shape of the rotating shaft is fan-shaped per magnetic pole, and the width of the magnetic path narrows toward the device inner circumferential side, and the inner circumferential dimension of the teeth forming the slot is the performance of the rotating electrical machine Determine the limit. No matter how high performance permanent magnets are used, if magnetic saturation occurs in this part, the performance of the permanent magnets can not be fully utilized. In order not to generate magnetic saturation in this portion, the inner diameter is designed to be large, and as a result, the size of the device is increased.

For example, in a distributed winding rotating electric machine, in the case of a three-phase winding, three to six teeth per magnetic pole share magnetic flux, but magnetic flux tends to concentrate on teeth in the circumferential direction. The magnetic flux does not flow evenly to three to six teeth. In this case, while the magnetic flux flows intensively to some (for example, one or two) teeth, the teeth that are magnetically saturated along with the rotation of the rotor also move in the circumferential direction. This also causes slot ripple.

From the above, it is desirable to eliminate teeth in order to eliminate magnetic saturation in a slotless rotary electric machine in which DM is 50 mm or more. However, if the teeth are abolished, the reluctance of the magnetic circuit in the rotor and the stator increases, and the torque of the rotating electrical machine decreases. The reason for the increase in reluctance is, for example, an increase in the air gap between the rotor and the stator. For this reason, there is room for improvement in increasing torque in a slotless structure rotary electric machine in which the above-mentioned DM is 50 mm or more. Therefore, the advantage of applying the configuration that can increase the torque described above is great for a slotless structure rotating electrical machine in which the above-described DM is 50 mm or more.

In addition, not only the rotating electric machine having the outer rotor structure but also the rotating electric machine having the inner rotor structure, the distance DM in the radial direction between the surface on the armature side in the radial direction of the magnet unit and the shaft center of the rotor is 50 mm or more It may be

In the stator winding 51 of the rotary electric machine 10, the linear portion 83 of the conducting wire 82 may be provided in a single layer in the radial direction. Moreover, when arranging the linear part 83 in multiple layers inside and outside in the radial direction, the number of layers may be arbitrary, and three layers, four layers, five layers, six layers or the like may be provided.

For example, in the configuration of FIG. 2, the rotary shaft 11 is provided so as to protrude in both the one end side and the other end side of the rotary electric machine 10 in the axial direction. It is also good. In this case, the rotary shaft 11 may be provided so as to extend axially outward with a portion cantilevered by the bearing unit 20 as an end. In this configuration, since the rotary shaft 11 does not protrude inside the inverter unit 60, the internal space of the inverter unit 60, specifically, the internal space of the cylindrical portion 71 can be used more widely.

In the rotary electric machine 10 configured as described above, non-conductive grease is used in the bearings 21 and 22. However, this may be changed to use conductive grease in the bearings 21 and 22. For example, a conductive grease containing metal particles, carbon particles and the like is used.

-As the structure which supports the rotating shaft 11 rotatably, it is good also as a structure which provides a bearing in two places of the axial direction one end side of the rotor 40, and the other end side. In this case, in the configuration of FIG. 1, bearings may be provided at two positions on one end side and the other end side of the inverter unit 60.

In the rotary electric machine 10 configured as described above, in the rotor 40, the middle portion 45 of the magnet holder 41 has the inner shoulder 49a and the outer shoulder 49b of emotion, but these shoulders 49a and 49b are eliminated and the flat It is good also as composition which has an aspect.

In the rotating electrical machine 10 configured as described above, the conductor 82a is configured as an assembly of a plurality of strands 86 in the conducting wire 82 of the stator winding 51, but this is changed to use a rectangular conducting wire having a rectangular cross section as the conducting wire 82 It is good also as composition. Further, as the conducting wire 82, a round conducting wire having a circular cross section or an elliptical cross section may be used.

In the rotating electrical machine 10 configured as described above, the inverter unit 60 is provided inside the stator 50 in the radial direction, but instead of this, the inverter unit 60 may not be provided inside the stator 50 in the radial direction. . In this case, it is possible to use an inner area which is radially inward of the stator 50 as a space. Moreover, it is possible to arrange components different from the inverter unit 60 in the internal area.

In the rotary electric machine 10 configured as described above, the housing 30 may not be provided. In this case, for example, the rotor 40, the stator 50, and the like may be held at parts of the wheel and other vehicle components.

Fourth Embodiment
In the first embodiment, the length (height) of the magnets 91 and 92 in the axial direction is longer than the coil side portion 53 of the stator winding 51. As a result, at least a part of the magnetic flux emitted from the end portions on both axial sides is collected in the axially central portion to strengthen the magnetic flux of the magnet.

However, when the length of the magnets 91 and 92 is made longer than the coil side portion 53, the coil ends 54 and 55 directly apply the rotating magnetic field emitted by the magnets 91 and 92 although they do not contribute much to the rotating torque. It will be done. In this case, since the magnetic field viewed from the stator winding 51 is a wave-like alternating magnetic field, an eddy current flows in the conducting wire 82. As a result, eddy current loss may occur, which may increase the temperature of the stator 50 or increase the vibration of the stator 50. So, in this embodiment, in order to reduce the magnetic flux (leakage magnetic flux) applied to the coil ends 54 and 55, it is set as the following structures.

53 to 55 show longitudinal cross sections in the axial direction of the magnets 91 and 92 and the stator winding 51. FIG. As shown in FIG. 55, the cross sections of the magnets 91 and 92 in the axial direction of the rotating shaft 11 are formed to be convex toward the stator winding 51 side. In FIG. 55, the vertical direction is the axial direction. In the present embodiment, the longitudinal cross section of the magnets 91 and 92 in the axial direction has a trapezoidal shape in which the length in the axial direction becomes shorter from the rotor 40 side toward the stator 50 side. That is, the radial thickness (L1102) of the thin-walled portion 1102 at both axial ends of the magnet unit 42 (more specifically, the magnets 91 and 92) is the radial thickness of the axially central portion 1101. It is thinner than (L1101). The radial thickness (L 1102) of the thin-walled portion 1102 is thinner (shorter) in the outer side than in the axial direction.

The shape of the magnet unit 42 will be described in more detail. The outer peripheral surface (rotor side outer surface) and the inner peripheral surface (stator side outer surface) of the magnets 91 and 92 constituting the magnet unit 42 are provided in parallel in the axial direction. The axially central portion 1101 faces the coil side portion 53, and the radial thickness L1101 of the axially central portion 1101 is constant. Of the circumferential surfaces of the magnets 91 and 92, the outer surface on the rotor side corresponds to the circumferential surface on the field element side, and the outer surface on the stator side corresponds to the circumferential surface on the armature.

In the stator winding 51, the coil side portion 53 is a portion where the conducting wire 82 is linearly provided along the axial direction. The coil side portion 53 is also a portion provided in the range of the stator core 52 in the axial direction. Further, the coil side portion 53 is also a portion disposed to face the stator side outer surface of the magnet unit 42.

On the other hand, the thin portions 1102 at the end portions on both axial sides of the magnets 91 and 92 have inclined surfaces 1102 a that are inclined with respect to the direction orthogonal to the axial direction. The length (height) is short (low). That is, the cross section of the thin-walled portion 1102 is a substantially right triangle, and the axial length (height) of the thin-walled portion 1102 is shorter on the stator 50 side than on the rotor 40 side ( Low). That is, in the thin portion 1102, the length (thickness) in the radial direction becomes shorter as it approaches the outside in the axial direction. In addition, it is possible that molding pressure changes with the long and short parts of length by the taper at the time of compression molding. For this reason, the angle between the long and short portions at the axial end from the plane normal to the axis is at most within 15 degrees, considering that the magnet is usually made within the Br error range of about 3.5%. Must.

The thin-walled portion 1102 having such a cross-sectional shape is provided from end to end in the circumferential direction of each of the magnets 91 and 92. That is, when the magnet unit 42 is viewed from the axial direction, the thin portion 1102 is formed in an arc shape.

The thin portion 1102 is provided at a position overlapping the coil ends 54 and 55 in the axial direction. That is, in the axial direction, at least a part of the coil ends 54 and 55 is provided in a range overlapping with the thin portion 1102. In the present embodiment, a part of the coil end 54, 55 protrudes axially outward from the magnet unit 42.

The coil end 54, 55 is a portion that is skewed or pivoted in the axial direction in order to move the conducting wire 82 in the circumferential direction outside the coil side portion 53 in the axial direction, that is, to fold back the conducting wire 82. It is. In the present embodiment, the coil ends 54 and 55 are portions located axially outward of the stator core 52. In addition, the coil ends 54 and 55 are also portions disposed axially outside the stator-side outer surface of the magnet unit 42.

In the present embodiment, the axial length of the stator winding 51 is longer than that of the magnet unit 42, but may be shorter than that of the magnet unit 42. In this case, the length of the stator-side outer surface of the magnets 91 and 92 in the axial direction is made shorter than that of the stator winding 51, and the length of the rotor-side outer surface is made longer than that of the stator winding 51. Is desirable. And, in this case, it is preferable that the coil ends 54 and 55 be positioned in the range of the thin portion 1102 in the axial direction.

Next, the direction of the magnetization easy axis in the longitudinal cross section of the magnets 91 and 92 constituting the magnet unit 42 and the magnet magnetic path will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 56, the vertical direction is the axial direction.

In each of the magnets 91 and 92, a magnet magnetic path (magnetization direction) extends in an arc shape between the axially central portion 1101 and the axially thin portions 1102. In FIG. 56, the magnetization direction is indicated by an arrow. In each of the magnets 91 and 92, the magnetization direction is in a direction orthogonal to the axial direction (or a direction close to the orthogonal direction) in the portion 1101 on the central side in the axial direction. On the other hand, in the thin-walled portion 1102, the magnetization direction is made closer to parallel to the axial direction as compared with the magnetization direction in the portion 1101 on the central side in the axial direction.

In terms of orientation, in each of the magnets 91 and 92, the direction of the magnetization easy axis is different between the portion 1101 from the axial center and the thin portions 1102 on both sides in the axial direction. Each of the magnets 91 and 92 is configured using a magnet oriented so that the direction (direction) of the magnetization easy axis in the thin-walled portion 1102 is closer in parallel to the axial direction than the portion 1101 on the axial center side. ing.

More specifically, in the central portion 1101, the direction of the magnetization easy axis is close to the direction orthogonal to the axial direction, and in the thin portion 1102, the direction of the magnetization easy axis is close to the axial direction. An arc-shaped magnet magnetic path is formed in accordance with the direction of the magnetization easy axis. In each of the magnets 91 and 92, in the central portion 1101, the magnetization easy axis is parallel to the direction orthogonal to the axial direction. In the thin portion 1102, the magnetization easy axis may be parallel to the axial direction.

Further, in the magnets 91 and 92, the stator side outer surface which is on the side of the stator 50 (right side in FIG. 56) of the circumferential surfaces of the magnets 91 and 92, and the outer end face in the axial direction (that is, inclined surface 1102a) And the magnetic flux acting surface which is the inflow and outflow surface of the magnetic flux. An arc-shaped magnet magnetic path is formed so as to connect the magnetic flux acting surfaces (the stator side outer surface and the outer end surface).

In the magnet unit 42, the magnetic flux flows in an arc shape between the outer surface on the stator side and the outer end face in the axial direction, so the magnet magnetic path is longer than, for example, a radial anisotropic magnet. Therefore, the magnetic flux can be concentrated on the side of the portion 1101 on the center side in the axial direction of the magnets 91 and 92. At the same time, it is possible to suppress the magnetic flux (leakage magnetic flux) traveling from the thin portions 1102 on both axial sides toward the coil ends 54 and 55. That is, according to each magnet 91, 92 of the said structure, while increasing the torque of the rotary electric machine 10, the eddy current loss of the coil end 54, 55 can be suppressed.

The inclined surface 1102 a is a magnetic flux acting surface, and the magnetic flux orthogonal to the magnetic flux acting surface becomes a stronger magnetic flux, and the more inclined it from the magnetic flux acting surface, the smaller the magnetic flux tends to be. The coil ends 54 and 55 face each other at a position inclined with respect to the inclined surface 1102 a, so that the magnetic flux from the end 1102 to the coil ends 54 and 55 can be further suppressed.

In FIG. 56, the magnetization vector is indicated by an arrow in the case where the side of the stator 50 (right side in FIG. 56) is an N pole, but in the case of an S pole, the directions of the arrows are opposite.

By the way, if the rotating electrical machine is small, the magnet unit can be fixed only by the adhesive. However, in the case of a large-sized electric rotating machine, the magnet unit may fall off only with the adhesive due to vibration of design conditions, acceleration / deceleration impact and the like. Also, in order to properly arrange the thin portions 1102 on both axial sides of the magnet unit 42 so as to overlap the coil ends 54 and 55, it is necessary to appropriately restrict the axial movement of the magnet unit 42. . That is, even for a large rotor having a diameter of 100 mm or more, it is necessary to secure the robustness of the magnet unit.

Therefore, a pair of holding rings 1103 as holding members of the magnet unit 42 is provided. A plan view of the retaining ring 1103 is shown in FIG. The holding ring 1103 is formed in an annular shape, and the outer diameter of the holding ring 1103 substantially matches the inner diameter of the magnet holder 41. Then, as shown in FIGS. 53, 54, 55, etc., the holding ring 1103 is fixed to the inner periphery of the magnet holder 41. The fixing method may be any method such as fixing with an adhesive, fixing by screwing, or press-fitting.

Further, the pair of holding rings 1103 is provided on both ends of one end and the other end of the magnet unit 42 in the axial direction so as to sandwich the magnet unit 42 from both sides in the axial direction. The inner diameter of the holding ring 1103 is provided to substantially coincide with the inner diameter of the magnet unit 42 (the position of the outer surface on the stator side). For this reason, the magnet unit 42 is engaged in the axial direction by the holding ring 1103, and the movement in the axial direction is restricted.

Further, the retaining ring 1103 is provided with an engaging portion 1104 that protrudes in the axial direction, that is, on the side of the magnet unit 42. When the holding ring 1103 and the magnet unit 42 are fixed to the magnet holder 41, the axial distance between the pair of engaging portions 1104 (the gap between the ends of the engaging portions 1104) is at least the axial direction of the magnet unit 42. Length (the length on the side of the rotor 40). Therefore, the engaging portion 1104 engages with the axially outer thin portion 1102 of the magnet unit 42 in the radial direction, and restricts the movement of the magnets 91 and 92 toward the stator 50.

Then, in the present embodiment, the engaging portion 1104 is configured in a shape that matches the shape of the thin portion 1102. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55, in accordance with the shape of the inclined surface 1102a of the thin portion 1102, the engaging portion 1104 has an inclined surface 1104a which is inclined in the direction orthogonal to the axial direction. The inclination angle and the inclination direction of the inclined surface 1104a with respect to the direction orthogonal to the axial direction are the same as the inclined surface 1102a which the thin portion 1102 on the axially outer side has.

Accordingly, when the pair of holding rings 1103 is provided so as to sandwich the magnet unit 42 from both sides in the axial direction, the inclined surface 1102 a of the thin portion 1102 abuts on the inclined surface 1104 a of the engaging portion 1104. That is, the shape of the engaging portion 1104 is configured in accordance with the shape of the thin portion 1102 so that there is almost no gap between the thin portion 1102 and the engaging portion 1104. In this state, the engagement portion 1104 radially engages with the thin portion 1102, and restricts the movement of the magnets 91 and 92 toward the stator 50. In other words, it is possible to prevent the magnets 91 and 92 from coming off and coming off.

When viewed from the axial direction, the engaging portion 1104 is annularly provided over the entire circumference of the holding ring 1103. That is, the engaging portion 1104 of the retaining ring 1103 radially engages the magnets 91 and 92 over the entire circumference of the magnet unit 42, and the magnets 91 and 92 move toward the stator 50. Regulate.

The retaining ring 1103 is nonmagnetic but is desirably metal. In this case, eddy current loss may occur due to the magnetic flux passing through the holding ring 1103. Here, in the thin portion 1102, the magnet magnetic path is arc-shaped. By doing so, the magnetic flux generated from the axial end (thin portion 1102) is less likely to be linked to the retaining ring 1103 and can be effectively linked to the stator 50. Here, the flux linkage generated from the thin portion 1102 has an axial component and is not a direction orthogonal to the axial direction. However, the distance between the stator core 52 and the magnets 91 and 92 is more than three times that in the prior art, and a sufficient iron core is not disposed therebetween, and it is mostly occupied by the conductor 82. Thereby, the magnetic flux of the rotary electric machine of this embodiment generally referred to as slotless or coreless is axially oriented, but within a sufficient distance between the stator core 52 and the magnets 91 and 92. , Loses its axial flux component. As a result, the magnetic flux when linked to the stator core 52 minimizes the axial component. Thereby, although a large eddy current loss is generally caused to the magnetic flux in the axial direction, the loss is caused by the magnetic steel sheet (the stator core 52) which can effectively suppress the eddy current loss to the magnetic flux in the horizontal direction. Can provide a high efficiency motor with a larger torque than before.

According to the fourth embodiment, the following excellent effects are obtained.

As shown in FIG. 55, the cross section of the magnet unit 42 in the axial direction is convex toward the stator 50, and the thin portion 1102 at the end overlaps with the coil ends 54 and 55 of the stator winding 51. Provided at the With this configuration, in comparison with the distance from the coil side portion 53 to the axially central portion 1101 of the magnet unit 42 in the radial direction (direction orthogonal to the axial direction), from the coil end 54, 55 to the thin portion 1102 Distance (air gap) increases. Therefore, the magnetic flux density emitted from the thin portion 1102 to the coil ends 54 and 55 can be reduced, and the eddy current loss in the coil ends 54 and 55 can be suppressed.

Since the radial length of the thin portion 1102 can be shortened, even if the magnet magnetic path in the thin portion 1102 is formed along the direction orthogonal to the axial direction, the coil end from the thin portion 1102 The magnetic flux density emitted to 54, 55 can be reduced.

Further, by making the cross section of the magnet unit 42 convex toward the stator 50, at least a part of the magnetic flux generated from the thin portion 1102 gathers at the axially central portion 1101 of the magnet unit 42. For this reason, compared with the case where a magnet unit does not overlap with the coil end 54, 55, or it does not make it convex, the magnetic flux emitted from the part 1101 at the center side to the coil side part 53 can be strengthened and a torque improvement can be expected. .

Further, in the magnet unit 42, the magnetization direction in the thin-walled portion 1102 is closer to being parallel to the axial direction than the magnetization direction in the central portion in the axial direction. Therefore, the magnetic flux is collected from the thin portion 1102 to the central portion 1101. The magnet unit 42 uses an arc-shaped magnet magnet so that the outer surface on the stator side and the end face (inclined surface 1102a) in the axial direction are the inflow and outflow surfaces of magnetic flux, and the stator outer surface and the inclined surface 1102a are connected. A path is formed. For this reason, the magnet magnetic path from the thin portion 1102 to the central portion 1101 becomes long, and the magnetic flux density emitted from the central portion 1101 can be increased. Therefore, further improvement in torque can be expected. At the same time, the magnetic flux density generated in the direction orthogonal to the axial direction is weakened from the thin portion 1102 to the side of the coil end 54, 55, and reduction in eddy current loss in the coil end 54, 55 can be expected.

A pair of holding rings 1103 is provided at both axial ends of the magnet unit 42, and the holding rings 1103 have engaging portions that engage with the thin portions 1102 of the magnets 91 and 92 in the radial direction. For this reason, with respect to each of the magnets 91 and 92, it is possible to suppress radial and axial positional deviation and detachment by the holding ring 1103. Further, since the thin portion 1102 having a small thickness in the radial direction is engaged, the provision of the holding ring 1103 can suppress the rotor 40 from becoming thick in the radial direction. That is, the retaining ring 1103 can be prevented from being positioned closer to the stator 50 in the radial direction than the inner circumferential surface of the magnet unit 42. For this reason, the distance between the magnet unit 42 and the stator winding 51 can be made an appropriate distance.

The end surface in the axial direction in the magnet unit 42 is an inclined surface 1102 a that is inclined with respect to the direction orthogonal to the axial direction. Thus, when the magnet unit 42 is compressed and molded, it is easier to mold as compared to the case where the step shape is formed. This is particularly effective when employing a sintered magnet as in the present embodiment.

The magnet unit 42 is configured using magnets 91 and 92 having an intrinsic coercivity of 400 [kA / m] or more and a residual magnetic flux density of 1.0 [T] or more. However, even if such magnets 91 and 92 having strong magnetic fluxes are adopted, the coil ends 54 and 55 are overlapped on the thin portion 1102, thereby suitably reducing the eddy current loss in the coil ends 54 and 55, The torque can be improved.

The magnet unit 42 has the magnets 91 and 92 oriented such that the direction of the magnetization easy axis is parallel to the d axis on the d axis side, which is the pole center, as compared to the q axis side, which is the pole boundary. It is configured using. In the magnet 91, 92, the easy magnetization axis is parallel to the d axis or near parallel to the d axis at the d axis side, and the magnetization easy axis is orthogonal to the q axis or the q axis at the q axis part. The arc magnet magnetic path is formed in a direction close to orthogonal to the above. More specifically, in the magnets 91 and 92, among the circumferential surfaces of the magnets 91 and 92, the outer surface on the stator side and the end surface on the q axis side in the circumferential direction are the inflow and outflow surfaces of magnetic flux. A magnet magnetic path is formed so as to connect the end face on the q axis side.

For this reason, the magnet magnetic flux in d axis is strengthened, and a torque improvement can be expected. In addition, in each magnetic pole, the surface magnetic flux change (increase and decrease of magnetic flux) from the q axis to the d axis becomes gentle. Therefore, the rapid voltage change resulting from the switching imbalance is suppressed, and in turn, the eddy current loss and the vibration of the stator can be suppressed. In addition, since magnetic flux can be collected not only from the end portions on both sides in the axial direction (thin-walled portion 1102) but also from the q-axis side, the magnetic flux in the d-axis can be further strengthened.

The conducting wire 82 is formed of a plurality of strands 86, and is a strand assembly in which the plurality of strands are covered with an insulating member. Also, the plurality of strands 86 are twisted together. Therefore, the eddy current loss in the coil ends 54 and 55 can be further reduced.

(Another example in the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, if the longitudinal cross-sectional shape of the magnets 91 and 92 is convex toward the stator 50, the shape of the end in the axial direction (that is, the thin portion 1102) is arbitrarily changed. It is also good. For example, as shown in FIG. 58, it may be stepped such that the axial length (height) gradually decreases as the stator 50 is approached. Further, the end face (sloped surface 1102 a) on the axially outer side of the thin portion 1102 may be a curved surface.

In the fourth embodiment, the magnetization easy axis (magnetization direction) and the magnet magnetic path in the vertical cross section of the magnets 91 and 92 may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the magnetization easy axis and the magnet magnetic path in the longitudinal cross section of the magnets 91 and 92 may be provided along the direction orthogonal to the axial direction.

In the fourth embodiment, the retaining ring 1103 may be omitted. Also, the shape of the retaining ring 1103 may be changed. For example, although the engaging portions 1104 are provided over the entire circumference of the holding ring 1103, the engaging portions 1104 may be provided at predetermined angular intervals.

In the fourth embodiment, the coil ends 54 and 55 are configured so as not to overlap with the axially central portion 1101 of the magnet unit 42, but some of the coil ends 54 and 55 overlap. It is also good. Moreover, although the coil side part 53 was comprised so that it might not overlap with the thin part 1102, the one part may overlap.

In the fourth embodiment, when the rotary electric machine having the inner rotor structure is adopted, the magnet unit 42 is so formed that the cross section of the magnet unit 42 in the axial direction is convex on the side of the stator 50 (that is, radially outward). The radial thickness at the end portions on both axial sides of the may be thinner than the axial center portion. In this case, the thin portion 1102 may be provided at a position overlapping the coil ends 54 and 55 of the stator winding 51 in the axial direction. Further, in this case, the holding ring 1103 may be employed.

Fifth Embodiment
By the way, in the said embodiment, the magnetic field which the stator winding 51 emits passes the magnet unit 42. As shown in FIG. When the rotor 40 rotates with respect to the stator 50, an eddy current flows to the magnet unit 42 because the magnetic field of the stator winding 51 viewed from the magnet unit 42 is a wave alternating magnetic field. When the eddy current loss is large, the temperature of the magnet unit 42 is increased, the magnetic flux density is weakened, and the torque may be reduced. So, in this embodiment, in order to reduce the eddy current loss in the magnet unit 42, it is set as the following structures.

A perspective view of the magnet sealing portion 1200 is shown in FIG. In FIG. 62, a perspective view of a part of the magnet unit 42 and the magnet sealing portion 1200 is shown. The top view of the magnet sealing part 1200 and the magnet unit 42 is shown in FIG. The vertical end face of the magnet unit 42 is shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 59 to 64, the surface of the magnet unit 42 is molded with an insulating material such as a synthetic resin. When the rotary electric machine 10 is used as a vehicle power source, the magnet sealing portion 1200 is made of a high heat resistant fluororesin, epoxy resin, PPS resin, PEEK resin, LCP resin, silicon resin, PAI resin, PI It is preferable that it is comprised by resin etc.

The magnet insulating portion covering the magnet unit 42 is hereinafter referred to as a magnet sealing portion 1200. The magnet sealing portion 1200 is an insulating material and is made of a nonmagnetic material. Further, the magnet sealing portion 1200 is formed of a nonconductive member having a Young's modulus smaller than that of the cylindrical portion 43.

The magnet sealing portion 1200 is provided to substantially cover the magnet unit 42 in a state in which the plurality of magnets 91 and 92 are arranged in the circumferential direction. That is, the positional relationship between the plurality of magnets 91 and 92 is fixed by the magnet sealing portion 1200. The magnet sealing portion 1200 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and as shown in FIG. 60, is fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43 as a field element core member. When the rotor 40 is disposed to face the stator 50, the inner circumferential surface of the magnet sealing portion 1200 faces the stator winding 51. Hereinafter, the magnet sealing portion 1200 will be described in detail.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 62, the magnet sealing portion 1200 has an inter-magnet member 1201 disposed between adjacent magnets 91 and 92 in the circumferential direction. FIG. 62 is a perspective view showing only the magnet unit 42 and the inter-magnet member 1201. The inter-magnet member 1001 is made of an insulating material. As shown in FIG. 60, the gap 1202 between the magnets 91 and 92 adjacent in the circumferential direction is provided linearly along the axial direction, and the inter-magnet member 1201 is provided to fill the gap 1202. It is done. That is, the inter-magnet member 1201 is formed to extend in the axial direction along the gap 1202.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60, the inter-magnet member 1201 is provided linearly in the radial direction from the magnet holder side toward the rotation center, that is, the stator side. In addition, the width dimension in the circumferential direction is constant.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60, the inter-magnet members 1201 are provided so as to contact the end faces of the magnets 91 and 92 at both ends in the circumferential direction. Further, the width dimension in the circumferential direction of the inter-magnet member 1201 is a predetermined width. That is, in the circumferential direction, the inter-magnet member 1201 engages with the end faces of the magnets 91 and 92, and has a width dimension to the extent of having a function as a rotation stopper.

A gap 1202 between the magnets 91 and 92 is provided along the q axis on the side of the q axis which is the pole boundary. That is, the inter-magnet member 1201 is provided closer to the q axis than the d axis.

As shown in FIGS. 61, 63 and 64, the magnet sealing portion 1200 has a pair of end plates 1203 at both axial ends of the magnet unit 42 so as to cover the axial both end faces of the magnet unit 42. The end plate 1203 is formed in an annular plate shape, and the outer diameter thereof is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 43, and the inner diameter is equal to or less than the inner diameter of the magnet unit 42. The pair of end plates 1203 is provided so as to sandwich the magnet unit 42 from both sides in the axial direction, and the movement of the magnet unit 42 in the axial direction is restricted by the pair of end plates 1203.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 64, the length of the inter-magnet member 1201 in the axial direction is equal to or greater than the length of the magnet unit 42, and both axial ends are fixed to the end plate 1203 respectively. That is, the inter-magnet member 1201 and the end plate 1203 are integrally formed. It can be said that the inter-magnet member 1201 is formed to extend along the axial direction so as to connect a pair of end plates 1203 arranged on both axial sides of the magnet unit 42.

The end portions in the axial direction of the inter-magnet members 1201 adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction are connected to each other by the end plate 1203. In other words, it can be said that the end plate 1203 is formed along the circumferential direction so as to mutually connect the axial end portions of the inter-magnet members 1201 adjacent in the circumferential direction.

As shown in FIGS. 60, 61, and 64, the magnet sealing portion 1200 covers the outer peripheral surface (the surface on the side of the magnet holder 41, that is, the side surface opposite to the armature) of the magnet unit 42 disposed radially outward. It has the insulating layer 1204 formed in this way. That is, the magnet sealing portion 1200 is fixed to the cylindrical portion 43 of the magnet holder 41 together with the magnet unit 42 in a state where the outer peripheral surface of the magnet unit 42 is covered by the insulating layer 1204. That is, the magnet unit 42 is fixed to the cylindrical portion 43 via the insulating layer 1204 in the radial direction of the rotor 40. The insulating layer 1204 is provided between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43 and the outer peripheral surfaces of the magnets 91 and 92 in the radial direction.

More specifically, the inner circumferential surface of the insulating layer 1204 is provided along the outer circumferential surface so as to cover the outer circumferential surface of the magnet unit 42. The outer peripheral surface of the insulating layer 1204 is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43. Therefore, the insulating layer 1204 is formed in a cylindrical shape between the cylindrical portion 43 and the magnet unit 42. An inter-magnet member 1201 is fixed to the inner peripheral surface side of the insulating layer 1204. That is, the inter-magnet member 1201 is provided to extend from the inner circumferential surface of the insulating layer 1204 in the radial direction. The insulating layer 1204 is integrally formed with the inter-magnet member 1201.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 61, 63 and 64, the insulating layers 1204 are fixed to the outer edge of the end plate 1203 at both axial ends. That is, the insulating layer 1204 is erected along the outer edge so as to connect the pair of end plates 1203 in the axial direction. The insulating layer 1204 is integrally formed with the end plate 1203.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 60, 63 and 64, in the magnet sealing portion 1200, the stator side outer surface (armature side peripheral surface) of the magnets 91 and 92 is against the stator winding 51 in the radial direction inner side. And an opening 1205 that is exposed to light. That is, the magnet sealing portion 1200 is configured not to cover the stator-side outer surface of the magnets 91 and 92, and no insulating member exists between the magnets 91 and 92 and the stator winding 51.

The outer surface (opening outer surface) of the magnet sealing portion 1200 on the stator side is opposite to the stator side in the radial direction than the stator outer surface of the magnet unit 42 (that is, the cylindrical portion side, the radial direction outer side) Located in More specifically, the radially outer surface 1201 a of the inter-magnet member 1201 is provided closer to the magnet holder 41 than the stator outer surface of the magnet unit 42 in the radial direction. That is, in the radial direction, the magnets 91 and 92 protrude toward the stator 50 in comparison with the inter-magnet member 1201. In the present embodiment, the thickness dimension of the inter-magnet member 1201 in the radial direction is smaller (thin) than the thickness dimension of the magnets 91 and 92.

According to the fifth embodiment, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The magnet unit 42 includes a plurality of magnets 91 and 92, and an inter-magnet member 1201 made of an insulating material is disposed between the magnets 91 and 92 adjacent in the circumferential direction. For this reason, it can suppress that an eddy current flows into the adjacent magnets 91 and 92, and it can suppress an eddy current loss.

Further, the end faces of the magnets 91 and 92 in the circumferential direction are in contact with the inter-magnet member 1201 provided between the magnets 91 and 92, respectively, and the width dimension of the inter-magnet member 1201 is the detent of the magnets 91 and 92. It has a width enough to function as Therefore, the inter-magnet member 1201 can function as a detent for the magnets 91 and 92 as well as insulating between the magnets 91 and 92. For this reason, it can prevent that the magnets 91 and 92 move to the circumferential direction, and the adjacent magnets 91 and 92 contact, and can perform insulation appropriately.

When the inter-magnet member 1201 (that is, the gap 1202) having a width dimension enough to function as a rotation stopper is provided along the d-axis, the magnetic flux density in the d-axis is reduced compared to the case where it is provided on the q-axis side It becomes easy to do. So, in the said embodiment, the inter-magnet member 1201 was provided in the part by the side of q axis | shaft of the magnets 91 and 92. As shown in FIG. That is, the gap 1202 between the magnets 91 and 92 is provided along the q axis.

By the way, when the gap 1202 is provided on the q-axis of the magnet unit 42, the magnetic flux density tends to be reduced on the q-axis. However, even if the magnetic flux density decreases in the q axis, the influence on the torque is small as compared with the case where the magnetic flux density decreases in the d axis. In addition, by reducing the magnetic flux density in the q axis, it is possible to suppress an abrupt magnetic flux change in the vicinity of the q axis. Then, by suppressing the rapid magnetic flux change in the vicinity of the q axis, it is possible to suppress the generation of the eddy current in the stator winding 51.

Furthermore, the magnet unit 42 of this embodiment is oriented such that the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is parallel to the d axis on the side of the d axis which is the center of the magnetic pole as compared to the side of the q axis which is the magnetic pole boundary. . More specifically, the magnets 91 and 92 are oriented such that the easy magnetization axis is parallel to the d axis or near the parallel to the d axis at a portion near the d axis, and the easy magnetization axis is orthogonal to the q axis at a portion near the q axis The orientation is made so as to form an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path having a direction close to orthogonal to the q axis. As a result, the magnet flux in the d axis is strengthened, and the change in flux near the q axis is suppressed. Therefore, the torque can be improved and the eddy current loss in the stator winding 51 can be reduced.

When the magnets 91 and 92 are used, when the inter-magnet member 1201 having a width dimension sufficient to function as a rotation stopper is provided on the q-axis side, the magnetic flux is compared to the case where it is provided on the d-axis side. It is possible to suppress the decrease in density. That is, in the situation where the arc-shaped magnet magnetic path as shown in FIG. 60 etc. is formed, when the gap 1202 is provided on the q-axis side, the magnet magnetic path is short compared to the case where it is provided on the d-axis side. It is difficult to reduce the magnetic flux density.

An opening 1205 is provided in the magnet sealing portion 1200 so that the stator side outer surface of the magnet unit 42 is exposed to the stator winding 51. That is, in the magnets 91 and 92, the magnet sealing portion 1200 was configured so as not to cover the outer surface on the stator side. As a result, the insulating member does not exist between the magnets 91 and 92 and the stator 50, and the magnetic flux can be prevented from being blocked. Further, by not providing the insulating member between the magnets 91 and 92 and the stator 50, the magnets 91 and 92 and the stator 50 can be compared to the case where they are provided between the magnets 91 and 92 and the stator 50. The air gap in between can be reduced.

In general, an insulating member such as a synthetic resin has a larger expansion coefficient (linear expansion coefficient) than the magnets 91 and 92. For example, the magnets 91 and 92 have a linear expansion coefficient which is not different from that of steel made of neodymium iron boron or samarium iron nitrogen, and the linear expansion coefficient is larger than that of resin. Therefore, in consideration of the expansion rate, the outer surface on the stator side in the inter-magnet member 1201 is made to be opposite to the stator side (radially outer side) than the outer surface on the stator side in the magnets 91 and 92. That is, the magnets 91 and 92 are configured to protrude toward the stator in the radial direction more than the inter-magnet member 1201. As a result, the inter-magnet member 1201 becomes thinner than the magnets 91 and 92, and even if thermal expansion occurs, the inter-magnet member 1201 is suppressed from projecting to the stator side more than the magnets 91 and 92, and rotation is achieved. Can be suppressed.

An insulating layer 1204 was provided between the cylindrical portion 43 of the magnet holder 41 and the magnets 91 and 92. Thereby, the eddy current can be inhibited from passing between the magnets 91 and 92 and the magnet holder 41. Therefore, the eddy current loss in the rotor 40 can be suppressed.

When the outer rotor type rotating electrical machine 10 is adopted, the insulating layer 1204 provided between the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43 and the outer peripheral surface of the magnets 91 and 92 functions as a damper (shock absorber). Thereby, even if a centrifugal force is generated in the magnets 91 and 92, the insulating layer 1204 can suppress contact between the cylindrical portion 43 and the magnets 91 and 92, and insulation can be reliably performed. In addition, chipping and cracking of the magnets 91 and 92 can be suppressed.

Further, the magnet sealing portion 1200 has an annular end plate 1203 axially outside the magnet unit 42, and in each of the inter-magnet members 1201 adjacent in the circumferential direction, the end portions in the axial direction are respectively end plates It is fixed to 1203. Therefore, the strength of the inter-magnet member 1201 can be improved, and the locking of the magnets 91 and 92 can be suitably prevented.

The magnet sealing portion 1200 is formed so as to substantially cover the magnets 91 and 92, and the plurality of inter-magnet members 1201, the pair of end plates 1203 and the insulating layer 1204 are integrally formed. For this reason, compared with the case where these members are provided separately, the strength of the inter-magnet member 1201 can be improved and it can be suitably functioned as a detent for the magnets 91 and 92. Moreover, the strength of the end plate 1203 can be improved, and the magnets 91 and 92 can be suitably prevented from falling off.

(Another example in the fifth embodiment)
-In 2nd Embodiment, although the magnet sealing part 1200 is not provided, you may provide similarly.

-In the modification 10, although the magnet sealing part 1200 is not provided, when employ | adopting the rotary electric machine of an inner-rotor structure (internal rotation structure), you may provide the magnet sealing part 1200 mentioned above similarly. When the magnet sealing portion 1200 is provided, the inner diameters of the pair of end plates 1203 are substantially the same as the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 43 (magnet holder 41), and the outer diameter is equal to or less than the outer diameter of the magnet unit 42. Become. When the magnet sealing portion 1200 has the insulating layer 1204, the insulating layer 1204 is an inner circumferential surface (a surface on the side of the magnet holder 41, that is, a circumferential surface on the side opposite to the armature) disposed radially inward of the magnet unit 42. Is formed to cover the

In the above embodiment, the magnet sealing portion 1200 may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the insulating layer 1204 may not be provided. For example, one or both of the end plates 1203 may not be provided. For example, the magnet sealing portion 1200 may be formed to cover the stator-side outer surface of the magnet unit 42. Further, although the inter-magnet member 1201 and the end plate 1203 are integrally formed, they may be provided separately. Further, although the inter-magnet member 1201 and the insulating layer 1204 are integrally formed, they may be provided separately. Although the end plate 1203 and the insulating layer 1204 are integrally formed, they may be provided separately.

In the embodiment, the shape of the inter-magnet member 1201 may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the length in the radial direction may be changed, and the thickness dimension may be changed to the same extent as the magnets 91 and 92 in the radial direction. Further, the width dimension in the circumferential direction of the inter-magnet member 1201 may be smaller (shorter) than the gap 1002 between the magnets 91 and 92.

In the above embodiment, the shapes of the magnet sealing portion 1200 and the magnet unit 42 may be changed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, a recess 2201 may be provided on the stator side outer surface (armature side peripheral surface) of the magnet unit 42. The recess 2201 is open on the stator side. The recess 2201 is provided closer to the q axis than the d axis. In FIGS. 65 and 66, the recess 2201 is configured to open around the q axis.

In the rotor 40 shown in FIG. 65, a recess 2201 is provided so that the gap 1202 between the magnets 91 and 92 extends in the circumferential direction from the middle in the radial direction. That is, the concave 2201 is provided in the magnet unit 42 by providing an inclined surface 2201 a that is oblique (for example, an angle of 45 degrees) with respect to the radial direction so as to scrape the corner on the stator side of each of the magnets 91 and 92. ing.

The magnet sealing portion 1200 shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 has an engaging portion 2202 as an insulating member in the recess 2201. The engaging portions 2202 are formed to extend in the axial direction, and the axial end portions thereof are fixed to the end plate 1203 respectively.

In FIG. 65, the engaging portion 2202 is provided in the recess 2201 by the circumferential width of the inter-magnet member 1201 increasing along the recess 2201 from the middle of the radial direction. By providing the engaging portion 2202, the magnets 91 and 92 engage with the engaging portion 2202 in the radial direction, and the magnets 91 and 92 are prevented from moving radially inward, that is, coming off Do.

In the magnets 91 and 92 shown in FIG. 65, arc-shaped magnet magnetic paths are formed between the end surface on the q-axis side in the circumferential direction and the outer surface on the stator side, as indicated by the arrows. Therefore, in the q-axis of the magnets 91 and 92, the part on the stator side is a part where the magnet magnetic path is short compared to the part on the opposite side in the radial direction (that is, the magnet holder side), and demagnetization is easy . That is, even if this portion is eliminated, the influence on the magnetic flux density is small. On the other hand, there is an advantage that the amount of magnet can be reduced by deleting this part. Therefore, the concave portion 2201 is provided on the q axis side.

In the above embodiment, the gap 1202 between the magnets may be provided on the d-axis side. That is, the magnets constituting the magnet unit 42 may be divided (separated) along the d axis. For example, as shown in FIG. 66, the magnets 2203 and 2204 that constitute the magnet unit 42 may be configured symmetrically across the q axis with the d axis as the center. In this case, as shown in FIG. 66, in the magnets 2203 and 2204, magnet magnets that are arc-shaped radially outward from one q axis to the other q axis centering on the center point set on the q axis A path is formed. The magnetization directions of the first magnet 2203 and the second magnet 2204 are opposite to each other.

In the case where a recess 2201 is provided on the stator side outer surface of the magnet unit 42, as shown in FIG. The reason is that on the stator side outer surface of the magnet unit 42, the d axis side portions of the magnets 2203 and 2204 are portions that are likely to affect the magnetic flux density to the stator 50 as compared to the q axis side portion. Therefore, it is not desirable to provide the recess 2201. More specifically, in the case where the recess 2201 is provided on the d-axis side on the stator side outer surface of the magnet unit 42, the space between the stator 50 and the magnet unit 42 becomes large. That is, the air gap may be large, and the magnetic flux density to the stator 50 may be reduced. Further, when the concave portion 2001 is provided on the d-axis side, the magnet magnetic path of the magnets 2203 and 2204 becomes short, so that the magnetic flux density to the stator 50 may be reduced. Therefore, providing the recess 2201 on the d-axis side of the magnets 2203 and 2204 is not preferable because it is a portion that easily affects the magnetic flux density. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a recess 2201 on the q axis side.

In the case where the recess 2201 is provided on the q-axis side of the magnets 2203 and 2204, the magnetic flux density to the stator winding 51 tends to decrease on the q-axis. However, in the q-axis, even if the magnetic flux density to the stator winding 51 is lowered, the influence on the torque is small as compared with the case where it is provided on the d-axis side. In addition, by providing the concave portion 2201 on the q axis side, it is possible to suppress an abrupt magnetic flux change in the vicinity of the q axis. That is, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an eddy current in the stator winding 51 by suppressing an abrupt magnetic flux change in the vicinity of the q-axis.

When the gap 1202 in the magnets 2203 and 2204 is provided on the d-axis side, it is desirable to shorten the width dimension of the gap 1202 and the inter-magnet member 1201 in the circumferential direction to such an extent that insulation can be maintained. This is because the magnetic flux density may be reduced if a gap with a large width is provided on the d-axis side. Also in this case, the engaging portion 2202 disposed in the recess 2201 can be engaged with the magnets 2203 and 2204 in the circumferential direction to prevent rotation.

In the magnet unit 42 of the above embodiment, the gaps 1202 may be provided on both sides of the q axis and the d axis.

In the above embodiment, although the inter-magnet member 1201 has a width dimension that allows it to function as a detent, the width dimension may be arbitrarily changed. For example, it may be thinner. At that time, it is preferable that the width dimension is such that the insulation can be maintained.

In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, the magnet unit 42 (that is, the magnets 91 and 92) may be divided into a plurality of parts in the axial direction, and the insulating members 3201 may be provided in the gaps in the axial direction. In this case, as in a general electromagnetic steel sheet, the eddy current loss reduction method of cutting the eddy current in the axial direction can suppress the eddy current loss generated in the magnet.

In the embodiment, in order to prevent the magnets 91 and 92 from falling off, metal or nonmagnetic metal or a high strength resin may be provided on the outer surfaces of the magnets 91 and 92 on the stator side. In this case, in order to avoid the eddy current loss in the dropout prevention member, it is desirable that a plurality of dropout prevention members be stacked in the axial direction.

In any of the above embodiments, the magnet sealing portion 1200 may be provided. For example, in the case of adopting a rotary electric machine having an inner rotor structure (inner structure), the above-described magnet sealing portion 1200 may be provided in the same manner.

In the embodiment described above, the field element side recess opened on the rotor 40 side may be provided along the axial direction on the rotor side outer surface (field element side outer surface) of the circumferential surface of the magnet unit 42 . In this case, it is desirable to provide the field element-side recess on the d-axis side with respect to the q-axis. That is, in the d-axis, it is desirable to provide in the part on the side opposite to the stator. When an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path is provided using the magnets 91 and 92 as described above, this portion (the portion on the side opposite to the stator in the d axis) is easily demagnetized. And it is desirable to provide the magnet element side engaging part as an insulating member in the magnet sealing part 1200 so that the said field element side recessed part may be filled up. The field element side engaging portion functions as a rotation stop because it engages with the magnets 91 and 92 in the circumferential direction.

Sixth Embodiment
By the way, in the said embodiment, the magnetic field which the stator winding 51 emits passes the magnet unit 42. As shown in FIG. When the rotor 40 rotates with respect to the stator 50, an eddy current flows to the magnet unit 42 because the magnetic field of the stator winding 51 viewed from the magnet unit 42 is a wave alternating magnetic field. Then, when the eddy current flows, the temperature of the magnet unit 42 rises, the magnetic flux density becomes weak, and the torque may decrease.

Moreover, in the rotary electric machine 10 according to the above-described embodiment, as the first device, as described above, the slotless structure is adopted in the stator 50, and the SPM rotor is adopted. In addition, as a third device, a flat lead structure is adopted in which the radial thickness of the lead is reduced in the coil side portion 53 of the stator winding 51. Therefore, on the side of the stator 50, in the accommodation space (the space between the stator core 52 and the magnet unit 42), the ratio occupied by the conducting wire 82 is increased, while the gap through which air or the like passes is reduced. Tend. That is, it is difficult to increase the cooling performance by increasing the gap on the side of the stator 50 as compared to the case where the slot structure or the round conducting wire is adopted. That is, it is difficult to expect cooling of the magnet unit 42 by the cooling mechanism of the stator 50. So, in this embodiment, in order to improve the cooling performance in the magnet unit 42, it is set as the following structures.

The magnet unit 42 in the sixth embodiment is composed of a plurality of magnets 91 and 92 arranged in the circumferential direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, magnets 91 and 92 spaced apart from the adjacent magnets 91 and 92 on at least one side in the circumferential direction among the plurality of magnets 91 and 92 are provided. I made it. Thereby, a gap 1301 axially penetrating along the axial direction is formed between the magnets 91 and 92. That is, by fixing the magnets 91 and 92 to the cylindrical portion 43 and arranging the rotor 40 so as to face the stator 50, the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43, the end surface 270 in the circumferential direction of the magnets 91 and 92, And a gap 1301 as a passage surrounded by the stator 50 (more specifically, the stator winding 51). The fluid such as air passes through the gap 1301 to cool the magnet unit 42.

By the way, as described above, the magnet unit 42 desirably has a magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave shape, and the magnetic flux density in the d-axis is desirably as high as possible. Therefore, the magnets 91 and 92 of this embodiment are oriented such that the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is parallel to the d axis on the d axis side, which is the pole center, as compared to the q axis side, which is the pole boundary. The magnet of the pole anisotropic structure has an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path formed along the easy magnetization axis.

Then, in order to obtain a magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave shape by using the magnets 91 and 92 and to increase the magnetic flux density in the d axis, when arranging the magnets 91 and 92 in the circumferential direction, It is desirable to reduce the gap between adjacent magnets 91 and 92 as much as possible and to reduce the number thereof. Incidentally, when the radial orientation magnets and the parallel orientation magnets are arranged in the circumferential direction without a gap, as shown in FIG. 18, the magnetic flux density changes sharply near the q-axis. For this reason, when employing a radial orientation magnet or a parallel orientation magnet, it is usually disposed with a predetermined interval.

Therefore, in the magnet unit 42 of the sixth embodiment, magnets 91 and 92 in contact with the adjacent magnets 91 and 92 at least on one side in the circumferential direction are adjacent to one another on at least one side in the circumferential direction. The magnets 91 and 92 spaced apart from the magnets 91 and 92 are provided. That is, the gap 1301 is not provided between all the magnets 91 and 92, and the ones in contact and the ones in separation are mixed. As a result, the cooling performance of the magnet unit 42 is improved while maintaining a magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave shape and suppressing a decrease in the magnetic flux density generated from the d axis.

In the sixth embodiment, the gap 1301 is provided along the q axis. And since the magnetic flux density distribution of the magnet unit 42 approximates to a sine wave shape, the magnetic flux density in q axis becomes small. Therefore, by providing the gap 1301 in the q-axis, it is possible to suppress a rapid change in magnetic flux density in the q-axis. By suppressing the magnetic flux density from changing suddenly, the eddy current loss in the stator winding 51 is suppressed.

Here, the arrangement of the gap 1301 will be described in more detail. The number of gaps 1301 between the magnets 91 and 92 is made to be a prime number different from the number of magnetic poles and the number of phases. For example, as shown in FIG. 68, gaps 1301a to 1301e are provided at five places so that the number of magnetic poles (16 poles) and the number of phases (3 phases) are different prime numbers. Further, at that time, a number (five places) of gaps 1301a to 1301e which are different from the multiple of the number of magnetic poles (16) and the multiple of the number of phases (three phases) are provided.

Further, the arrangement intervals of the gaps 1301a to 1301e are provided so as to be uneven in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the distance between the gap 1301a and the adjacent gap 1301b in the clockwise direction is 90 degrees, and the distance between the gap 1301b and the adjacent gap 1301c in the clockwise direction is 67.5. Degree. Further, the distance between the gap 1301c and the adjacent gap 1301d in the clockwise direction is 90 degrees, and the distance between the gap 1301d and the adjacent gap 1301e in the clockwise direction is 45 degrees. The distance between the gap 1301e and the adjacent gap 1301a in the clockwise direction is 67.5 degrees. With such a configuration, resonance between the rotor 40 and the stator 50 is suppressed. In FIG. 68, the center position of the gaps 1301a to 1301e in the circumferential direction is indicated by a broken line.

The distance in the circumferential direction of the gap 1301 is preferably as short as possible, as long as the fluid can pass therethrough. For example, the gap 1301 may be about 0.5 mm to 1.5 mm in the circumferential direction. Further, when there are a plurality of gaps 1301, the circumferential distance of each gap 1301 may be different for each gap 1301.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the end face 32 of the housing 30 is provided with a through hole 32a penetrating in the axial direction. Further, in the magnet holder 41, the intermediate portion 45 connecting the cylindrical portion 43 and the fixed portion 44 is provided with a through hole 45a penetrating in the axial direction. Moreover, the magnet holder 41 is formed in cup shape, and has provided the opening 41a opened to the end plate 63 side. Further, the end plate 63 is provided with a through hole 63 a penetrating in the axial direction. The through holes 32 a, 45 a, 63 a and the opening 41 a of the magnet holder 41 are provided in the vicinity of the magnet unit 42 in the radial direction. Preferably, it is provided within the range of the magnet unit 42. Further, the through holes 32a, 45a, 63a are provided at positions adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction. Preferably, it is desirable that the through holes have substantially the same circumferential position.

Thus, when the rotor 40 rotates, air outside the end plate 63 (lower side in FIG. 70) in the axial direction is a gap in the through hole 63 a of the end plate 63, the opening 41 a of the magnet holder 41, and the magnet unit 42 It passes through 1301, the through hole 45 a of the intermediate portion 45, and the through hole 32 a of the end face 32, and flows out to the outside (upper side in FIG. 70) of the housing 30. Alternatively, when the rotor 40 rotates, the air outside the housing 30 in the axial direction passes through the through hole 32a of the end face 32, the through hole 45a of the intermediate portion 45, the gap 1301 in the magnet unit 42, the opening 41a of the magnet holder 41, And, it passes through the through hole 63 a of the end plate 63 and is discharged to the outside of the end plate 63. Thereby, the magnet unit 42 is cooled.

According to the sixth embodiment, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The magnet unit 42 is oriented such that the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is parallel to the d axis on the side of the d axis which is the center of the magnetic pole as compared to the side of the q axis which is the magnetic pole boundary. The magnets 91 and 92 in which the magnetic path is formed are used. As a result, in order to obtain a magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave shape, it is desirable to make the gap between the adjacent magnets 91 and 92 as small as possible when the magnets 91 and 92 are arranged in the circumferential direction. By reducing the size, the magnetic flux path can be increased by lengthening the magnet path. However, when the gap between the adjacent magnets 91 and 92 is completely eliminated, a passage (flow passage) through which a fluid such as air flows in the axial direction is not formed, and the cooling performance of the magnet unit 42 is degraded.

Therefore, the magnets 91 and 92 contact the magnets 91 and 92 that are in contact with the adjacent magnets 91 and 92 on at least one side in the circumferential direction, and the magnets 91 and 92 adjacent on at least one side in the circumferential direction The magnets 91 and 92 separated from the magnets 91 and 92 are provided. That is, the gap 1301 is not provided between all the magnets 91 and 92, and the ones in contact and the ones in separation are mixed. Thus, the cooling performance of the magnet unit 42 can be improved by providing a magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave shape and providing the gap 1301 between the adjacent magnets 91 and 92 to form a flow path.

Further, a gap 1301 between the magnets 91 and 92 is provided along the q axis. When the magnetic flux density distribution has a sine wave shape, the magnetic flux density is lowest in the q axis. Therefore, even if the gap 1301 is provided along the q-axis, the influence on the magnetic flux density distribution is small. This can suppress the reduction in torque. In addition, it is possible to suppress an abrupt change in magnetic flux density and to suppress generation of an eddy current loss (that is, heat generation of the stator 50) on the side of the stator 50 (for example, the stator winding 51).

When the number of gaps 1301 between the magnets is the same as the number of magnetic poles or the number of phases, resonance may easily occur between the rotor 40 and the stator 50. Therefore, by making the number of gaps 1301 between the magnets different from the number of magnetic poles and the number of phases, generation of resonance between the rotor 40 and the stator 50 can be suppressed. Further, since the number of the gaps 1301 is different from the multiple of the number of magnetic poles and the multiple of the number of phases, generation of resonance can be suppressed as compared with the case of multiples.

Further, a plurality of gaps 1301 between the magnets 91 and 92 are provided, and the gaps 1301 adjacent in the circumferential direction are arranged so as to be uneven. Thereby, the occurrence of resonance can be suppressed as compared with the case where they are arranged evenly.

Further, the stator 50 adopts a slotless structure. Thereby, the torque limitation caused by the magnetic saturation can be eliminated. Further, when the slotless structure is adopted, in the accommodation space for accommodating the conducting wire 82, while the ratio occupied by the conducting wire 82 tends to increase, the gap becomes small. That is, the flow passage cross-sectional area of the flow passage through which the fluid passes on the side of the stator 50 becomes smaller, and the cooling performance tends to decrease. For this reason, in the sixth embodiment, the gap 1301 functioning as a flow path is provided in the magnet unit 42 to improve the cooling performance, thereby compensating for the decrease in the cooling performance on the stator 50 side, and the rotary electric machine 10 as a whole. The cooling performance of the magnet unit 42 can be maintained or improved.

The wire group 81 and the wire 82 had their radial thickness dimension smaller than the circumferential width dimension of one phase in one magnetic pole. Thereby, the eddy current loss in the conducting wire 82 can be suppressed while improving the torque. When configured as described above, in the accommodation space for accommodating the conducting wire 82, while the ratio occupied by the conducting wire 82 tends to increase, the gap is reduced. That is, the flow passage cross-sectional area of the flow passage through which the fluid passes on the side of the stator 50 becomes smaller, and the cooling performance tends to decrease. For this reason, by providing the gap 1301 functioning as a flow path in the magnet unit 42 to improve the cooling performance, the cooling performance of the magnet unit 42 can be maintained or improved as the entire rotary electric machine 10.

Further, by providing the gap 1301 between the magnets 91 and 92, eddy current hardly flows between the magnets 91 and 92. For this reason, eddy current loss can be suppressed and heat generation can be suppressed.

Seventh Embodiment
In the seventh embodiment, the configuration of the magnet unit 42 of the first embodiment is changed. Hereinafter, the configuration of the magnet unit 42 will be mainly described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the magnet unit 42 has a plurality of magnets 2301 arranged side by side in the circumferential direction. These magnets 2301 are oriented such that the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is parallel to the d axis on the side of the d axis which is the center of the magnetic pole as compared with the side of the q axis which is the magnetic pole boundary. A plurality of arc-shaped magnet magnetic paths are formed along the same.

In the magnet unit 42, the magnetization directions (magnetization directions) of the magnets 2301 adjacent in the circumferential direction are reversed (reversed) so that the polarities of the d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction are made different. In other words, attachment of the magnets 2301 adjacent in the circumferential direction such that the magnetic flux is concentrated and the d axis having the N pole and the d axis having the magnetic pole diffuse and the d axis having the S pole are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. The magnetic directions are made different.

To describe the magnet 2301 in more detail, as shown in FIG. 73, a plurality of arc-shaped magnet magnetic paths are formed around a center point set on the q-axis. This magnet magnetic path has a center on the center point and a d-axis at the magnetic pole center of the magnet 2301 and the outer surface of the stator on the stator side (armature side circumferential surface) on the stator side among the circumferential surfaces of the magnet 2301. It includes a magnetic path on the orientation arc OA passing through one intersection point P31. The orientation arc OA is desirably set so that the tangent at the first intersection point P31 on the orientation arc approaches parallel to the d axis.

In addition, the magnet 2301 is provided across the d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction around the q axis. That is, the magnets 2301 are provided in a circular arc shape between adjacent d-axes in the circumferential direction.

Therefore, among the magnet magnetic paths of the magnet 2301, the magnet magnetic path along the orientation arc OA is the longest, and as the distance from the orientation arc OA increases, the magnet magnetic path tends to be shorter. For example, among the magnet magnetic paths of the magnet 2301, in the part near the q-axis, the magnet magnetic path (indicated by a broken line) passing through the part on the stator side rather than the anti-stator side tends to be shorter . Also, for example, in a portion near the d axis in the magnet magnetic path of the magnet 2301, a magnet magnetic path (indicated by a broken line) passing through a portion on the side opposite to the stator more easily becomes shorter than the stator side. ing. The shape of the magnet magnetic path (that is, the orientation arc OA) may be an arc shape which is a part of a perfect circle or an arc shape which is a part of an ellipse. In addition, although the center of the arc is the q axis, it may not be the q axis.

The magnet unit 42 is provided in an annular shape by arranging the magnets 2301 in which the magnet magnetic paths are respectively formed in this manner in the circumferential direction. Also in the magnet unit 42 according to the seventh embodiment, the magnet 2301 in contact with the adjacent magnet 2301 at least on one side in the circumferential direction and the magnet 2301 next to the magnet 2301 on at least one side in the circumferential direction. And magnets 2301 spaced apart from each other.

That is, the gap 1301 is provided between the magnets 2301 adjacent in the circumferential direction. At that time, the gap 1301 is not provided between all the magnets 2301, and the ones in contact and the ones in separation are mixed. Thus, the cooling performance of the magnet unit 42 is improved while suppressing the decrease in the magnetic flux density generated from the d-axis. The number and arrangement of the gaps 1301a to 1301e are the same as in the sixth embodiment as shown in FIG.

The magnet unit 42 is provided with a plurality of passages 2302 and 2303 as passages penetrating in the axial direction as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, in addition to the gap 1301 between the magnets 2301. The channels 2302 and 2303 are channels provided with channel cross-sectional areas to the extent that a fluid such as air passes. These flow paths 2302 and 2303 are provided by changing the shape of the magnet unit 42 of the sixth embodiment.

Specifically, the first recess 2301 a is provided on the stator side outer surface (the armature side circumferential surface) of the magnet unit 42 along the axial direction. The first recess 2301 a is open on the stator side. The first recess 2301 a is provided closer to the q axis than the d axis. In FIG. 73, the first recess 2301 a is configured to open around the q axis. In this case, the first recess 2301a is provided to avoid the orientation arc OA.

When the rotor 40 is disposed to face the stator 50, the stator 50 (the stator winding 51 or the like) is disposed on the inner side of the radial direction inner diameter than the magnet unit 42. Therefore, by providing the first recess 2301a, the flow path 2302 surrounded by the first recess 2301a and the stator 50 is provided in the magnet unit 42.

As described above, in the portion near the q axis in the magnet magnetic path of the magnet 2301, the magnet magnetic path (indicated by a broken line) passing through the portion on the stator side rather than the anti-stator side is shorter It is easy to become. And when a magnet magnetic path is short, it can be said that it is a part which is easy to demagnetize by the influence of an external magnetic field (for example, the magnetic field from stator winding 51). For this reason, even if the first concave portion 2301a is provided in the part closer to the stator side than the anti-stator side among the parts near the q axis of the magnet 2301, the magnetic flux density in the d axis hardly affects (the magnetic flux Density does not decrease).

In addition, a second recessed portion 2301 b is provided along the axial direction on the non-stator side peripheral surface (opposite to the armature side peripheral surface) of the magnet unit 42. The second concave portion 2301 b is open to the side opposite to the stator (the cylindrical portion 43 side). The second recess 2301 b is provided closer to the d axis than the q axis. In FIG. 73, the second recess 2301 b is configured to open around the d axis. More specifically, each magnet 2301 is provided with an inclined surface which is oblique (for example, an angle of 45 degrees) with respect to the radial direction so as to scrape the corner on the side opposite to the stator. Thus, in the state where the magnets 2301 are arranged in the circumferential direction, the magnet unit 42 is provided with a second recess 2301 b that opens to the side opposite to the stator with the d axis as the center.

When the magnet unit 42 is fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43, by providing the second concave portion 2301b, the flow path 2303 surrounded by the second concave portion 2301b and the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43 is a magnet unit 42 will be provided.

As described above, in the portion near the d axis in the magnet magnetic path of the magnet 2301, the magnet magnetic path (indicated by the broken line) passing through the portion on the side opposite to the stator than the stator is shorter It is easy to become. And when a magnet magnetic path is short, it can be said that it is a part which is easy to demagnetize by the influence of an external magnetic field (for example, the magnetic field from stator winding 51). Therefore, even if the second concave portion 2301b is provided in the portion on the side opposite to the stator side of the magnet 2301 near the d axis, the magnetic flux density in the d axis hardly affects (the magnetic flux Density does not decrease).

In the seventh embodiment, the flow paths 2302 are provided for each q-axis, but the number and the arrangement of the flow paths 2302 on the stator side may be arbitrarily changed. Moreover, although the flow path 2303 was provided for every d axis | shaft, you may change the number and arrangement | positioning of the flow path 2303 of the anti-stator side arbitrarily. For example, the number of flow paths 2302 and 2303 may be a prime number different from the number of magnetic poles and the number of phases of the stator winding 51. In addition, the number of flow paths 2302 and 2303 may be a prime number different from the multiple of the number of magnetic poles and the multiple of the number of phases of the stator winding 51. Further, the arrangement intervals of the flow paths 2302 and 2303 may be uneven in the circumferential direction. With such a configuration, resonance between the rotor 40 and the stator 50 is suppressed.

According to the seventh embodiment, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the part near the q-axis in the magnet 2301, the part on the stator side is a part where the magnet magnetic path is likely to be short and demagnetization is likely to occur. Similarly, in the portion near the d-axis, the portion on the side opposite to the stator tends to shorten the magnet magnetic path, which makes it easy to demagnetize. That is, even if this portion is deleted, the influence on the magnetic flux density generated from the d axis is small.

Therefore, the first concave portion 2301a is provided in the part on the stator side in the part near the q axis, and the second concave part 2301b is provided in the part on the opposite side of the stator in the part near the d axis. Since the first concave portion 2301 a and the second concave portion 2301 b are provided along the axial direction, the magnet 2301 is fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43 and the rotor 40 is disposed opposite to the stator 50. The axially penetrating passages 2302 and 2303 are provided. Then, when the rotor 40 rotates, a fluid such as air passes through the flow paths 2302 and 2303, so that the magnet unit 42 is cooled. That is, the cooling performance of the magnet unit 42 can be improved.

As described above, since the first concave portion 2301a and the second concave portion 2301b are provided in the portion where demagnetization easily occurs, the magnetic flux density is hardly affected. That is, the cooling performance of the magnet unit 42 can be improved while suppressing the torque reduction. Moreover, the amount of magnets of the magnet unit 42 can be suitably reduced, suppressing a torque fall.

(Another example in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment)
In the above configuration, the magnets 91, 92, 131, 132, and 2301 may be covered with a resin film. By doing this, it is possible to prevent an eddy current from flowing between the adjacent magnets 91, 92, 131, 132, and 2301, and to reduce the eddy current loss. That is, the heat generation of the magnet unit 42 can be suppressed. In addition, when providing a resin film, it is desirable to cover only the anti-stator side peripheral surface and circumferential direction end surface of a magnet with a resin film so that the magnet unit 42 may be exposed to the stator side. By exposing the stator side outer surface of the magnet, it is possible to suppress a decrease in magnetic flux density due to the resin coating, and to reduce the air gap between the magnet unit 42 and the stator 50. The axial end face of the magnet unit 42 may or may not be covered with a resin film.

In the magnet unit 42 of the sixth embodiment, the magnets 91 and 92 are divided for each q axis, but the magnets 91 and 92 may be divided on the d axis. Also, the magnets 91 and 92 may be divided in the q-axis and the d-axis. In the magnet unit 42 of the seventh embodiment, the magnets 2301 may be divided along the q axis. That is, the magnets of the magnet unit 42 may be divided at any point in the circumferential direction.

In the seventh embodiment, the gap 1301 is provided between the magnets 2301. However, the gap 1301 may not be provided. Also in this case, the magnet unit 42 can be cooled by the flow paths 2302 and 2303. In the seventh embodiment, only the flow path 2302 on the stator side may be provided, or only the flow path 2303 on the opposite side of the stator may be provided.

In the seventh embodiment, the cylindrical portion 43 may be provided with an engaging portion that engages with the second concave portion 2301 b of the magnet 2301 in the circumferential direction. Describing in detail, as shown in FIG. 74, on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43, an engaging portion 3301 that protrudes toward the magnet unit 42 in the radial direction is provided. The engaging portions 3301 are configured to circumferentially engage with the opening of the second recess 2301 b. Further, the dimension (height dimension) of the engaging portion 3301 in the radial direction is shorter than the dimension (depth dimension) of the second recess 2301 b so that the second recess 2301 b is not completely filled with the engaging portion 3301. doing. Thus, even if the engaging portion 3301 and the second recess 2301 b are engaged, the flow channel 2303 can be provided in the magnet unit 42.

The engaging portion 3301 may be formed at any position in the range of the magnet unit 42 in the axial direction. For example, the engaging portion 3301 may be provided over the entire range of the magnet unit 42 along the axial direction. In addition, the engaging portions 3301 do not have to be provided for each second recess 2301 b and may be smaller than the number of the second recesses 2301 b. For example, the engaging portions 3301 may be provided at every 90 degree angle interval.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the engaging portion 3301, a groove portion 3301a opening in the radial direction to the stator side may be provided along the axial direction. As a result, the flow path cross-sectional area of the flow path 2303 can be increased, and the cooling performance can be improved.

In the above configuration, the position and the shape of the through hole 32 a provided on the end surface 32 of the housing 30 may be arbitrarily changed. You may provide in the surrounding wall 31 of the housing 30. FIG. In this case, it may be penetrated in the radial direction. Similarly, a through hole may be provided at any position of the magnet holder 41 to allow fluid to pass therethrough. Similarly, the position and shape of the through holes 63 a provided in the end plate 63 may be arbitrarily changed.

In the above embodiment, the fluid passing through the gap 1301 and the channels 2302 and 2303 is not limited to a gas such as air, but may be a liquid.

In the above embodiment, the rotor 40 may be provided with a fan. Thereby, the cooling performance can be improved.

Eighth Embodiment
In the eighth embodiment, the configuration of the magnet unit 42 in the rotor 40 is changed, and will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, the magnet unit 42 is configured using a magnet arrangement called a Halbach arrangement. FIG. 77 is an enlarged view of FIG. That is, the magnet unit 42 has a first magnet 1401 whose radial direction is the magnetization direction (direction of magnetization vector) and a second magnet 1402 whose circumferential direction is the magnetization direction (direction of the magnetization vector). The first magnets 1401 are disposed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction, and the second magnets 1402 are disposed at positions between the adjacent first magnets 1401 in the circumferential direction. The first magnet 1401 and the second magnet 1402 are permanent magnets made of a rare earth magnet such as a neodymium magnet, for example.

Each of the magnets 1401 and 1402 is formed to have a rectangular cross-sectional shape. Further, the magnets 1401 and 1402 are disposed such that the short direction is along the radial direction at the longitudinal center (that is, the circumferential center) of the magnets 1401 and 1402. That is, the respective magnets 1401 and 1402 are arranged such that the longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the radial direction at the longitudinal center.

In the eighth embodiment, the first magnet 1401 is formed to be longer in the longitudinal direction than the second magnet 1402, but may be the same or shorter. Further, in the eighth embodiment, the magnets 1401 and 1402 are disposed so that the longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the radial direction, but are disposed such that the short direction is orthogonal to the radial direction. It is also good.

In the eighth embodiment, the dimension (thickness) of the second magnet 1402 in the lateral direction is larger (thicker) than the dimension (thickness) of the first magnet 1401 in the lateral direction. Is formed. And in the longitudinal direction center, the distance (dimension) in the radial direction from the stator 50 to the side surfaces 1401a and 1402a (surfaces on the outer side in the radial direction) is the same distance in both of the magnets 1401 and 1402 ing. On the other hand, at the center in the longitudinal direction, the first magnet 1401 has a radial distance (dimension) from the stator 50 to the stator side outer surfaces 1401 b and 1402 b (radially inner surfaces) compared to the second magnet 1402 It is large (long). That is, the air gap to the stator 50 is larger in the first magnet 1401 than in the second magnet 1402.

In addition, the first magnets 1401 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction such that the poles on the side (radially inner side) facing the stator 50 are alternately N poles and S poles. Further, the second magnets 1402 are arranged adjacent to the first magnets 1401 so that the polarities alternate in the circumferential direction. By alternately arranging the first magnets 1401 and the second magnets 1402 in the magnet unit 42, it is possible to increase the magnetic flux density in the first magnets 1401. Therefore, in the magnet unit 42, magnetic flux can be concentrated on one side, and the magnetic flux can be strengthened on the side closer to the stator 50.

Further, the first magnet 1401 and the second magnet 1402 are arranged in the circumferential direction at predetermined intervals. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77, the d-axis serving as the magnetic pole center coincides with the longitudinal center of the first magnet 1401, and the q-axis serving as the magnetic pole boundary coincides with the longitudinal center of the second magnet 1402. Become. That is, the longitudinal center of the first magnet 1401 is the d-axis side, and the longitudinal end of the first magnet 1401 is the q-axis side. In the eighth embodiment, the longitudinal center of the magnets 1401 and 1402 corresponds to the circumferential center, and the longitudinal ends of the magnets 1401 and 1402 correspond to the circumferential ends.

As described above, the gap (air gap) between the stator side outer surface 1401 b (armature side peripheral surface) of the first magnet 1401 and the rotor side peripheral surface of the stator 50 in the radial direction is the d axis Gradually from the magnetic pole boundary toward the q axis side. That is, the air gap (dimension L40) from the first magnet 1401 to the stator 50 on the d axis (center in the longitudinal direction) is compared to the air gap (dimension L41) on the q axis side (end side in the longitudinal direction) , Is shorter. Also, the air gap becomes larger as it approaches the q-axis side (longitudinal end side). The larger the air gap, the lower the magnetic flux density reaching the stator 50 will be. As a result, the surface magnetic flux density distribution of the magnet unit 42 approaches a sine wave shape.

In the first magnet 1401, a plurality of linear magnet magnetic paths are formed between the opposite stator side circumferential surface 1401a and the stator side outer surface 1401b, and the magnet magnetic path at the center in the longitudinal direction is in the radial direction. It becomes parallel. Further, in the second magnet 1402, a plurality of linear magnet magnetic paths are formed between the end surfaces 1402c and 1402d in the longitudinal direction, and the magnet magnetic paths are parallel to the circumferential direction at the center in the longitudinal direction. That is, at the longitudinal center of the second magnet 1402, the magnet magnetic path is orthogonal to the radial direction. The direction parallel to the radial direction includes, for example, a direction that forms an acute angle with the radial direction. The same applies to the direction parallel to the circumferential direction.

In the second magnet 1402 of the eighth embodiment, an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path may be provided along the circumferential direction. Further, in the first magnet 1401 of the eighth embodiment, a plurality of magnet magnetic paths may be provided radially along the radial direction. That is, as the first magnet 1401, a radially oriented magnet having a magnet magnetic path which is inclined with respect to the short direction as it approaches the q axis may be adopted.

The rotor 40 holds the magnets 1401 and 1402 and has a magnet holding portion 1403 functioning as a back core. The magnet holding portion 1403 is a field element core member made of a soft magnetic material provided in a cylindrical shape, and is fixed to the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 43. The magnet holding portion 1403 fixes and holds the magnets 1401 and 1402 on the inner peripheral surface side. At that time, the magnets 1401 and 1402 are fixed in a state of being arranged in the circumferential direction at predetermined intervals. In addition, on the inner circumferential surface of the magnet holding portion 1403, the flat installation surface to be fixed is in each of the magnets 1401 and 1402 in a state where the anti-stator side circumferential surfaces 1401a and 1402a of the magnets 1401 and 1402 are in contact. It is provided. As a result, the magnets 1401 and 1402 are disposed in the state where the magnet holding portions 1403 are stacked on the side opposite to the stator.

The magnet holding portion 1403 is provided with a projecting portion 1404 which protrudes inward in the radial direction from the inner circumferential surface thereof. The protrusions 1404 are provided to be located between the magnets 1401 and 1402 in the circumferential direction. That is, the projection 1404 is disposed between the d axis and the q axis.

The projecting portion 1404 is formed to be thinner as it approaches from the proximal side to the distal side (radially inner side). Moreover, the protrusion part 1404 is provided over the whole region of each magnet 1401, 1402 in the axial direction.

The circumferential end face 1404 a (the end face on the first magnet side) of the protrusion 1404 is formed to abut on the longitudinal end face 1401 c of the first magnet 1401. More specifically, the circumferential end surface 1404 a of the projecting portion 1404 is formed so as to abut the stator side outer peripheral surface 1401 a of the first magnet 1401 to the stator side outer surface 1401 b. That is, the circumferential end surface 1404 a of the projecting portion 1404 is formed so as to abut on the entire area of the longitudinal end surface 1401 c in the radial direction.

Further, the circumferential end surface 1404 b (end surface on the second magnet side) of the protrusion 1404 is formed to abut on the longitudinal end surface 1402 c of the second magnet 1402 as well as the first magnet 1401. For this reason, the protrusions 1404 engage in the circumferential direction with respect to the respective magnets 1401 and 1402, and when the rotor 40 is rotated, they function as detents for the respective magnets 1401 and 1402. The longitudinal end surface 1401c of the first magnet 1401 corresponds to the end surface of the first magnet 1401 in the circumferential direction. Similarly, the longitudinal direction end surface 1402c of the second magnet 1402 corresponds to the end surface of the second magnet 1402 in the circumferential direction.

As described above, the magnet holding portion 1403 is in contact with the non-stator side peripheral surface 1401a and the longitudinal end surface 1401c of the first magnet 1401. That is, the magnet holding portion 1403 is formed to cover the peripheral surface of the first magnet 1401 other than the stator side outer surface 1401 b. Therefore, at the longitudinal end of the first magnet 1401, the magnetic flux passes between the stator outer surface 1401 b and the non-stator side circumferential surface 1401 a by passing through the projecting portion 1404 to be self-shorted (self-contained) It becomes.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 77, the longitudinal direction end surface 1401c of the first magnet 1401 is in contact with the protrusion 1404 which is a soft magnetic material. Therefore, at the longitudinal end of the first magnet 1401, at least a portion of the magnetic flux generated from the stator outer surface 1401b (when the stator outer surface 1401b has N pole) is induced to the protrusion 1404 having small magnetic resistance. , And passes through the protrusion 1404 toward the side surface 1401a opposite to the stator side of the first magnet 1401 and is self-contained (shorted). In FIG. 77, the broken arrow indicates the flow of magnetic flux. The same applies to the case where the stator side outer surface 1401 b is a south pole. For this reason, the magnetic flux density to the stator 50 is likely to decrease as it approaches the longitudinal end (i.e., q-axis) of the first magnet 1401 as compared to the longitudinal center (i.e., d-axis). It has become. As a result, the surface magnetic flux density distribution of the magnet unit 42 approaches a sine wave shape.

Further, the tip end of the projecting portion 1404 is formed to project inward in the radial direction more than the first magnet 1401. In other words, the protrusion is such that the distance from the stator 50 to the tip of the protrusion 1404 (dimension L42) is shorter than the distance from the stator 50 to the stator outer surface 1401b of the first magnet 1401 (dimension L40). 1404 is formed. The distance from the stator 50 to the stator-side outer surface 1401 b of the first magnet 1401 is different at the longitudinal center and the end side, but here refers to the distance (dimension L40) at the longitudinal center.

On the other hand, the protrusion 1404 is set so that the distance from the stator 50 to the tip of the protrusion 1404 is approximately the same as the distance from the stator 50 to the outer surface (radially inner surface) of the second magnet 1402 on the stator side. Is formed. In addition, although the distance from the stator 50 to the surface by the side of the stator of the 2nd magnet 1402 differs in a longitudinal direction center and an edge part, it points out the distance in a longitudinal direction end here.

As such, by arranging the protrusion 1404 that can be an iron core between the d-axis and the q-axis, the inductance in the protrusion 1404 is increased. Therefore, reverse saliency can be obtained in the projecting portion 1404, field weakening can be performed, and reluctance torque becomes large.

In addition, since the magnet magnetic path of the second magnet 1402 is directed in the circumferential direction, the magnetic flux from the stator 50 can be easily guided to the q axis, and even though it is an SPM rotor, it obtains reverse saliency and reluctance torque Output becomes possible, and high speed rotation at the time of phase advance control as well as high torque can be obtained.

In addition, since the magnet magnetic path of the 1st magnet 1401 is provided in linear form along the short direction, the magnetic flux orthogonal to a longitudinal direction generate | occur | produces from the stator side outer surface 1401b. For this reason, the protrusion 1404 is projected to the side of the stator with respect to the stator outer surface 1401b of the first magnet 1401 so as to be shorter than the position of the stator outer surface 1401b. The magnetic flux generated from 1401 b can be easily guided to the protrusion 1404.

That is, at the longitudinal direction end of the first magnet 1401, self-shorting tends to occur, and the magnetic flux density can be easily reduced. Further, the amount of magnetic flux self-shorting (the amount of magnetic flux passing through the protrusion 1404) depends on the shortest point in the circumferential width dimension in the path through which the self-shorting magnetic flux passes. Therefore, by adjusting the width dimension of the projecting portion 1404, it is possible to adjust the reduction amount of the magnetic flux density to approach a sine wave shape.

And each magnet 1401, 1402 is being fixed to the magnet holding part 1403 by resin adhesive. When the magnets 1401 and 1402 are inserted and fixed between the protrusions 1404, since the magnets 1401 and 1402 are rectangular, the resin on the stator outer surface 1401 b from the longitudinal end to the center The adhesive will run out (not shown). By the adhesive protruding to the outer surface 1401 b of the stator, the first magnet 1401 can be prevented from dropping off in the radial direction. In the eighth embodiment, the protrusion 1404 is in contact with the first magnet 1401 and the second magnet 1402, but may be separated.

The eighth embodiment has the following effects.

An air gap (air gap) between the first magnet 1401 and the stator 50 in the radial direction gradually widens from the d axis as the pole center to the q axis side as the pole boundary. In other words, the air gap gradually narrows as it approaches the d axis from the q axis side. The first magnet 1401 is a magnet (parallel oriented magnet) provided with a magnet magnetic path in the radial direction. Therefore, the magnetic flux density is gradually increased from the q-axis side toward the d-axis, and the magnet unit 42 having a surface magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave can be obtained. Thereby, it is possible to moderate the change in magnetic flux and to suppress the eddy current loss in the stator 50. It is also possible to reduce cogging torque and torque ripple.

Further, the protrusions 1404 of the magnet holding portion 1403 are disposed in the gaps between the magnets 1401 and 1402, and the protrusions 1404 protrude to the stator side more than the first magnet 1401. Therefore, at the longitudinal end of the first magnet 1401, the magnetic flux generated from the stator outer surface 1401b of the first magnet 1401 easily passes through the projecting portion 1404 to cause a self short circuit, and the magnetic flux density at the longitudinal end Can be lowered. As a result, the surface magnetic flux density distribution of the magnet unit 42 can be made closer to a sine wave.

Further, the protrusion 1404 is disposed between the d-axis and the q-axis, and provided so as to protrude further to the stator side than the first magnet 1401. For this reason, while the magnetic flux easily passes through the portion provided with the projecting portion 1404, the magnetic flux hardly passes along the d-axis. That is, while the inductance is increased at the portion where the projecting portion 1404 is provided, the inductance is decreased at the d-axis, and has a reverse saliency. For this reason, even if the magnetic flux is self-shorted and the magnet torque is reduced, reluctance torque (iron core torque) is generated, and the torque can be increased.

Each of the magnets 1401 and 1402 has a rectangular cross-sectional shape, and the short direction is parallel to the radial direction. Each of the magnets 1401 and 1402 is a magnet of parallel orientation in which the magnetization direction is one direction and a plurality of magnet magnetic paths are provided in parallel. For this reason, the magnets 1401 and 1402 can be easily manufactured as compared with the magnet having the pole anisotropic structure and the arc-shaped magnet. Since the magnets 1401 and 1402 are rectangular, there is little cancellation of magnetic flux and it is easy to lengthen the magnet magnetic path.

Further, the rotary electric machine 10 adopts the outer rotor structure, and by arranging the rectangular first magnet 1401 so that the longitudinal direction thereof is orthogonal to the radial direction, the first magnet in the radial direction can be easily obtained. The air gap between the armature and the armature can be gradually narrowed from the q-axis side toward the d-axis side.

Also, by adopting the Halbach arrangement, even if the magnetic flux is self-shorted by the protruding portion 1404 and the air gap on the q-axis side is enlarged, the magnetic flux density in the d-axis is increased by the second magnet 1402 to increase torque. be able to.

Moreover, in the rotary electric machine 10, a toothless (slotless) structure is employed. Thus, it is possible to eliminate the inter-conductor member that distorts the flow of the magnetic flux generated by the stator winding 51 or the magnet unit 42 on the stator side. Therefore, the surface magnetic flux density distribution of the magnet unit 42 can be easily maintained in a sine wave shape. Further, in the case where the projecting portion 1404 is provided, it is possible to appropriately pass the magnetic flux generated by the stator winding 51 to the projecting portion 1404 and to increase the reluctance torque.

The first magnet 1401 which is a linear orientation magnet (parallel orientation magnet) has a maximum energy product larger than that of a radial orientation magnet or a polar anisotropic orientation magnet. With a neodymium magnet, the maximum energy product has a capacity of about 1.2 times. By adopting the first magnet 1401 of linear orientation, the residual magnetic flux density can be designed to be high, and the coercive force can be designed to be high.

Between the first magnet 1401 and the second magnet 1402, a protrusion 1404 which is a soft magnetic material is disposed. Thereby, the magnetic flux generated from the circumferential end surface of the second magnet 1402 can be diverted to the anti-stator side circumferential surface 1401 a of the first magnet 1401 via the protrusion 1404. Therefore, the magnetic flux density in the d axis can be improved.

(Another example in the eighth embodiment)
A magnet unit 2400 described below may be employed in a rotary electric machine having an inner rotor structure. As shown in FIG. 78, the magnet unit 2400 is configured using a magnet arrangement called a Halbach arrangement. That is, the magnet unit 2400 has a first magnet 2401 whose radial direction is the magnetization direction, and a second magnet 2402 whose circumferential direction is the magnetization direction. The first magnets 2401 are disposed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction, and the second magnets 2402 are disposed at positions between the adjacent first magnets 2401 in the circumferential direction.

Each of the magnets 2401 and 2402 is formed to have a rectangular cross-sectional shape. Further, at the longitudinal center of each of the magnets 2401 and 2402, the longitudinal direction is disposed to be orthogonal to the radial direction. The dimension (thickness) of the second magnet 2402 in the lateral direction is substantially the same as the dimension (thickness) of the first magnet 2401 in the lateral direction. In this modification, the lateral direction and the longitudinal direction of each of the magnets 2401 and 2402 may be interchanged.

In addition, the first magnets 2401 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction so that the poles on the side (radial direction outer side) facing the stator 50 alternately become the N pole and the S pole. In addition, the second magnets 2402 are arranged adjacent to the first magnets 2401 so that their polarities alternate in the circumferential direction. Thus, the magnetic flux density in the first magnet 1401 can be increased. Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the d-axis serving as the magnetic pole center coincides with the longitudinal center of the first magnet 2401, and the q-axis serving as the magnetic pole boundary coincides with the longitudinal center of the second magnet 2402. Become. In this example, the longitudinal center of each of the magnets 2401 and 2402 corresponds to the circumferential center, and the longitudinal end of each of the magnets 2401 and 2402 corresponds to a circumferential end.

In the first magnet 2401, a plurality of linear magnet magnetic paths are formed between the opposite stator side circumferential surface 2401 a and the stator side outer surface 2401 b, and the magnet magnetic path at the center in the longitudinal direction is in the radial direction It becomes parallel. In the second magnet 2402, a plurality of linear magnet magnetic paths are formed between the longitudinal end faces 2402c, and the magnet magnetic paths are parallel to the circumferential direction at the center in the longitudinal direction. That is, at the center in the longitudinal direction, the magnet magnetic path is orthogonal to the radial direction. The direction parallel to the radial direction includes, for example, a direction that forms an acute angle with the radial direction. The same applies to the direction parallel to the circumferential direction. In the second magnet 2402, an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path may be provided along the circumferential direction. Further, in the first magnet 2401, a plurality of magnet magnetic paths may be provided radially along the radial direction.

The rotor 40 has a motor core 2403 that holds the magnets 2401 and 2402 and also functions as a back core. The motor core 2403 is a field element core member made of a soft magnetic material provided in a cylindrical shape, and is fixed to the rotating shaft 11. Housing concave portions 2404 are formed on the outer peripheral surface side of the motor core 2403, and the magnets 1401 and 1402 are housed and fixed in the housing concave portions 2404. Therefore, the non-stator side circumferential surfaces 2401 a and 2402 a of the magnets 2401 and 2402 abut on the bottom surface of the housing recess 2404 of the motor core 2403.

Further, the gap between the first magnet 2401 and the second magnet 2402 is filled with the side wall 2405 of the housing recess 2404. That is, in this another example, the side wall 2405 corresponds to a protrusion that protrudes in the radial direction from the gap between the magnets 2401 and 2402 toward the stator. The side wall 2405 is disposed between the d axis and the q axis.

The side wall 2405 is formed to be thicker as it approaches from the proximal side to the distal side (radially outer side). Further, the side wall 2405 is provided over the entire area of each of the magnets 2401 and 2402 in the axial direction.

The circumferential end face 2405 a (end face on the first magnet side) of the side wall 2405 abuts on the longitudinal end face 2401 c of the first magnet 2401. More specifically, the circumferential end surface 2405a of the side wall 2405 is formed so as to abut on the stator outer circumferential surface 2401a of the first magnet 2401 to the stator outer surface 2401b. That is, the circumferential end surface 2405 a of the side wall 2405 is formed to abut on the entire area of the longitudinal end surface 2401 c in the radial direction. The circumferential end face 2405 b (end face on the second magnet side) of the side wall 2405 abuts also on the longitudinal end face 2402 c of the second magnet 2402 in the same manner as the first magnet 2401. Therefore, the side wall 2405 engages with the magnets 2401 and 2402 in the circumferential direction, and functions as a detent for the magnets 2401 and 2402 when the rotor 40 rotates.

As described above, the motor core 2403 is in contact with the non-stator side circumferential surface 2401 a and the longitudinal end surface 2401 c of the first magnet 2401. That is, the motor core 2403 is formed to cover the peripheral surface of the first magnet 2401 other than the stator side outer surface 2401 b. Therefore, at the longitudinal end of the first magnet 2401, the magnetic flux easily passes through the side wall 2405 and becomes self-shorting between the stator side outer surface 2401 b and the non-stator side peripheral surface 2401 a (indicated by a broken line) ). For this reason, the magnetic flux density to the stator 50 is likely to decrease as it approaches the longitudinal end (i.e., q-axis) of the first magnet 1401 as compared to the longitudinal center (i.e., d-axis). It has become. As a result, the surface magnetic flux density distribution of the magnet unit 42 approaches a sine wave shape.

In addition, the sidewall 2405 that can be an iron core is disposed between the d-axis and the q-axis, whereby the inductance in the sidewall 2405 is increased. Therefore, reverse saliency can be obtained at the side wall 2405, and the reluctance torque is increased.

In addition, since the magnet magnetic path of the 1st magnet 2401 is provided linearly along the transversal direction, the magnetic flux which generate | occur | produces orthogonally from the stator side outer surface 2401b is generated. For this reason, by making the height dimension of the side wall 2405 substantially the same as the thickness dimension of the first magnet 2401 in the radial direction, it is fixed compared to the case where the thickness dimension of the first magnet 2401 is made lower. The magnetic flux generated from the daughter outer surface 2401 b can be easily guided to the protrusion 1404. This is because the surface where the magnetic flux is generated and the tip of the side wall 2405 are close. For this reason, self-shorting tends to occur, and the magnetic flux density can be easily reduced.

Further, the amount of magnetic flux self-shorting (the amount of magnetic flux passing through the protrusion 1404) depends on the shortest point in the circumferential width dimension in the path through which the self-shorting magnetic flux passes. For this reason, by adjusting the width dimension at the base end of the side wall 2405, it is possible to adjust the amount of reduction of the magnetic flux density to approach a sine wave shape.

In the eighth embodiment, the thickness dimension in the lateral direction of the first magnet 1401 is made larger than the thickness dimension in the lateral direction of the second magnet 1402, but the thickness dimension of the same extent It is also good. For example, as shown in FIG. Also in this case, the magnetic flux density on the d axis can be improved. In addition, movement of the second magnet 1402 in the circumferential direction can be restricted by the protruding portion 1404, and the rotation can be appropriately prevented.

· In the magnet unit 2400 of the above another example, as shown in FIG. 80, the stator side outer surface 2401b of the first magnet 2401 is formed to be convex toward the stator side, and air is approached from the d axis toward the q axis side. The gap may be made wider. Thereby, the surface magnetic flux density distribution can be made close to a sine wave shape. In addition, as shown in FIG. 80, it is desirable that a side wall 2405 as a projecting portion is formed to project to the stator side more than the first magnet 2401. As a result, the inductance is increased at the side wall 2405 and has a reverse saliency, and it is possible to generate a reluctance torque and to increase the torque. Further, the stator side outer surface 1401b of the first magnet 1401 can be formed into an arc shape along the circumferential direction, and the design of the rotary electric machine 10 is facilitated.

The ninth embodiment
In the ninth embodiment, the configuration of the magnet unit 42 of the first embodiment is changed. Hereinafter, the configuration of the magnet unit 42 will be mainly described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the magnet unit 42 has a plurality of magnets 2501 arranged side by side in the circumferential direction. In each of these magnets 2501, the easy magnetization axis is arc-shaped such that the direction of the easy magnetization axis is parallel to the d axis on the side of the d axis which is the pole center, as compared to the side of the q axis which is the pole boundary. An oriented magnet magnetic path is formed along the easy axis of magnetization that is oriented.

In the magnet unit 42, the magnetization directions (magnetization directions) of the magnets 2501 adjacent in the circumferential direction are reversed (reversed) so that the polarities of the d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction are made different. That is, attachment of the magnets 2501 adjacent in the circumferential direction such that the magnetic flux is concentrated and the d axis whose polarity is the N pole and the d axis whose magnetic flux is diffused and the polarity is the S pole alternate in the circumferential direction The magnetic directions are made different.

To describe the magnet 2501 in more detail, the magnets 2501 are provided symmetrically about the q axis. The magnet 2501 is such that the easy magnetization axis is parallel to the d axis or near parallel to the d axis at a portion near the d axis, and the easy magnetization axis is orthogonal to the q axis or orthogonal to the q axis at a portion near the q axis It is oriented so as to form an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path having a direction close to. Then, as shown in FIG. 82, a plurality of arc-shaped magnet magnetic paths are formed around a center point set on the q-axis. This magnet magnetic path has an orientation arc centering on a central point set on the q-axis and passing through a first intersection point P51 of the d-axis and the stator outer surface 2505 (armature side circumferential surface) of the magnet 2501 Includes magnetic path on the OA. The orientation arc OA is preferably set so that the tangent at the first intersection point P51 on the orientation arc approaches parallel to the d axis. In addition, it is desirable that the orientation arc OA be set so as to be in contact with the anti-stator side circumferential surface 2504 in the q-axis or to pass through it (in the present embodiment, radially inward).

Also, the magnets 2501 are provided symmetrically about the q-axis, and are provided between the d-axes adjacent in the circumferential direction. That is, the magnet 2501 is provided in a circular arc shape along the circumferential direction across the d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction. More specifically, the orientation arc OA is provided between the d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction, and the magnet 2501 is circumferential such that a magnetic path is formed at least over the entire orientation arc OA. It is provided between adjacent d axes in the direction.

Therefore, of the magnet magnetic paths of the magnet 2501, the magnet magnetic path along the orientation arc OA is likely to be long, and as the distance from the orientation arc OA is increased, the magnet magnetic path is likely to be short. For example, among the magnet magnetic paths of the magnet 2501, in the part near the q-axis, the magnet magnetic path (indicated by a broken line) passing through the part on the stator side rather than the anti-stator side tends to be shorter . Also, for example, in the portion near the d axis in the magnet magnetic path of the magnet 2501, the magnet magnetic path (shown by a broken line) passing through the portion on the side opposite to the stator than the stator side tends to be shorter. ing. The shape of the magnet magnetic path (for example, orientation arc OA) may be an arc shape which is a part of a perfect circle, or may be an arc shape which is a part of an ellipse. In addition, although the center of the arc is on the q axis, it may not be on the q axis.

The magnet unit 42 is provided in an annular shape by arranging the arc-shaped magnets 2501 in which the magnet magnetic paths are respectively formed in this manner in the circumferential direction.

Incidentally, as described above, the magnet unit 42 desirably has a surface magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave shape, and the magnetic flux density in the d axis is desirably as high as possible. For this reason, it is preferable to use the magnet 2501 provided between the d-axes adjacent in the circumferential direction and in which arc-shaped magnet magnetic paths are formed between the d-axes.

However, when such a magnet 2501 is used, in order to suppress the magnetic flux leakage from the opposite stator side (radial direction outer side) of the magnet unit 42, the second intersection point P52 of the q axis and the orientation arc OA in the radial direction It is desirable to design the thickness dimension of the magnet so that the magnet is present. However, when using a magnet with a large magnetic flux density such that the intrinsic coercivity is 400 [kA / m] or more and the residual magnetic flux density is 1.0 [T] or more, an expensive rare earth material-containing magnet is used. It is common to adopt. For this reason, when making the thickness dimension of a magnet constant over the whole region in the circumferential direction, if a magnet of such a thickness dimension as suppressing magnet leakage is used, the amount of magnets tends to be large, which causes a problem in cost. So, in 9th Embodiment, the magnet 2501 of the magnet unit 42 is comprised as follows.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the radial direction, the dimension from the stator 50 to the non-stator side circumferential surface 2504 (anti-armature side circumferential surface) of the magnet 2501 is on the d axis side compared to the q axis side. The magnet 2501 is provided so as to shorten the length. Describing in more detail, the anti-stator side circumferential surface 2504 of each magnet 2501 and the curved surface portion 2504 a along the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 43 have a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees) with the radial direction. And a flat portion 2504 b to be an angle).

The flat portions 2504 b are provided on the d-axis side of the magnet 2501 in the circumferential direction, that is, on both end portions in the circumferential direction. The flat surface portion 2504 b is provided so as to be closer in parallel to the radial direction than the curved surface portion 2504 a. The flat portion 2504 b is provided to be inclined radially inward. That is, the flat portion 2504b which is an inclined surface with respect to the radial direction is provided so as to scrape the corner on the side opposite to the stator of the magnet 2501, and the thickness dimension L52 of the radial direction both end portions is It gets shorter (thinner) as it gets closer.

Then, the magnet magnetic path on the orientation arc OA is maintained, and the flat portion 2504 b is provided to avoid the orientation arc OA (do not intersect). That is, in the ninth embodiment, the anti-stator side circumferential surface 2504 is disposed radially outward of the orientation arc OA, and is provided along the orientation arc OA. The flat surface portion 2504b may be changed to be a curved surface as long as it is oblique to the radial direction. For example, it may be a curved surface along the orientation arc OA.

On the other hand, the outer diameter of the stator 50 (that is, the outer diameter of the stator winding 51) is constant. Therefore, by providing the flat portion 2504b in the magnet 2501, in the radial direction, the dimension from the stator 50 to the counter stator side circumferential surface 2504 of the magnet 2501 is on the d axis side compared to the q axis side. Will be shorter. That is, compared to the thickness dimension L51 in the radial direction from the stator 50 to the curved surface portion 2504a, the thickness dimension L52 in the radial direction from the stator 50 to the flat portion 2504b is shorter.

The magnet 2501 is provided such that the thickness dimension in the radial direction of the magnet 2501 on the q-axis is thicker than the thickness dimension of the magnet 2501 on the d-axis side. Specifically, each magnet 2501 has a stator side outer surface 2505 which is a concentric circular arc with respect to the curved surface portion 2504a of the non-stator side peripheral surface 2504 (that is, the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43). . Thereby, compared with the thickness dimension from stator outer surface 2505 to curved surface portion 2504 a of stator outer peripheral surface 2504 in the radial direction, the planar portion of stator outer surface 2505 to stator outer peripheral surface 2504 The thickness dimension up to 2504 b is short (thin).

In the ninth embodiment, the thickness dimension in the radial direction of the magnet 2501 on the q-axis is equal to the thickness dimension from the stator outer surface 2505 to the curved surface portion 2504 a. Further, the thickness dimension from the stator side outer surface 2505 to the flat portion 2504 b becomes shorter as it approaches the d axis. As a result, a plurality of magnet magnetic paths having different lengths, which are magnet magnetic paths concentric to the orientation arc OA, are formed in the magnet 2501.

And, by arranging the magnets 2501 side by side in the circumferential direction, the magnet unit 42 is provided along the axial direction with a recess 2502 that opens on the side opposite to the stator (cylindrical part) centering on the d axis. It will be. In this case, as shown in FIG. 82, the recess 2502 is provided closer to the d axis than the q axis, and opens about the d axis. In addition, the recess 2502 is provided to avoid the orientation arc OA.

As described above, in the portion near the d-axis in the magnet magnetic path of the magnet 2501, the magnet magnetic path (indicated by the broken line) passing through the portion on the side opposite to the stator side is shorter than the stator side. It is easy to become. More specifically, the magnet magnetic path in the part on the side opposite to the stator relative to the orientation arc OA is shorter than the orientation arc OA, and does not contribute much to the improvement of the magnetic flux density in the d axis. And when a magnet magnetic path is short, it can be said that it is a part which is easy to demagnetize by the influence of an external magnetic field (for example, the magnetic field from stator winding 51). Therefore, the magnetic flux density in the d-axis hardly affects (the magnetic flux density does not decrease) even if the recess 2502 is provided in the portion on the opposite side of the stator of the magnet 2501 near the d-axis.

On the other hand, the cylindrical portion 43 is provided with a convex portion 2503 engaged with the concave portion 2502 of the magnet 2501 in the circumferential direction. Describing in detail, as shown in FIG. 82, a convex portion 2503 is provided on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43 so as to protrude in the radial direction toward the magnet unit side (that is, the stator side). These convex portions 2503 are formed such that the width dimension in the circumferential direction becomes shorter as it approaches the stator side in the radial direction so that the cross section becomes a triangular shape in accordance with the shape of the concave portion 2502. That is, a slope is provided from the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 43 toward the apex of the protrusion 2503, and the slope is an angle according to the angle of the slope (flat portion 2504 b) of the recess 2502 (that is, the radial direction And an angle of 45 degrees). Further, the dimension (height dimension) of the convex portion 2503 in the radial direction is the same as the dimension (depth dimension) of the recess 2502. Thereby, it becomes possible to engage the convex part 2503 and the concave part 2502 suitably.

The convex portion 2503 and the concave portion 2502 may be formed at any position in the range of the magnet unit 42 in the axial direction. For example, the convex portion 2503 and the concave portion 2502 may be provided in the entire range of the magnet unit 42 along the axial direction. Also, the projections 2503 and the recesses 2502 need not be provided for all d axes, and may be smaller than the number of d axes. For example, the convex portion 2503 and the concave portion 2502 may be provided at every 90 degree angle interval. Further, as long as the number of concave portions 2502 is larger than that of the convex portions 2503, the number of convex portions 2503 and the number of concave portions 2502 may be arbitrarily changed.

According to the ninth embodiment, the following excellent effects are obtained.

By having a magnet unit having a surface magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave, torque can be enhanced, and eddy current loss can be suppressed because of a gradual change in magnetic flux compared to a radial magnet. It is also possible to reduce torque ripple. When the intrinsic coercivity of the magnet is 400 kA / m or more and the residual magnetic flux density is 1.0 T or more (ie, the magnetic flux density in the d axis is increased), a sine wave is obtained. In order to obtain a magnet unit having a near surface magnetic flux density distribution, it is preferable to use a magnet provided between d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction, in which a circular arc-shaped magnet magnetic path is formed.

When such a magnet is used, in order to form a magnetic flux path on the orientation arc OA in order to suppress magnetic flux leakage from the side opposite to the stator of the magnetic unit, a predetermined thickness dimension in the radial direction is set. It is desirable to use a magnet. However, when using a magnet that has an intrinsic coercive force of 400 [kA / m] or more and a residual magnetic flux density of 1.0 [T] or more, adopting a magnet containing an expensive rare earth material It is general and causes problems in cost.

By the way, when it is a magnet provided between d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction and a magnet having an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path is formed, the part on the side opposite to the stator in the part near the d axis is The magnet magnetic path is likely to be short. That is, it is a portion which is easily demagnetized, and is a portion which does not contribute to the improvement of the magnetic flux density in the d axis. Therefore, even if this portion is eliminated, the influence on the magnetic flux density generated from the d-axis is small (the magnetic flux density hardly decreases), and the torque hardly decreases.

So, in the ninth embodiment, in the radial direction, the dimension from the stator 50 to the anti-stator side circumferential surface 2504 of the magnet 2501 is shorter on the d-axis side than on the q-axis side. Configured. As a result, in the portion near the d axis of the magnet 2501, the portion on the side opposite to the stator can be reduced. That is, it is possible to reduce the amount of magnet without affecting the magnetic flux density by reducing the portion susceptible to demagnetization. As a result, for example, compared to the case where the magnet has a predetermined thickness dimension over the entire circumferential direction, the portion susceptible to demagnetization is eliminated to provide the concave portion 2502, and The amount of magnets can be reduced while suppressing the decrease.

In addition, the magnet 2501 is provided between the d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction, and the magnet magnetic path is provided in a circular arc shape across the d axes so as to straddle the q axis. Even if the dimension is reduced, the magnet magnetic path can be made longer. That is, compared with a radial magnet provided with a linear magnet magnetic path, the magnet magnetic path can be made longer, and the magnetic flux density in the d-axis can be improved while suppressing the thickness dimension of the magnet 2501. Can.

The magnets 2501 are provided symmetrically about the q-axis and pass a first intersection point P51 between the d-axis and the stator outer surface 2505 of the magnet 2501 with the center point set on the q-axis as the center. It is provided between the d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction so that a magnet magnetic path is formed along the orientation arc OA. For this reason, the length of the magnet magnetic path on the orientation arc OA contributing to the magnetic flux density on the d axis can be made sufficiently long, and the magnetic flux density on the d axis can be improved.

In the magnet 2501, the thickness dimension in the radial direction of the magnet 2501 on the q-axis is provided to be thicker than the thickness dimension of the magnet 2501 on the d-axis side. As a result, the magnet 2501 includes magnet magnetic paths on a plurality of concentric arcs of different lengths. Therefore, the surface magnetic flux density distribution of the magnet unit 42 can be made to approach a sine wave.

Further, a recess 2502 is provided on the side opposite to the stator side (cylindrical part side) of the magnet unit 42 and on the d axis side of the q axis in the opposite side to the stator side, that is, the cylinder side. The cylindrical portion 43 is provided with a convex portion 2503 engaged with the concave portion 2502. This makes it possible to prevent the magnet unit 42 from rotating while setting the magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave shape and increasing the magnetic flux density on the d axis.

In addition, in order to secure strength that can preferably perform rotation prevention, the width dimension in the circumferential direction of the recess 2502 and the protrusion 2503 (the width dimension of the opening of the recess 2502 and the width dimension of the base of the protrusion 2503) It is set. For this reason, it is possible to preferably prevent rotation. Even in the case where the width dimension is set as described above, the corresponding portion is a portion which is easily demagnetized, and therefore the magnetic flux in the d axis even if the recess 2502 is provided compared to the case where the recess 2502 is not provided. It is possible to suppress the decrease in density.

(Another example in the ninth embodiment)
In the ninth embodiment, the shape of the magnet 2501 may be changed. At that time, the dimensions from the stator 50 to the counter stator side circumferential surface 2504 of the magnet 2501 in the radial direction are compared with the q axis side, provided between the d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction. It is desirable to change the shape of the magnet 2501 so that the d-axis side is shorter. For example, as shown in FIG. 83, the shape of the magnet may be changed so that the cross section has a convex lens shape. Specifically, the magnets 3501 shown in FIG. 83 are provided between d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction, and are provided symmetrically about the q axis. The anti-stator side peripheral surface 3502 of the magnet 3501 is formed in a curved shape, and a plurality of magnet magnetic paths are provided in an arc shape along the anti-stator side peripheral surface 3502.

In the magnet unit 42, the magnetization directions (magnetization directions) of the magnets 3501 adjacent in the circumferential direction are reversed (reversed) so that the polarities of the d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction are made different. That is, attachment of the magnets 3501 adjacent in the circumferential direction such that the magnetic flux is concentrated and the d axis having the N pole and the d axis having the magnetic pole diffuse and the d axis having the S pole alternate in the circumferential direction The magnetic directions are made different.

The magnet magnetic path includes at least an orientation arc OA, and the orientation arc OA is provided along the anti-stator side circumferential surface 3502. In other words, it passes the first intersection point P51 between the d-axis and the stator outer surface 3503 about the center point O set on the q-axis, and is opposite the stator side along the orientation arc OA that is convex outward. A circumferential surface 3502 is provided. As described above, the magnet 3501 is configured such that the dimension from the stator 50 to the anti-stator side peripheral surface 3502 of the magnet 3501 in the radial direction is shorter on the d-axis side than on the q-axis side. It will be.

In the above another example, the anti-stator side circumferential surface 3502 may be provided along a concentric arc disposed outside the orientation arc OA. Also, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), the cross-sectional shape of the magnet 3501 may be crescent-shaped. Further, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), an end face along the radial direction may be provided in the circumferential direction.

On the other hand, the stator side outer surface 3503 of the magnet 3501 is a curved surface that is convex toward the stator side, and the end of the stator side outer surface 3503 in the circumferential direction is connected to the end of the non-stator side peripheral surface 3502 It is configured. That is, the circumferential surface of the magnet 3501 is constituted by the stator side outer surface 3503 and the non-stator side circumferential surface 3502. The curvature of the stator side outer surface 3503 is smaller than the curvature of the anti-stator side peripheral surface 3502 (that is, the stator side outer surface 3503 has a larger radius of curvature). As described above, the thickness dimension in the radial direction of the magnet 3501 is configured such that the q-axis side is thicker than the d-axis side, and becomes thinner as it approaches the d-axis side. As a result, a plurality of concentric circular arc-shaped magnet magnetic paths having different lengths of magnetic paths are provided, and the surface magnetic flux density distribution can be made closer to a sine wave shape.

As shown in FIG. 85, the length of the magnet magnetic path can be increased by increasing the thickness dimension on the q-axis side. That is, since it becomes difficult to demagnetize, it becomes possible to set it as magnetic flux density distribution near a sine wave shape.

And the magnet unit 42 is provided with the magnet holding part 3504 which accommodates the magnet 3501 formed in this way. The magnet holding unit 3504 accommodates the magnets 3501 such that the magnets 3501 are arranged in the circumferential direction. Specifically, the magnet holding portion 3504 is formed of a cylindrical soft magnetic body, and a magnet housing hole 3505 is provided between the inner peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface along the axial direction. The magnet housing hole 3505 is provided along the shape of the magnet 3501 in cross section. The magnet 3501 is fixed by an adhesive, a resin, or the like in a state of being accommodated in the magnet accommodation hole 3505. The magnet holding portion 3504 is fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43. Thus, the magnet unit 42 is disposed to face the stator 50. Therefore, another example shown in FIG. 83 is an IPM type rotating electric machine.

The shape of the magnet holding portion 3504 may be arbitrarily changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 86, a through hole 3510 penetrating in the axial direction may be provided radially outward of the counter stator side circumferential surface 3502 of the magnet 3501. By providing the through holes 3510, a fluid such as air passes, so that the magnet unit 42 can be suitably cooled. When this through hole 3510 is provided, the thickness dimension of the opposite armature side covering portion 3511 covering the opposite stator side circumferential surface 3502 is compared to the thickness dimension of the armature side covering portion 3512 covering the stator side outer surface 3503. It may be thin. At that time, the thickness dimension of the opposite armature side covering portion 3511 covering the opposite stator side circumferential surface 3502 is a thickness dimension having a strength capable of holding the magnet 3501, and from the stator 50 at the time of rotation. It is desirable to make the thickness dimension such that the magnetic saturation occurs due to the magnetic flux. By making the thickness dimension such that the magnetic saturation occurs, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of magnetic flux leakage from the side of the side peripheral surface 3502 of the stator. Also, the magnet holding portion 3504 may be a nonmagnetic material. Also, the magnet holding portion 3504 may be formed so that the stator side outer surface 3503 of the magnet 3501 is exposed. That is, the magnet holding portion 3504 (more specifically, the armature side covering portion 3512) may not be interposed between the magnet 3501 and the stator 50. That is, the SPM type may be used.

In addition, the magnet 2501 in the ninth embodiment and the magnet 3501 may be adopted in a rotary electric machine having an inner rotor structure (inner structure). When the magnet 3501 is employed in the case of a rotary electric machine having an inner rotor structure (inner structure), the curvature of the stator outer surface 3503 is set so that the stator outer surface 3503 is provided along the circumferential direction. You may Thereby, the magnet 3501 does not protrude to the stator side, and the design becomes easy.

In the magnet 2501 according to the ninth embodiment, the thickness of the magnet 2501 in the radial direction so that the magnet exists in the radial direction to the second intersection point P52 of the q axis and the orientation arc OA in order to suppress the magnetic flux leakage. The dimensions (especially the thickness dimension on the q axis) were designed (see FIG. 87 (a)). The same applies to the magnet 3501 in another example. That is, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), if the magnet does not exist at the second intersection point P52 of the q axis and the orientation arc OA in the radial direction, the magnetic flux leakage from the opposite stator side of the magnet unit (solid line This is because an arrow (shown by an arrow) occurs. In addition, in FIG. 87, the schematic diagram which expand | deployed the magnet in linear form is shown, and the lower side of the figure is a stator side, and the upper side is a counter stator side.

As another example of this, in the radial direction, a rotor core as a field element core member is laminated to a magnet, and a part or all of the rotor core is more than a second intersection point of q axis and orientation arc. It may be arranged on the stator side (armature side) in the radial direction. An example of this will be described based on FIG. FIG. 88 shows a schematic view in which the cylindrical portion 43 and the magnet unit 42 are expanded linearly, and the lower side of the figure is the stator side (armature side) and the upper side is the opposite stator side (anti-armature side). ).

As shown in FIG. 88, the magnets 4501 of the magnet unit 42 are provided symmetrically about the q-axis similarly to the magnet 2501, and on the d-axis side, the magnetization easy axis is compared with the q-axis side. The magnetization easy axis is oriented in an arc shape so that the direction is parallel to the d axis, and an arc shaped magnet magnetic path is formed along the magnetization easy axis. The magnet 4501 has a plurality of concentric arc-shaped magnet magnetic paths formed around a center point O set on the q-axis. This magnet magnetic path is centered on a central point O set on the q-axis, and passes through a first intersection point P51 of the d-axis and the stator outer surface 4505 (armature side circumferential surface) of the magnet 4501 It includes a magnetic path on the arc OA.

The orientation arc OA is set such that the tangent TA1 at the first intersection point P51 on the orientation arc OA is parallel to the d axis. In FIG. 88, the center point O is the intersection of the q-axis and the stator outer surface 4505, but the actual magnet 4501 has an arc shape along the circumferential direction of the rotor 40. For this reason, when the curvature of the magnet 4501 is taken into consideration, the center point O is disposed on the outer side in the radial direction than the stator side outer surface 4505.

And as shown in FIG. 88, the magnet unit 42 is being fixed to the internal peripheral surface of the cylindrical part 43 which is a soft-magnetic body. That is, the cylindrical portion 43 corresponds to a field element core member (rotor core), and is stacked on the magnet 4501 in the radial direction. Then, in FIG. 88, the entire cylindrical portion 43 is disposed closer to the stator in the radial direction than the second intersection point P52 of the q axis and the orientation arc OA. That is, the thickness dimension in the radial direction is thinner than the magnet shown in FIG. 87 (a), and the cylindrical portion 43 of the soft magnetic material is disposed instead.

Further, in this other example, the saturation magnetic flux density of the cylindrical portion 43 is about 2.0 T, while the residual magnetic flux density of the magnet 4501 is about 1.0 T. That is, the saturation magnetic flux density of the cylindrical portion 43 is larger than the residual magnetic flux density of the magnet 4501. In this case, the thickness dimension Wsc of the cylindrical portion 43 in the radial direction is thinner than the dimension L50 in the radial direction from the third intersection point P53 of the q axis to the side surface of the side opposite to the stator of the magnet 4501 to the second intersection point P52. Even in this case, it is possible to suppress magnetic flux leakage from the side opposite to the stator.

More specifically, the residual magnetic flux density of the magnet 4501 is Br, the saturation magnetic flux density of the cylindrical portion 43 is Bs, the distance from the center point O to the first intersection point P51 is Wh, and the thickness dimension of the cylindrical portion 43 in the radial direction is Wsc, In this case, the magnet 4501 and the cylindrical portion 43 are designed to satisfy the relationship of Br × Wh ≦ Bs × Wsc. If the relationship of Br × Wh ≦ Bs × Wsc is satisfied, the magnetic flux can be obtained even if the thickness dimension of the cylindrical portion 43 is thinner than the thickness dimension L50 in the radial direction from the third intersection point P53 to the second intersection point P52. The leak can be properly suppressed. That is, when the thickness dimension of the cylindrical portion 43 is set to half or more of the distance Wh from the center point O to the first intersection point P51, the magnetic flux leakage can be appropriately suppressed.

The thickness dimension in the radial direction of the magnet 4501 needs to be a thickness capable of forming an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path by orienting at least the magnetization easy axis. Further, it is preferable that the thickness dimension in the radial direction be a thickness that can be manufactured by the magnet 4501 and in consideration of the strength of the magnet 4501. Further, in consideration of the strength of the cylindrical portion 43, the thickness dimension Wsc of the cylindrical portion 43 may be thicker than half the distance Wh.

Thus, the thickness dimension of the magnet 4501 is reduced, and instead, the cylindrical portion 43 which is a soft magnetic material is disposed as a back yoke. Even if the magnet 4501 is thinned, the magnetic flux passes through the cylindrical portion 43 which is a soft magnetic body, so that the magnetic flux leakage is suppressed. That is, in the d axis, the magnetic flux density is less likely to decrease. Thus, the amount of magnet can be reduced without reducing the magnetic flux density.

In the magnet 4501, the orientation arc OA is set so that the tangent at the first intersection point P51 on the orientation arc OA is parallel to the d axis, and the easy magnetization axis is oriented along the orientation arc OA An arc-shaped magnet magnetic path was formed along the magnetization easy axis. Thereby, at the first intersection point P51, since the magnet magnetic path is orthogonal to the stator outer surface 4505, the magnetic flux density can be increased in the d axis. Since the torque is related to the magnetic flux density in the d axis, the torque can be improved by increasing the magnetic flux density in the d axis.

Further, in the magnet 4501 configured as described above, as in the magnets 2501 and 3501, in the part on the d-axis side, the part on the side opposite to the stator is a part that is easily demagnetized. Specifically, the portion radially outside of the orientation arc OA is a portion that is easily demagnetized. For this reason, in another example shown in FIG. 88, curved surface portions 4504 along the orientation arc OA are provided on both end portions in the circumferential direction so that demagnetization-prone portions on the side opposite to the stator are reduced in the d axis side. It is provided. Thereby, the amount of magnets can be reduced without reducing the magnetic flux density in the d axis.

In the ninth embodiment, a recess may be provided along the axial direction on the stator side outer surface (armature side peripheral surface) of the magnet unit 42 and in a portion near the q-axis side. For example, as shown in FIG. 89, the stator side outer surface 2505 of the magnet unit 42 is provided with a groove 2510 as a recess. The groove 2510 is open to the stator side. The groove 2510 is provided closer to the q axis than the d axis. In FIG. 89, the groove 2510 is configured to open around the q axis. Also, in this case, the groove 2510 is provided so as to avoid the orientation arc OA. At this time, it is desirable to adjust the radial dimension and the circumferential dimension of the groove 2510 so that the surface magnetic flux density distribution of the magnet unit 42 becomes close to a sine wave shape.

When the rotor 40 is disposed to face the stator 50, the stator 50 (the stator winding 51 or the like) is disposed on the inner side of the radial direction inner diameter than the magnet unit 42. Therefore, by providing the groove 2510, the flow path surrounded by the groove 2510 and the stator 50 is provided in the magnet unit 42. The flow path functions as a passage penetrating in the axial direction, and is configured to allow passage of fluid such as air. That is, the cross-sectional area of the groove 2510 is large enough to allow the fluid such as air to pass therethrough.

As described above, in the magnet magnetic path of the magnet 2501 of the ninth embodiment, a magnet magnetic path (shown by a broken line) passes through the part closer to the stator than the anti-stator in the part near the q-axis Is more likely to be shorter. And when a magnet magnetic path is short, it can be said that it is a part which is easy to demagnetize by the influence of an external magnetic field (for example, the magnetic field from stator winding 51). For this reason, even if the groove 2510 is provided in the part closer to the stator than the anti-stator side in the part near the q-axis of the magnet 2501, the magnetic flux density in the d-axis hardly affects (the magnetic flux density Not fall).

By configuring as described above, when the rotor 40 rotates, a fluid such as air passes along the groove 2510, whereby the magnet unit 42 is cooled. That is, the cooling performance of the magnet unit 42 can be improved. Further, as described above, since the groove 2510 is provided in the portion where demagnetization is likely to occur, the magnetic flux density is hardly affected. That is, the cooling performance of the magnet unit 42 can be improved while suppressing the torque reduction. Moreover, the amount of magnets of the magnet unit 42 can be suitably reduced, suppressing a torque fall.

In the ninth embodiment, a gap may be provided between the magnets 2501 in the circumferential direction, that is, along the d-axis, and the magnetic steel material (iron core) may be disposed in the gap. By disposing the magnetic steel material in the d-axis portion, the magnetic flux can be increased to be equal to or higher than the residual magnetic flux density Br of the magnet 2501. In the case where the magnetic steel material is disposed although the magnet magnetic path of the magnet 2501 is not directed to the stator side, the magnet magnetic path is completed in the rotor through the magnetic steel material, and the invalid magnetic flux is generated. Become. That is, the magnetic flux density does not improve.

Tenth Embodiment
In the said embodiment or modification, you may change the structure of the magnet holder 41 and the magnet unit 42 as follows. Hereinafter, the configuration of the magnet holder 41 and the magnet unit 42 will be mainly described in detail.

As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the magnet unit 42 has a plurality of magnets 1601 arranged side by side in the circumferential direction. Each magnet 1601 is formed in a substantially arc shape in cross section. That is, each magnet 1601 has an arc-shaped stator side circumferential surface 1602 (armature side circumferential surface) on the radially inner side (stator side), and has a substantially arc shape on the radially outer side (cylindrical portion side) And the stator side circumferential surface 1603 (the armature side circumferential surface). In addition, each magnet 1601 has an end face 1604 that is a flat surface along the radial direction at both ends in the circumferential direction. Each end surface 1604 is provided so as to connect the end in the circumferential direction of the stator side circumferential surface 1602 and the end in the circumferential direction of the anti-stator side circumferential surface 1603. Each magnet 1601 is provided to have a predetermined height dimension in the axial direction.

Then, these magnets 1601 are oriented such that the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is parallel to the d axis on the side of the d axis which is the center of the magnetic pole as compared to the side of the q axis which is the magnetic pole boundary. A magnet path is formed along the axis. In the magnet unit 42, the magnetization directions (magnetization directions) of the magnets 1601 adjacent in the circumferential direction are reversed (reversed) so that the polarities of the d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction are different. In other words, the magnetization direction of the magnet 1601 is made different so that the d-axis where the magnetic flux is concentrated and the polarity becomes the N pole and the d-axis where the magnetic flux diffuses and the polarity becomes the S pole alternate in the circumferential direction. ing.

The magnet path will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 91, a plurality of arc-shaped magnet magnetic paths are formed in each magnet 1601 around a center point set on the q-axis. This magnet magnetic path includes a magnetic path on the orientation arc OA which is centered on the central point and passes through a first intersection point P61 of the d-axis and the stator side circumferential surface 1602 of the magnet 1601. The orientation arc OA is preferably set so that the tangent at the first intersection point P61 on the orientation arc approaches parallel to the d axis.

Therefore, each magnet 1601 has a magnetization easy axis parallel to the d axis or a direction close to parallel to the d axis in a portion near the d axis, and in a portion near the q axis, the magnetization easy axis is orthogonal to the q axis or q It can be said that the orientation is performed so as to form an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path having a direction close to orthogonal.

The magnets 1601 are provided symmetrically about the q-axis and are provided between d-axes adjacent in the circumferential direction. That is, the magnet 1601 is provided in an arc shape along the circumferential direction across the d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction. The orientation arc OA is provided between the d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction, and the magnet 1601 is adjacent in the circumferential direction so that a magnetic path is formed over at least the entire area of the orientation arc OA. It is provided between the matching d-axes.

Therefore, among the magnet magnetic paths of the magnet 1601, the magnet magnetic path along the orientation arc OA is the longest, and as the distance from the orientation arc OA increases, the magnet magnetic path tends to be shorter. For example, among the magnet magnetic paths of the magnet 1601, in the part near the q-axis, the magnet magnetic path (indicated by a broken line) passing through the part on the stator side rather than the anti-stator side tends to be shorter . Also, for example, in the portion near the d-axis in the magnet magnetic path of the magnet 1601, the magnet magnetic path (indicated by a broken line) passing through the portion on the side opposite to the stator more easily becomes shorter. ing. The shape of the magnet magnetic path (that is, the orientation arc OA) may be an arc shape which is a part of a perfect circle or an arc shape which is a part of an ellipse. In addition, although the center of the arc is on the q axis, it may not be on the q axis.

As described above, since the magnet magnetic paths are formed, each magnet 1601 has an N pole at one end in the circumferential direction and an S pole at the other end. That is, each magnet 1601 is formed with an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path so as to have one pole pair.

Further, the end face 1604 of the magnet 1601 is provided along the d axis. That is, the magnets 1601 are divided at the d axis. Moreover, each magnet 1601 is arrange | positioned so that the edge parts which adjoin in the circumferential direction may have the same polarity. The magnet unit 42 is provided in an annular shape by arranging the arc-shaped magnets 1601 in which the magnet magnetic paths are respectively formed in this manner in the circumferential direction.

Incidentally, as described above, the magnet unit 42 desirably has a surface magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave shape, and the magnetic flux density in the d axis is desirably as high as possible. For this reason, when arranging the magnets 1601 side by side in the circumferential direction, it is desirable to make the gap between the adjacent magnets 1601 as small as possible and to reduce the number thereof. Incidentally, when the radial orientation magnets and the parallel orientation magnets are arranged in the circumferential direction without a gap, as shown in FIG. 18, the magnetic flux density changes sharply near the q-axis. For this reason, when employing a radial orientation magnet or a parallel orientation magnet, it is usually disposed with a predetermined interval.

However, when the magnets 1601 are arranged without gaps, a space for disposing an engaging portion (such as a side wall) engaged with the circumferential end of the magnet 1601 is lost. Even if a gap is provided, it is better to make the width dimension of the gap in the circumferential direction as short as possible in order to obtain a surface magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave shape and to increase the magnetic flux density in the d axis. . In that case, it is difficult to arrange the engaging portion having the strength (that is, the width dimension) that can prevent rotation because of the gap. So, in this modification, magnet 1601 and cylinder part 43 are constituted as follows. In this embodiment, the cylindrical portion 43 of the magnet holder 41 corresponds to the magnet holding portion.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the radial direction, the dimension of the magnet 1601 is such that the dimension from the stator 50 to the opposite side circumferential surface 1603 of the magnet 1601 is shorter on the d axis side than on the q axis side. It is provided. Describing in more detail, the anti-stator side circumferential surface 1603 of each magnet 1601 is at a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees with respect to the radial direction with the curved surface portion 1603a along the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 43). And a flat portion 1603 b to be an angle).

The flat portions 1603 b are provided on the d-axis side of the magnet 1601 in the circumferential direction, that is, on both end portions in the circumferential direction. The flat portion 1603 b is provided so as to be close to parallel to the radial direction as compared with the curved portion 1603 a. The flat portion 1603 b is provided to be inclined radially inward (toward the stator). That is, a flat portion 1603 b which is an inclined surface with respect to the radial direction is provided so as to as if the corner on the side opposite to the stator of the arc-shaped magnet 1601 is scraped off. And in each magnet 1601, the thickness dimension of the radial direction of the circumferential direction both ends is short (thin) so that it approaches an end. Therefore, it can be said that the flat portion 1603 b is an inclined surface which is inclined toward the stator with respect to the circumferential direction.

Then, the magnet magnetic path on the orientation arc OA is maintained, and the flat portion 1603 b is provided to avoid the orientation arc OA (do not intersect). That is, in this embodiment, the anti-stator side circumferential surface 1603 is disposed radially outward of the orientation arc OA, and is provided along the orientation arc OA. In addition, if it inclines with respect to the circumferential direction, the plane part 1603b may be changed and it may be made a curved surface. For example, it may be a curved surface along the orientation arc OA.

On the other hand, the outer diameter of the stator 50 (that is, the outer diameter of the stator winding 51) is substantially constant. Therefore, by providing the flat portion 1603b to the magnet 1601, in the radial direction, the dimension from the stator 50 to the counter stator side circumferential surface 1603 of the magnet 1601 is on the d axis side compared to the q axis side. Will be shorter. That is, compared with the thickness dimension L61 in the radial direction from the stator 50 to the curved surface portion 1603a, the thickness dimension L62 in the radial direction from the stator 50 to the flat portion 1603b is shorter.

The magnet 1601 is provided such that the thickness dimension in the radial direction of the magnet 1601 on the q-axis is thicker than the thickness dimension of the magnet 1601 on the d-axis side. Specifically, each magnet 1601 has a stator side circumferential surface 1602 which is a concentric circular arc with respect to the curved surface portion 1603a (that is, the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 43). Thereby, in the radial direction, the thickness dimension from the stator side circumferential surface 1602 to the flat portion 1603b becomes shorter (thin) compared to the thickness dimension from the stator side circumferential surface 1602 to the curved surface portion 1603a There is.

Then, by arranging the magnets 1601 side by side without gaps in the circumferential direction, the magnet unit 42 has a recess 1605 that opens on the side opposite to the stator (cylindrical part) with respect to the d axis for each d axis. It will be provided along the axial direction. That is, by bringing the end faces 1604 of the magnets 1601 adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction into contact with each other, the flat portions 1603 b of the magnets 1601 adjacent to each other in the circumferential direction provide recessed parts 1605 opened to the side opposite to the stator with respect to the d axis. It will be In this case, as shown in FIG. 91, the recess 1605 is provided closer to the d axis than the q axis, and opens about the d axis. In addition, the recess 1605 is provided so as to avoid the orientation arc OA.

As described above, in the portion near the d axis in the magnet magnetic path of the magnet 1601, the magnet magnetic path (indicated by a broken line) passing through the portion on the side opposite to the stator than the stator is shorter It is easy to become. More specifically, the magnet magnetic path in the part on the side opposite to the stator relative to the orientation arc OA is shorter than the orientation arc OA, and does not contribute much to the improvement of the magnetic flux density in the d axis. And when a magnet magnetic path is short, it can be said that it is a part which is easy to demagnetize by the influence of an external magnetic field (for example, magnetic field from stator winding 51) etc. Therefore, the magnetic flux density in the d-axis hardly affects (the magnetic flux density does not decrease) even if the concave portion 1605 is provided in the portion on the side opposite to the stator among the portions near the d-axis of the magnet 1601.

On the other hand, the cylindrical portion 43 is provided with a convex portion 1606 engaged with the concave portion 1605 of the magnet 1601 in the circumferential direction. Describing in detail, as shown in FIG. 91, a convex portion 1606 is provided on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43 so as to protrude in the radial direction toward the magnet unit side (that is, the stator side). These convex portions 1606 are formed such that the width dimension in the circumferential direction becomes shorter toward the stator side in the radial direction so that the cross section becomes a triangular shape in accordance with the shape of the concave portion 1605. That is, a slope is provided from the inner circumferential surface of the cylindrical portion 43 toward the apex of the protrusion 1606, and the slope is an angle (that is, relative to the radial direction) according to the angle of the slope (flat portion 1603b) of the recess 1605. And an angle of 45 degrees). Further, the dimension (height dimension) of the protrusion 1606 in the radial direction is the same as the dimension (depth dimension) of the recess 1605. As a result, the convex portion 1606 and the concave portion 1605 can be suitably engaged.

The width of the recess 1605 and the protrusion 1606 in the circumferential direction (the width of the opening of the recess 1605 and the width of the base of the protrusion 1606) is set so as to ensure sufficient strength to prevent rotation. , Has been set.

Further, a groove portion 1607 is provided on the stator side circumferential surface 1602 of the magnet unit 42 in this modification along the axial direction. The groove portion 1607 is an armature-side concave portion opened on the stator side in the stator side circumferential surface 1602. The groove 1607 is provided closer to the q axis than the d axis. In FIG. 91, the groove 1607 is configured to open around the q axis. In this case, the groove 1607 is provided to avoid the orientation arc OA.

When the rotor 40 is disposed to face the stator 50, the stator 50 (the stator winding 51 or the like) is disposed radially inward of the magnet unit 42. Therefore, by providing the groove portion 1607, the flow path surrounded by the groove portion 1607 and the stator 50 is provided in the magnet unit 42. The flow path functions as a passage penetrating in the axial direction, and is configured to allow passage of fluid such as air. That is, the cross-sectional area of the groove portion 1607 is large enough to allow the fluid such as air to pass therethrough.

As described above, in the portion near the q-axis in the magnet magnetic path of the magnet 1601, the magnet magnetic path (indicated by the broken line) passing through the portion on the stator side rather than the anti-stator side is shorter It is easy to become. And when a magnet magnetic path is short, it can be said that it is a part which is easy to demagnetize under the influence of an external magnetic field (for example, magnetic field from stator winding 51) etc. Therefore, even if the groove portion 1607 is provided in the portion closer to the stator than the anti-stator side among the portions near the q-axis of the magnet 1601, the magnetic flux density in the d-axis hardly affects (the magnetic flux density Not fall). On the other hand, by providing the groove portion 1607, the amount of magnet of the magnet 1601 can be reduced.

Next, an outline of a method of manufacturing the magnet 1601 will be described. Each magnet 1601 is a sintered magnet manufactured by a sintering method. That is, the generated raw materials such as neodymium, boron and iron are melted and alloyed (first step). Next, the alloy obtained in the first step is crushed into particles (second step). Then, as shown in FIG. 92, the powder obtained in the second step is placed in a mold 2601 having a substantially U-shaped cross section, and pressure molding is performed in a magnetic field (third step). Both ends of the U-shape in the mold 2601 are openings 2601 a. The powder is put into the mold 2601 from the opening 2601a and pressed from both ends (opening 2601a) (the direction of external pressure is indicated by the arrow Y103). For this reason, the pressing direction (indicated by the arrow Y 102) inside the magnet 1601 has an arc shape along the shape of the mold 2601. In addition, the direction of the magnetic field (indicated by the arrow Y101) applied when molded is arc-shaped along the shape of the mold 2601. Therefore, the pressing direction and the direction of the magnetic field are both arcs. For this reason, the magnetization easy axis is in the form of an arc.

After being pressure-formed, the formed product is sintered (fourth step), and heat-treated after the sintering is completed (fifth step). In the heat treatment, heating and cooling are performed several times. Then, after machining such as grinding and surface processing are performed (sixth step), magnetization is performed (seventh step) to complete each magnet 1601.

According to this embodiment, the following excellent effects are obtained.

At the side of the d axis which is the center of the magnetic pole, the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is oriented parallel to the d axis as compared to the side of the q axis which is the magnetic pole boundary, and a magnet magnetic path is formed along the easy axis. The plurality of magnets 1601 are used for the magnet unit 42. In this case, in order to obtain a magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave shape and to increase the magnetic flux density on the d axis, it is desirable to make the gap between the magnets 1601 adjacent in the circumferential direction as small as possible. However, if the gap between the adjacent magnets 1601 is reduced, the engaging portion disposed in the gap becomes thinner and it becomes impossible to preferably perform the detent.

By the way, in the part near the d-axis of the magnet 1601, the part on the side opposite to the stator tends to be short in the magnet magnetic path, and is a part that is easy to demagnetize. That is, even if this portion is deleted, the influence on the magnetic flux density generated from the d axis is small. That is, the magnetic flux density generated from the d-axis is not reduced, and the torque is not reduced.

Therefore, a recess 1605 is provided on the side opposite to the stator side (cylindrical portion) of the magnet unit 42 and on the side closer to the d axis than the q axis, that is, on the opposite side to the stator side, ie The cylindrical portion 43 is provided with a convex portion 1606 engaged with the concave portion 1605. This makes it possible to prevent the magnet unit 42 from rotating while setting the magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave shape and increasing the magnetic flux density on the d axis. Also, the amount of magnet can be reduced.

In addition, in order to secure strength that can preferably perform rotation prevention, the width dimensions in the circumferential direction of the recess 1605 and the protrusion 1606 (the width dimension of the opening of the recess 1605 and the width dimension of the base of the protrusion 1606) It is set. For this reason, it is possible to preferably prevent rotation. Even in the case where the width dimension is set as described above, the corresponding portion is a portion which is easily demagnetized, and therefore the magnetic flux in the d axis even if the recess 1605 is provided as compared with the case where the recess 1605 is not provided. It is possible to suppress the decrease in density. Moreover, the amount of magnets of the magnet unit 42 can be reduced.

In the portion near the q-axis in the magnet 1601, the portion on the stator side is likely to be short in the magnet magnetic path, and is a portion that is easy to demagnetize. That is, even if this portion is deleted, the influence on the magnetic flux density generated from the d axis is small.

Therefore, in the part near the q-axis, the groove part 1607 is provided in the part on the stator side. Since the grooves 1607 and these grooves 1607 are provided along the axial direction, they are penetrated in the axial direction by fixing the magnet 1601 to the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43 and arranging the rotor 40 to face the stator 50. A flow path will be provided. Then, when the rotor 40 rotates, a fluid such as air passes through these flow paths, so that the magnet unit 42 is cooled. That is, the cooling performance of the magnet unit 42 can be improved.

Further, as described above, since the groove portion 1607 is provided in the portion which is easily demagnetized, the magnetic flux density is hardly affected. That is, the cooling performance of the magnet unit 42 can be improved while suppressing the torque reduction. Moreover, the amount of magnets of the magnet unit 42 can be suitably reduced, suppressing a torque fall.

By the way, by having a magnet unit having a surface magnetic flux density distribution close to a sine wave, torque can be enhanced, and eddy current loss can be suppressed because of a gradual change in magnetic flux compared with a radial magnet. It is also possible to reduce torque ripple. When the intrinsic coercivity of the magnet is 400 kA / m or more and the residual magnetic flux density is 1.0 T or more (ie, the magnetic flux density in the d axis is increased), a sine wave is obtained. In order to obtain a magnet unit having a near surface magnetic flux density distribution, it is preferable to use a magnet provided between d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction, in which a circular arc-shaped magnet magnetic path is formed.

When such a magnet is used, in order to form a magnetic flux path on the orientation arc OA in order to suppress magnetic flux leakage from the side opposite to the stator of the magnetic unit, a predetermined thickness dimension in the radial direction is set. It is desirable to use a magnet. However, when using a magnet with an intrinsic coercivity of 400 kA / m or more and a residual magnetic flux density of 1.0 T or more, use a sintered magnet containing an expensive rare earth material. In general, problems are likely to arise in terms of cost and manufacturing.

So, in this embodiment, in the radial direction, the dimension from the stator 50 to the anti-stator side peripheral surface 1603 of the magnet 1601 is shorter on the d-axis side than on the q-axis side. Configured. As a result, in the portion near the d axis of the magnet 1601, the portion on the side opposite to the stator can be reduced. That is, it is possible to reduce the amount of magnet without affecting the magnetic flux density by reducing the portion susceptible to demagnetization. As a result, for example, compared to the case where the magnet has a predetermined thickness dimension over the entire circumferential direction, the portion susceptible to demagnetization is eliminated to provide the concave portion 1605. The amount of magnets can be reduced while suppressing the decrease.

The thickness of the magnet 1601 in the radial direction is provided by providing a magnet 1601 between d axes adjacent in the circumferential direction and providing a magnet magnetic path in an arc shape across the d axes so as to straddle the q axis. Even if the dimension is reduced, the magnet magnetic path can be made longer. That is, compared to a radial magnet provided with a linear magnet magnetic path, the magnet magnetic path can be made longer, and the magnetic flux density in the d-axis can be improved while suppressing the thickness dimension of the magnet 1601. Can.

The magnet 1601 is provided symmetrically about the q axis, and is centered on a central point set on the q axis, and a first intersection point P61 of the d axis and the stator side circumferential surface 1602 of the magnet 1601 is It is provided between the d-axes adjacent in the circumferential direction so that a magnet magnetic path along the passing orientation arc OA is formed. For this reason, the length of the magnet magnetic path on the orientation arc OA contributing to the magnetic flux density on the d axis can be made sufficiently long, and the magnetic flux density on the d axis can be improved.

Further, in order to make the shape as described above, when the magnet 1601 is manufactured, the powder is pressure-formed in a magnetic field by the U-shaped mold 2601 in the third step. Thereby, the direction of the magnetic field and the direction of pressing can be arc-shaped along the shape of the mold 2601. Thereby, since the direction of the magnetization easy axis can be made circular, the magnet magnetic path can be easily formed circular. That is, the magnet 1601 having the above-described magnet magnetic path can be easily manufactured.

Note that, in this embodiment, the convex portion 1606 and the concave portion 1605 may be formed at any position within the range of the magnet unit 42 in the axial direction. For example, the convex portion 1606 and the concave portion 1605 may be provided in the entire range of the magnet unit 42 along the axial direction. In addition, the projections 1606 and the recesses 1605 do not have to be provided for all d axes, and may be smaller than the number of d axes. For example, the convex portions 1606 and the concave portions 1605 may be provided at every 90 degree angle interval. In addition, as long as the number of concave portions 1605 is larger than that of the convex portions 1606, the numbers of the convex portions 1606 and the concave portions 1605 may be arbitrarily changed.

In the tenth embodiment, a resin layer as a resin member is provided between the cylindrical portion 43 and each magnet 1601, and each magnet 1601 is fixed to the cylindrical portion 43 via the resin layer. It may be

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93, the rotor 40 includes an insulating unit 3600 having a resin layer 3601 covering the outer peripheral surface of the magnet unit 42. The resin layer 3601 is formed in a cylindrical shape so as to cover the anti-stator side peripheral surface 1603 of the magnet 1601 disposed annularly without a gap in the circumferential direction. That is, the magnets 1601 are fixed to the inner circumferential surface of the resin layer 3601 in the radial direction. Further, the resin layer 3601 is provided so as to cover the entire area of the magnet 1601 in the axial direction.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 94, the insulating unit 3600 has end face portions 3602 at the axial direction both end portions, which cover both axial end faces of the magnet 1601. The end surface portion 3602 is formed in an annular shape, and the outer diameter thereof is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 43. On the other hand, the inner diameter of the end face portion 3602 is smaller than the outer diameter of the magnet unit 42 and larger than the inner diameter of the magnet unit 42.

Further, as shown in FIG. 93, the insulating unit 3600 has a regulating member 3603 accommodated in the groove 1607. The restricting member 3603 is formed in a rod shape extending in the axial direction along the groove 1607. Further, both axial end portions of the restriction member 3603 are fixed to the end face portion 3602. Therefore, the restricting member 3603 restricts the movement of the magnet 1601 in the radial direction.

Further, the restricting member 3603 is accommodated in the groove portion 1607, and is disposed on the side opposite to the stator in the radial direction with respect to the stator side circumferential surface 1602 of the magnet 1601. Therefore, even if the restricting member 3603 is thermally expanded, it is suppressed from protruding toward the stator in the radial direction with respect to the stator side circumferential surface 1602.

The insulating unit 3600 configured of the resin layer 3601, the end face portion 3602, and the regulating member 3603 is integrally formed of a resin as an insulating material. For example, the insulating unit 3600 is formed by resin molding in a state where the magnets 1601 are arranged in the circumferential direction. The insulating unit 3600 is fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 43. At that time, for example, the insulating unit 3600 is fixed to the inner peripheral surface by press-fitting the cylindrical portion 43.

As described above, by interposing the resin layer 3601 as a resin member between the cylindrical portion 43 and each of the magnets 1601, electrical insulation can be established between the cylindrical portion 43 and the magnet 1601. For this reason, it can suppress that an eddy current generate | occur | produces between the cylindrical part 43 and the magnet 1601, and can suppress an eddy current loss. Further, by pressing the insulating unit 3600 together with the magnet 1601 into the cylindrical portion 43, pressure can be applied in the radial direction to the side surface 1603 opposite to the stator side of the magnet 1601, and dropout of the magnet 1601 is suitably suppressed. it can.

The insulating unit 3600 may include only the resin layer 3601. In addition, a resin adhesive as a resin member may be interposed between the cylindrical portion 43 and each of the magnets 1601, and each of the magnets 1601 may be fixed to the cylindrical portion 43 via the resin adhesive. By interposing the resin adhesive, dropping of the magnet 1601 can be suitably suppressed.

In the tenth embodiment, the shapes of the convex portion 1606 and the concave portion 1605 may be arbitrarily changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 95, the convex portion 1606 may have a shape in which the width dimension of the distal end is larger than the width dimension of the proximal end. That is, the convex portion 1606 may be shaped so as to be wider as it approaches inward in the radial direction. Then, the concave portion 1605 may be changed in accordance with the shape of the convex portion 1606. That is, the width of the opening of the recess 1605 may be larger than the width of the bottom. That is, the recess 1605 may be shaped so as to narrow in width toward the radially outer side.

Accordingly, the convex portion 1606 and the concave portion 1605 can be engaged in the radial direction so as to restrict the movement of the magnet 1601 inward in the radial direction, and the drop of the magnet 1601 can be suppressed.

-Although the outer rotor type rotor was employ | adopted in the said modification, you may employ | adopt the inner rotor type rotor.

The disclosure in this specification is not limited to the illustrated embodiments. The disclosure includes the illustrated embodiments and variations based on them by those skilled in the art. For example, the disclosure is not limited to the combination of parts and / or elements shown in the embodiments. The disclosure can be implemented in various combinations. The disclosure can have additional parts that can be added to the embodiments. The disclosure includes those in which parts and / or elements of the embodiments have been omitted. The disclosure includes replacements or combinations of parts and / or elements between one embodiment and another embodiment. The disclosed technical scope is not limited to the description of the embodiments. It is to be understood that the technical scopes disclosed herein are indicated by the description of the scope of the claims, and further include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the descriptions of the scope of the claims.

Although the present disclosure has been described based on the examples, it is understood that the present disclosure is not limited to the examples and structures. The present disclosure also includes various modifications and variations within the equivalent range. In addition, various combinations and forms, and further, other combinations and forms including only one element, or more or less than these elements are also within the scope and the scope of the present disclosure.

Claims (70)

A field element (40) having a magnet portion (42) including a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction; and an armature (50) having a polyphase armature winding (51), In a rotating electrical machine (10) having any one of the field element and the armature as a rotor,
The magnet unit has a plurality of magnets (91, 92) arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction,
The magnet is oriented such that the direction of the easy magnetization axis is parallel to the d axis on the side of the d axis which is the center of the magnetic pole as compared with the side of the q axis which is the magnetic pole boundary. The road is formed,
The field element comprises a field element core (43) which is a soft magnetic body, on the side opposite to the armature side of the magnet unit,
The field element core has a convex portion (1002) protruding toward the armature in the radial direction from the gap between the magnets,
The convex portion is provided on the q axis side of the d axis in the circumferential direction, and the end surfaces (1002a, 1002b) on both sides in the circumferential direction in the convex portion are on the circumferential end surface (91a, 92a) of the magnet The rotating electrical machines in contact with each other. In the magnet, an armature side circumferential surface of the magnet and the circumferential end face form an inflow and outflow surface of magnetic flux, and an arc-shaped magnet magnet is formed so as to connect the armature side circumferential surface and the circumferential end face The rotating electrical machine according to claim 1, wherein a passage is formed. The circumferential end face of the magnet is provided to be orthogonal to the magnet magnetic path,
The rotating electrical machine according to claim 1, wherein the end surface of the convex portion in the circumferential direction is provided in accordance with an angle of the circumferential end surface to be in contact. The rotating electrical machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein a recess (1003) recessed in a radial direction is provided on the armature side circumferential surface of the magnet on the q axis side of the d axis. The rotary electric machine according to claim 4, wherein the recessed portion is provided such that an air gap from the magnet to the armature in a radial direction gradually increases toward the q-axis side. The convex portion is formed such that its radial dimension is shorter than that of the magnet,
The magnet unit has an auxiliary magnet (1004) disposed between the adjacent magnets in the circumferential direction and disposed closer to the armature side than the convex portion in the radial direction,
In the auxiliary magnet, a magnetization easy axis parallel to the circumferential direction in the q axis of the magnet is oriented, and a magnet magnetic path of the auxiliary magnet is provided along the magnetization easy axis. The rotating electrical machine according to any one of the items 5). The armature winding has conducting wire portions (81, 82) arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
In the armature,
An inter-conductor member (57, 142, 143) is provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction, and as the inter-conductor member, the circumferential width dimension of the inter-conductor member in one magnetic pole is Wt, the inter-conductor member A magnetic material having a relationship of Wt × Bs ≦ Wm × Br, where Bs is a saturation magnetic flux density, Wm is a width of the circumferential direction of the magnet portion in one magnetic pole, and Br is a residual magnetic flux density of the magnet portion. Or a configuration using a nonmagnetic material,
The rotary electric machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein no inter-lead member is provided between the lead portions in the circumferential direction. A field element (40) having a magnet portion (42) including a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction, and an armature (50) having a polyphase armature winding (51), In a rotary electric machine (10) in which one of a field element and the armature is a rotor,
The thickness in the radial direction at both axial end portions of the magnet portion is axially more central than the end portions so that the cross section of the magnet portion in the axial direction of the rotor is convex toward the armature side It is thinner than the side part,
A rotating electrical machine, wherein a thin portion (1102) at the end of the magnet portion is provided at a position overlapping the coil end (54, 55) of the armature winding in the axial direction. The electric rotating machine according to claim 8, wherein the end face in the axial direction in the magnet unit is an inclined surface (1102a) inclined with respect to the direction orthogonal to the axial direction. In the magnet unit, the magnetization easy axis in the thin portion is oriented so as to be parallel to the axial direction as compared to the magnetization easy axis in the axially central portion, and the magnet magnetic path is formed along the magnetization easy axis The electric rotating machine according to claim 8 or 9, which is formed. The magnet section has an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path such that the armature side circumferential surface and the end face in the axial direction are the inflow and outflow surfaces of magnetic flux, and the armature side circumferential surface and the end face in the axial direction are connected. The electric rotating machine according to claim 10, wherein is formed. The magnet unit includes a plurality of magnets (91, 92, 131, 132) arranged in the circumferential direction, and the thin portions are provided to the plurality of magnets,
A holding member (1103) provided on at least one of the axial direction end portions of the magnet unit;
The rotary electric machine according to any one of claims 8 to 11, wherein the holding member has an engagement portion (1104) engaged in the radial direction with respect to the thin portion in each of the magnets. The magnet unit according to any one of claims 8 to 12, wherein the magnet unit is configured using a magnet having an intrinsic coercivity of 400 kA / m or more and a residual magnetic flux density of 1.0 T or more. The electric rotating machine described in 1 above. The magnet unit is configured by using a magnet on the side of the d axis which is the center of the magnetic pole and in which the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is parallel to the d axis as compared to the side of the q axis which is the magnetic pole boundary. The rotary electric machine according to any one of claims 8 to 13. In the magnet, the easy magnetization axis is parallel to the d axis or near parallel to the d axis near the d axis, and the easy magnetization axis is orthogonal to the q axis or near the q axis near the q axis The rotating electrical machine according to claim 14, which is oriented and has an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path. Among the circumferential surfaces of the magnet, the armature side circumferential surface and the end surface on the q axis side in the circumferential direction form an inflow and outflow surface of magnetic flux, and the armature side circumferential surface and the q axis side The electric rotating machine according to claim 14 or 15, wherein a magnet magnetic path is formed so as to connect the end face. The armature winding has conducting wire portions (81, 82) arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
Each of the conductive wires constituting the conductive wire portion is a bundle of a plurality of strands (86) and is a bundle of strands whose resistance value between the bundled strands is larger than the resistance of the strands themselves. The rotary electric machine according to any one of claims 8 to 16. A field element (40, 204) comprising a magnet portion (42) having a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction, and a polyphase armature winding (51, 202) An electric rotating machine (10, 200) comprising: an armature (50, 203), wherein any one of the field element and the armature is a rotor;
The magnet unit has a plurality of permanent magnets (91, 92) arranged in line in at least one of the circumferential direction and the axial direction,
The field element includes a magnet insulating portion (1200) having at least inter-magnet members (1201, 3201) disposed between the permanent magnets adjacent in the circumferential direction or the axial direction,
The rotating electric machine wherein the inter-magnet member is made of an insulating material. In the magnet unit, a plurality of the permanent magnets are arranged side by side at least in the circumferential direction,
The rotary electric machine according to claim 18, wherein the inter-magnet member disposed between the permanent magnets adjacent in the circumferential direction engages with an end face of the permanent magnet in the circumferential direction. A recess (2201) opened to the armature side is provided along an axial direction of the rotor on an armature side circumferential surface on the armature side among the circumferential surfaces of the magnet section,
The electric rotating machine according to claim 18 or 19, wherein the magnet insulating portion has an engaging portion (2002) which engages in a radial direction and a circumferential direction with respect to the permanent magnet. 21. The rotating electrical machine according to claim 20, wherein the recess is provided on the q axis side, which is a magnetic pole boundary, rather than the d axis side, which is a magnetic pole center. 22. The permanent magnet according to claim 18, wherein the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is parallel to the d axis on the side of the d axis which is the center of the magnetic pole as compared to the side of the q axis which is the magnetic pole boundary. The rotating electrical machine according to any one of the above. In the permanent magnet, the easy magnetization axis is parallel to or nearly parallel to the d axis in the part near the d axis, and the easy magnetization axis is orthogonal to the q axis or perpendicular to the q axis in the part near the q axis The rotary electric machine according to claim 22, wherein the rotary electric machine is oriented such that an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path having a close direction is formed. The rotation according to any one of claims 18 to 23, wherein the magnet insulating portion has an opening (1205) which is opened so that the armature side circumferential surface of the magnet portion is exposed to the armature. Electric. The rotating electrical machine according to any one of claims 18 to 24, wherein the outer surface on the armature side in the magnet insulating portion is located on the opposite side of the armature in the radial direction than the circumferential surface on the armature side in the magnet portion. . The field element is provided with a field element core member (43) which is a soft magnetic body, on the opposite side of the armature from the magnet unit.
The magnet insulating portion has an insulating layer (1204) that covers a side surface opposite to the armature of the magnet portion in the radial direction.
The magnet insulating portion is fixed to the field element core member together with the magnet portion in a state in which the non-armature side peripheral surface of the magnet portion is covered with the insulating layer. The rotating electrical machine according to item 1. The magnet insulating portion has an annular end plate (1203) axially outside the magnet portion,
The rotary electric machine according to any one of claims 18 to 26, wherein the end portions in the axial direction of each of the inter-magnet adjacent members in the circumferential direction are respectively fixed to the end plate. The electric rotating machine according to any one of claims 18 to 27, wherein the permanent magnet has an intrinsic coercive force of 400 kA / m or more and a residual magnetic flux density of 1.0 T or more. . The armature winding has conducting wire portions (81, 82) arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
In the armature,
An inter-conductor member (57, 142, 143) is provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction, and as the inter-conductor member, the circumferential width dimension of the inter-conductor member in one magnetic pole is Wt, the inter-conductor member A magnetic material having a relationship of Wt × Bs ≦ Wm × Br, where Bs is a saturation magnetic flux density, Wm is a width of the circumferential direction of the magnet portion in one magnetic pole, and Br is a residual magnetic flux density of the magnet portion. Or a configuration using a nonmagnetic material,
The rotary electric machine according to any one of claims 18 to 28, wherein no inter-lead member is provided between the lead portions in the circumferential direction. The armature winding has conducting wire portions (81, 82) arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
Each of the conductive wires constituting the conductive wire portion is a bundle of a plurality of strands (86) and is a bundle of strands whose resistance value between the bundled strands is larger than the resistance of the strands themselves. The electric rotating machine according to any one of claims 18 to 29, wherein The armature winding has conducting wire portions (81, 82) arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
The electric rotating machine according to any one of claims 18 to 30, wherein a thickness dimension in a radial direction of the conducting wire portion is smaller than a width dimension in a circumferential direction of one phase in one magnetic pole. A field element (40, 204) having a magnet portion (42, 239) including a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction, and an armature (50) having a polyphase armature winding (51, 202) , 203, 237), in a rotating electrical machine (10, 200, 230), wherein any one of the field element and the armature is a rotor,
The magnet unit has a plurality of magnets (91, 92, 2301) arranged in a circumferential direction,
The magnet is oriented such that the direction of the easy magnetization axis is parallel to the d axis on the side of the d axis which is the center of the magnetic pole as compared to the side of the q axis which is the magnetic pole boundary. The road is formed,
The plurality of magnets includes a magnet that is in contact with the adjacent magnet at least on one side in the circumferential direction, and a magnet that is separated from the next magnet on at least one side in the circumferential direction. , A rotating electrical machine provided. The rotary electric machine according to claim 32, wherein the number of gaps (1301) between the magnets is a prime number different from the number of magnetic poles of the magnet section and the number of phases of the armature winding. The rotary electric machine according to claim 32 or 33, wherein a plurality of gaps are provided between the magnets, and intervals of the gaps adjacent in the circumferential direction are uneven. The magnet portion is provided with passages (2302, 2303) penetrating in the axial direction,
When the passage is provided closer to the q-axis than the d-axis, the passage is provided closer to the armature than the opposite armature.
35. The method according to any one of claims 32 to 34, wherein when the passage is provided closer to the d-axis than the q-axis side, the passage is provided closer to the armature than the armature side. The electric rotating machine described in. A field element (40, 204) having a magnet portion (42, 239) including a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction, and an armature (50) having a polyphase armature winding (51, 202) , 203, 237), in a rotating electrical machine (10, 200, 230), wherein any one of the field element and the armature is a rotor,
The magnet section is oriented such that the direction of the easy axis of magnetization is parallel to the d axis on the side of the d axis which is the center of the magnetic pole as compared to the side of the q axis which is the magnetic pole boundary. It has a magnet (2301) in which a magnetic path is formed,
The magnet portion is provided with passages (2302, 2303) penetrating in the axial direction,
When the passage is provided closer to the q-axis than the d-axis, the passage is provided closer to the armature than the opposite armature.
A rotating electrical machine provided on the opposite side of the armature side from the armature side when the passage is provided on the d axis side relative to the q axis side. The magnet unit includes a plurality of magnets arranged in a circumferential direction,
The rotary electric machine according to any one of claims 32 to 36, wherein the magnet is insulated with an insulating film at least between magnets adjacent in the circumferential direction. The armature winding has conducting wire portions (81, 82) arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
In the armature,
An inter-conductor member (57, 142, 143) is provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction, and as the inter-conductor member, the circumferential width dimension of the inter-conductor member in one magnetic pole is Wt, the inter-conductor member A magnetic material having a relationship of Wt × Bs ≦ Wm × Br, where Bs is a saturation magnetic flux density, Wm is a width of the circumferential direction of the magnet portion in one magnetic pole, and Br is a residual magnetic flux density of the magnet portion. Or a configuration using a nonmagnetic material,
The rotary electric machine according to any one of claims 32 to 37, wherein no inter-lead member is provided between the lead portions in the circumferential direction. The armature winding has conducting wire portions (81, 82) arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
The electric rotating machine according to any one of claims 32 to 38, wherein a thickness dimension in a radial direction of the conducting wire portion is smaller than a width dimension in a circumferential direction of one phase in one magnetic pole. The armature winding has conducting wire portions (81, 82) arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
Each of the conductive wires constituting the conductive wire portion is a bundle of a plurality of strands (86) and is a bundle of strands whose resistance value between the bundled strands is larger than the resistance of the strands themselves. The rotary electric machine according to any one of claims 32 to 39. A field element (40) having a magnet portion (42) including a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction; and an armature (50) having a polyphase armature winding (51), In a rotating electrical machine (10) having any one of the field element and the armature as a rotor,
The magnet unit includes a plurality of magnets arranged in the circumferential direction, and an annular field element core member (1403) which is a soft magnetic body disposed on the opposite side of the armature in the radial direction from the magnet. Have
The magnet includes at least a first magnet (1401) provided with a magnet magnetic path so as to be parallel to the radial direction,
The first magnet is provided so that the air gap between the first magnet and the armature in the radial direction gradually widens from the d-axis at the magnetic pole center toward the q-axis side at the magnetic pole boundary. ,
The field element core member has a projecting portion (1404) projecting toward the armature in the radial direction from the gap between the magnets,
The rotary electric machine is provided between the d-axis and the q-axis, and the projection is provided so as to project to the armature side more than the magnet. 42. The rotary electric machine according to claim 41, wherein the magnet has a rectangular cross-sectional shape, and is disposed such that a lateral direction or a longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the radial direction. The rotary electric machine according to claim 42, wherein the field element is disposed radially outward of the armature, and the field element is a rotor. The rotary electric machine according to claim 41, wherein the field element is disposed radially inward of the armature, and the field element is a rotor. A field element (40) having a magnet portion (42) including a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction; and an armature (50) having a polyphase armature winding (51), In a rotating electrical machine (10) in which the field element is disposed radially inward of the armature, and the field element is a rotor.
The magnet unit includes a plurality of magnets arranged in the circumferential direction, and an annular field element core member (2403) which is a soft magnetic body disposed on the opposite side of the armature in the radial direction from the magnet. Have
The magnet includes at least a first magnet (2401) provided with a magnet magnetic path so as to be parallel to the radial direction,
The first magnet has a rectangular cross-sectional shape, and is disposed such that the lateral direction or the longitudinal direction is orthogonal to the radial direction,
The field element core member has a projecting portion (2405) projecting toward the armature in the radial direction from the gap between the magnets,
In the circumferential direction, an end face (2405a) of the protrusion is provided so as to abut on an end face (2401c) of the first magnet. The magnet includes, in addition to the first magnet, a second magnet (1402, 2402) provided with a magnet magnetic path parallel to the circumferential direction,
The plurality of first magnets are disposed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction, and the plurality of second magnets are disposed at positions between the adjacent first magnets in the circumferential direction. The rotating electrical machine according to any one of 41 to 45. The armature winding has conducting wire portions (81, 82) arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
In the armature,
An inter-conductor member (57, 142, 143) is provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction, and as the inter-conductor member, the circumferential width dimension of the inter-conductor member in one magnetic pole is Wt, the inter-conductor member A magnetic material having a relationship of Wt × Bs ≦ Wm × Br, where Bs is a saturation magnetic flux density, Wm is a width of the circumferential direction of the magnet portion in one magnetic pole, and Br is a residual magnetic flux density of the magnet portion. Or a configuration using a nonmagnetic material,
The rotary electric machine according to any one of claims 41 to 46, wherein an inter-lead member is not provided between the lead portions in the circumferential direction. A field element (40) having a magnet portion (42) including a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction; and an armature (50) having a polyphase armature winding (51), In a rotating electrical machine (10) having any one of the field element and the armature as a rotor,
In the magnet section, the easy magnetization axis is arc-shaped so that the direction of the easy magnetization axis is parallel to the d axis on the side of the d axis which is the center of the magnetic pole as compared to the side of the q axis which is the magnetic pole boundary. It has a magnet (2501, 3501, 4051) in which an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path is formed along the easy axis of magnetization,
The magnet has an intrinsic coercivity of 400 [kA / m] or more, and a residual magnetic flux density of 1.0 [T] or more,
The magnet is provided between adjacent d-axes in the circumferential direction, and in the radial direction from the armature to the counter armature side circumferential surface which is the counter armature side among the circumferential surfaces of the magnet The size of the rotating electrical machine is provided so that the d-axis side is shorter than the q-axis side. The magnets are provided symmetrically about the q-axis, and the easy magnetization axis is parallel to the d-axis or close to parallel to the d-axis at a portion near the d-axis and at the portion near the q-axis. It is oriented such that an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path is formed in which the direction is orthogonal to the q-axis or close to orthogonal to the q-axis,
A first intersection point (P51) of the magnet magnetic path with a center point set on the q axis and a d axis and an armature side peripheral surface on the armature side among the peripheral surfaces of the magnet (P51) The rotating electrical machine according to claim 48, further comprising a magnet magnetic path on an orientation arc (OA) passing through the). 50. The rotating electrical machine according to claim 49, wherein the orientation arc is set such that a tangent at a first intersection on the orientation arc is parallel to the d axis. The field element is provided with a field element core member (43) which is a soft magnetic body, on the opposite side of the armature from the magnet unit.
In the radial direction, the field element core member and the magnet are stacked,
51. The rotary electric machine according to claim 49, wherein a part or all of the field element core member is disposed on the armature side in the radial direction with respect to the second intersection point (P52) of the q axis and the orientation arc. . When the saturation magnetic flux density of the field element core member is larger than the residual magnetic flux density of the magnet, the thickness dimension in the radial direction of the field element core member is the q axis and the circumferential surface of the magnet 52. A dynamo-electric machine according to claim 51, wherein the second dimension is smaller than a dimension in a radial direction from a third intersection point (P53) with the opposite armature side circumferential surface on the opposite armature side. The residual magnetic flux density of the magnet section is Br, the saturation magnetic flux density of the field element core member is Bs, the distance from the central point (O) to the first intersection point (P51) is Wh, the field element core member 53. The rotary electric machine according to claim 51, wherein a magnet and a field element core member satisfying the relationship of Br × Wh ≦ Bs × Wsc are used, where Wsc is a thickness dimension in the radial direction. 51. The rotary electric machine according to claim 49, wherein the counter armature side circumferential surface of the magnet is provided on the counter armature side in the radial direction with respect to the second intersection point (P52) of the q axis and the orientation arc. The field element includes a magnet holding unit (3504) for holding the magnet,
The magnet holding portion has an opposite armature side covering portion (3511) covering an opposite armature side circumferential surface of the magnet, and an armature side covering portion (3512) covering an armature side circumferential surface of the magnet. And
The rotary electric machine according to claim 54, wherein the non-armature side coating portion is thinner compared to the armature side coating portion. 56. The magnet according to any one of claims 48 to 55, wherein the thickness dimension in the radial direction of the magnet on the q-axis is thicker than the thickness dimension of the magnet on the d-axis side. The rotating electrical machine according to item 1. 57. The recess according to any one of claims 48 to 56, wherein a recess (2510) opening on the armature side is provided on the armature side circumferential surface of the circumferential surface of the magnet on the q axis side of the d axis. Electrical rotating machine described. 58. The magnet according to claim 48, wherein the magnet is formed in a convex lens shape, and the curvature of the counter armature side circumferential surface of the magnet is larger than that of the armature side circumferential surface of the magnet. Electrical rotating machine described. A field element having a magnet portion (42) including a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polarity in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical magnet holding portion (43) in which the magnet portion is fixed to the inner circumferential surface or the outer circumferential surface (40) and an armature (50) having a polyphase armature winding (51) arranged to face the magnet portion in the radial direction, and one of the field element and the armature In a rotating electric machine (10) having either one as a rotor,
The magnet unit includes a plurality of magnets (1601) arranged in the circumferential direction,
Each of the magnets is formed symmetrically around the q-axis, which is a magnetic pole boundary, between d-axes that are magnetic pole centers adjacent in the circumferential direction, and on the d-axis side, the q-axis side And the direction of the magnetization easy axis is parallel to the d axis, and a magnet magnetic path is formed along the magnetization easy axis,
In the non-armature side peripheral surface (1603) of each of the magnets, at both ends in the circumferential direction, it has an inclined surface (1603b) inclined to the armature side,
The magnet holding portion is disposed on the side opposite to the armature in the radial direction with respect to the magnet portion, and has a convex portion (1606) protruding to the magnet portion in the radial direction.
The rotary electric machine is provided on the d-axis side with respect to the q-axis and the convex portion is engageable with the inclined surface in the circumferential direction. 60. The rotating electrical machine according to claim 59, wherein the magnet is a single-pole pair in which the polarity at one end and the polarity at the other end are different in the circumferential direction. The resin member (3601) is provided between the magnet holding portion and the magnet, and the magnet is fixed to the magnet holding portion via the resin member. The electric rotating machine described in. An armature-side recess (1607) opening on the armature side in the radial direction is provided on the armature-side circumferential surface of the magnet, and the armature-side recess is provided on the q-axis side of the d-axis The electric rotating machine according to any one of claims 59 to 61. The rotary electric machine according to claim 62, wherein a restricting member that restricts the movement of the magnet to the armature side in the radial direction is accommodated in the armature-side recess. In the magnet, the easy magnetization axis is parallel to the d axis or near the parallel to the d axis at a portion near the d axis, and at the portion near the q axis, the easy magnetization axis is orthogonal to the q axis or near orthogonal to the q axis The rotary electric machine according to any one of claims 59 to 63, wherein the rotary electric machine is oriented such that an arc-shaped magnet magnetic path to be oriented is formed. The rotary electric machine according to any one of claims 59 to 64, wherein each of the magnets is arranged such that end portions adjacent in the circumferential direction have the same polarity. The rotary electric machine according to any one of claims 59 to 64, wherein the inclined surface is formed along a magnet magnetic path. The rotating electrical machine according to any one of claims 59 to 66, wherein the magnet unit has an intrinsic coercive force of 400 [kA / m] or more and a residual magnetic flux density of 1.0 [T] or more. . The armature winding has conducting wire portions (81, 82) arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
In the armature,
An inter-conductor member (57, 142, 143) is provided between the conductor portions in the circumferential direction, and as the inter-conductor member, the circumferential width dimension of the inter-conductor member in one magnetic pole is Wt, the inter-conductor member A magnetic material having a relationship of Wt × Bs ≦ Wm × Br, where Bs is a saturation magnetic flux density, Wm is a width of the circumferential direction of the magnet portion in one magnetic pole, and Br is a residual magnetic flux density of the magnet portion. Or a configuration using a nonmagnetic material,
The rotary electric machine according to any one of claims 59 to 67, wherein an inter-lead member is not provided between the lead portions in the circumferential direction. The armature winding has conducting wire portions (81, 82) arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
The electric rotating machine according to any one of claims 59 to 68, wherein a thickness dimension in a radial direction of the conducting wire portion is smaller than a width dimension in a circumferential direction of one phase in one magnetic pole. The armature winding has conducting wire portions (81, 82) arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction at a position facing the field element,
Each of the conductive wires constituting the conductive wire portion is a bundle of a plurality of strands (86) and is a bundle of strands whose resistance value between the bundled strands is larger than the resistance of the strands themselves. An electric rotating machine according to any one of claims 59 to 69.

Images